Apparatus and Method for Determining Presence of Objects in a Vehicle

ABSTRACT

Vehicle including a first substructure and a second substructure arranged such that an interior space is defined by or between the first and second substructures, and an arrangement for determining whether an object is present in the interior space. The arrangement includes at least one ultrasonic transducer arranged on the second substructure and to transmit ultrasonic waves toward the first substructure and receive any waves reflected by objects in the interior space and a processor coupled to the ultrasonic transducer(s) and arranged to determine whether an object is present in the interior space based on reception of waves by the ultrasonic transducer(s). If the vehicle is an automobile and the interior space is the passenger compartment therein, the first substructure can be the passenger seat and the second substructure can be the A-pillar, in which case, the processor determines the presence or absence of a passenger in the passenger seat.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/940,881 filed Sep. 13, 2004 which is:

1. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/931,288 which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/303,364 filed Nov. 25, 2002, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,784,379;

2. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/174,803 filed Jun. 19, 2002 which is a continuation-in-part of:

a) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/500,346 filed Feb. 8, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,442,504, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is a continuation-in-part of:

-   -   1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/474,783 filed Jun. 7,         1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707, and     -   2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/970,822 filed Nov. 14,         1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757;

b) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/849,558 filed May 4, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,653,577, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/193,209 filed Nov. 17, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490 filed Aug. 4, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is a continuation-in-part of:

-   -   1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/474,783 filed Jun. 7,         1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707, and     -   2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/970,822 filed Nov. 14,         1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757;

c) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/849,559 filed May 4, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,689,962, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/193,209 filed Nov. 17, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490 filed Aug. 4, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is a continuation-in-part of:

-   -   1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/474,783 filed Jun. 7,         1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707, and     -   2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/970,822 filed Nov. 14,         1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757;

d) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/901,879 filed Jul. 9, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,555,766, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/849,559 filed May 4, 2001 which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/193,209 filed Nov. 17, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490 filed Aug. 4, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is a continuation-in-part of:

-   -   1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/474,783 filed Jun. 7,         1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707, and     -   2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/970,822 filed Nov. 14,         1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757;

e) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/753,186 filed Jan. 2, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,484,080;

f) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/767,020 filed Jan. 23, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,533,316; and

g) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/770,974 filed Jan. 26, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,648,367;

3. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/457,238 filed Jun. 9, 2003 which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. §1 19(e) of U.S. provisional patent application Ser. No. 60/387,792 filed Jun. 11, 2002;

4. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/061,016 filed Jan. 30, 2002 which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/901,879 filed Jul. 9, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,555,766, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/849,559 filed May 4, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,689,962, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/193,209 filed Nov. 17, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490 filed Aug. 4, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is a continuation-in-part of: 1) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/474,783 filed Jun. 7, 1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707; and 2) U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/970,822 filed Nov. 14, 1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757; and

5. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/227,781 filed Aug. 26, 2002 which is:

a. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/061,016 filed Jan. 30, 2002, the history of which is set forth above; and

b. a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/500,346 filed Feb. 8, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,442,504, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/128,490 filed Aug. 4, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, which is:

-   -   1) a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No.         08/474,783 filed Jun. 7, 1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707; and     -   2) a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No.         08/970,822 filed Nov. 14, 1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757.

All of the above-referenced applications are incorporated by reference herein.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to an arrangement and method for determining the presence or absence of objects in an asset such as a vehicle, house and cargo trailer. The present invention also relates to the field of sensing, detecting, monitoring and identifying various objects, and parts thereof, which are located in interior spaces of assets.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

All of the patents, patent applications, technical papers and other references mentioned below are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety unless stated otherwise.

Background information about the embodiments of the invention claimed herein is found in the '881 application, incorporated by reference herein. Definitions of terms used in the instant application are also set forth in the '881 application and the same definitions can be applied herein.

Preferred embodiments of the invention are described below and unless specifically noted, it is the applicants' intention that the words and phrases in the specification and claims be given the ordinary and accustomed meaning to those of ordinary skill in the applicable art(s). If the applicants intend any other meaning, they will specifically state they are applying a special meaning to a word or phrase.

Likewise, applicants' use of the word “function” here is not intended to indicate that the applicants seek to invoke the special provisions of 35 U.S.C. §112, sixth paragraph, to define their invention. To the contrary, if applicants wish to invoke the provisions of 35 U.S.C. §112, sixth paragraph, to define their invention, they will specifically set forth in the claims the phrases “means for” or “step for” and a function, without also reciting in that phrase any structure, material or act in support of the function. Moreover, even if applicants invoke the provisions of 35 U.S.C. §112, sixth paragraph, to define their invention, it is the applicants' intention that their inventions not be limited to the specific structure, material or acts that are described in the preferred embodiments herein. Rather, if applicants claim their inventions by specifically invoking the provisions of 35 U.S.C. § 112, sixth paragraph, it is nonetheless their intention to cover and include any and all structure, materials or acts that perform the claimed function, along with any and all known or later developed equivalent structures, materials or acts for performing the claimed function.

OBJECTS AND SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide new and improved methods and arrangements for detecting whether an object is present in an interior space of a movable asset such as a vehicle. Possible interior spaces of movable assets include the passenger compartment of an automobile and the cargo bay of a truck trailer.

It is another object of the present invention to provide a new and improved method for generating an algorithm capable of operationally determining whether interior spaces of assets are empty or occupied.

In order to achieve at least one of these objects and others, one embodiment of a vehicle in accordance with the invention includes a plurality of parts or components defining an interior space in which one or more objects can be situated, the parts or components including a first substructure and a second substructure arranged opposite at least a part of the first substructure such that the interior space is defined in part by or between the first and second substructures, and an arrangement for determining whether an object is present in the interior space which includes at least one ultrasonic transducer arranged on the second substructure and to transmit ultrasonic waves toward the first substructure and receive any waves reflected by objects in the interior space and a processor coupled to the ultrasonic transducer(s) and arranged to determine whether an object is present in the interior space based on any reception of waves by the ultrasonic transducer(s). Thus, if the vehicle is an automobile and the interior space is the passenger compartment therein, the first substructure can be a front, substantially L-shaped passenger seat and the second substructure can be the A-pillar, in which case, the processor determines the presence or absence of a passenger in the passenger seat. A determination of occupancy of the front passenger seat is useful for deciding whether to allow an occupant protection device, such as an airbag, to be deployed in a crash involving the vehicle.

Variations in the arrangement include the ultrasonic transducer being controlled to associate reception of waves in discrete periods of time with specific timed transmissions of waves and the arrangement including a processing circuit coupled to the ultrasonic transducer(s) and arranged to remove at least one portion of each wave received by the ultrasonic transducer(s) in each time period to thereby form a shortened returned wave. The processor is coupled to the processing circuit and determines whether an object is present in the interior space based on the shortened returned waves formed by the processing circuit. The portion of the wave removed may be an end wave portion at the end of the time period. When a plurality of ultrasonic transducers are arranged on the second substructure, they can be arranged in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields. Each ultrasonic transducer can comprise an ultrasonic transmitter and an ultrasonic received arranger in a common housing. Also, each ultrasonic transducer can be mounted at or proximate a top of the second substructure such that waves are transmitted in a downward direction toward the first substructure.

The processor may comprise a pattern recognition algorithm, and more specifically, a neural network arranged to determine whether an object is present in a training stage in which ultrasonic waves received by the ultrasonic transducer(s) in the absence of objects in the interior space and ultrasonic waves received by the ultrasonic transducer(s) with objects present in the interior space are collected and used to derive the neural network.

The arrangement preferably includes a temperature determining mechanism for determining the temperature of the atmosphere in the interior space so that transmission of the ultrasonic waves and/or processing of the received ultrasonic waves can be modified based on the determined temperature. Such modification may involve modifying a frequency at which the ultrasonic waves are transmitted based on the determined temperature to provide for a substantially constant wavelength of the transmitted ultrasonic waves over a range of temperatures and/or determining a size of a portion of waves to be removed from a larger set of waves received during each discrete period of time based on the determined temperature such that the analyzed waves emanate from the same distance or distance range from the at least one transducer.

Moreover, the arrangement preferably includes a humidity determining mechanism for determining the humidity of the atmosphere in the interior space and a parameter determining mechanism for determining at least one acceptable or optimum parameter for the transmission of ultrasonic waves via each ultrasonic transducer or for the reception of ultrasonic waves via each ultrasonic transducer based on the determined humidity. Each parameter is designed to compensate for any increased attenuation of ultrasonic waves resulting from humidity above a threshold. The ultrasonic waves are transmitted via the ultrasonic transducer(s) into the interior space using the determined parameter(s) or any reflected waves being received via the ultrasonic transducer(s) using the determined parameter(s). The parameter determining mechanism optionally determines transmission power of the ultrasonic waves or amplification for the reception of the ultrasonic waves.

In another embodiment of a vehicle in accordance with the invention which provides for a detection of the presence or absence of an object in an interior space therein, the arrangement for determining whether an object is present in the interior space includes a transmitting system arranged on the second substructure for transmitting ultrasonic waves at different times toward the first substructure, a receiving system arranged on the second substructure for receiving any waves reflected from objects in the interior space during a period of time after each transmission and a processor coupled to the transmitting system and the receiving system for determining whether an object is present in the interior space based on any waves received by the receiving system. The transmitting and receiving system may comprise a plurality of ultrasonic transducers arranged on the second substructure in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields. The variations described above for the ultrasonic transducers and processor are also applicable in this embodiment.

A method for determining whether an object is present in an interior space of a movable asset, such as a vehicle, in accordance with the invention includes arranging at least one ultrasonic transducer on one side of the interior space, transmitting ultrasonic waves via the ultrasonic transducer(s) into the interior space, receiving any waves reflected by objects in the interior space via the ultrasonic transducer(s), when a wave is received, removing at least one portion of each received wave in a discrete period of time to thereby form a shortened wave, and determining whether an object is present in the interior space based on any reception of waves by the ultrasonic transducer(s) and when waves are received in a discrete period of time, upon analysis of the shortened wave formed therefrom. The portion of each received wave being removed may be an end wave portion ending at the end of a data sampling interval. When multiple ultrasonic transducers are provided, they are preferably arranged in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields.

Another method for determining whether an object is present in an interior space of a movable asset, such as a vehicle, in accordance with the invention includes arranging at least one ultrasonic transducer on one side of the interior space, transmitting ultrasonic waves via the ultrasonic transducer(s) into the interior space, receiving any waves reflected from objects in the interior space during a succession of time windows following transmissions of ultrasonic waves and via the ultrasonic transducer(s), and upon reception of any waves, removing at least one portion of each received wave in each time window to thereby form a shortened wave, determining whether an object is present in the interior space based on any reception of waves by the ultrasonic transducer(s) and when waves are received during the time windows, upon analysis of the shortened wave formed therefrom. The portion of each received wave being removed may be an end wave portion ending at the end of a data sampling interval. When multiple ultrasonic transducers are provided, they are preferably arranged in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields.

A method for generating an algorithm capable of operationally determining whether interior spaces of assets such as vehicles are empty or occupied includes mounting a plurality of ultrasonic transducers on the assets in substantially the same positions and such that each has a transmission and reception field including at least part of the interior space, and in a training stage utilizing at least one of the assets, obtaining data from the ultrasonic transducers while the interior space has one of a plurality of different states selected from an empty state and an occupied state in which one or more objects are present, forming a vector from the data from the ultrasonic transducers obtained while the interior space has a particular state, changing the state of the interior space and for each state, repeating the steps of obtaining data from the ultrasonic transducers and forming a vector from the data until a plurality of vectors are formed for different states including the empty state and at least one of the occupied states, and generating the algorithm based on the vectors such that upon operational input from the ultrasonic transducers, the algorithm is capable of outputting a determination of whether the interior space is empty or occupied. The algorithm is installed in a processor on the assets having ultrasonic transducers in substantially the same positions. Optionally, the vectors are modified prior to generating the algorithm by removing at least one portion of the wave received by each ultrasonic transducer during a discrete period of time. Modification of the vectors may entail removing an end portion of the wave during the time period.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The following drawings are illustrative of embodiments of the system developed or adapted using the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein and are not meant to limit the scope of the invention as encompassed by the claims.

FIG. 1 is a side view with parts cutaway and removed of a vehicle showing the passenger compartment containing a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat and a preferred mounting location for an occupant and rear facing child seat presence detector including an antenna field sensor and a resonator or reflector placed onto the forward most portion of the child seat.

FIG. 2 is a side view with parts cutaway and removed showing schematically the interface between the vehicle interior monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein and the vehicle cellular or other telematics communication system including an antenna field sensor.

FIG. 3 is a side view with parts cutaway and removed of a vehicle showing the passenger compartment containing a box on the front passenger seat and a preferred mounting location for an occupant and rear facing child seat presence detector and including an antenna field sensor.

FIG. 4 is a side view with parts cutaway and removed of a vehicle showing the passenger compartment containing a driver and a preferred mounting location for an occupant identification system and including an antenna field sensor and an inattentiveness response button.

FIG. 5 is a side view, with certain portions removed or cut away, of a portion of the passenger compartment of a vehicle showing several preferred mounting locations of occupant position sensors for sensing the position of the vehicle driver.

FIG. 6 shows a seated-state detecting unit in accordance with the present invention and the connections between ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensors, a weight sensor, a reclining angle detecting sensor, a seat track position detecting sensor, a heartbeat sensor, a motion sensor, a neural network, and an airbag system installed within a vehicle compartment.

FIG. 6A is an illustration as in FIG. 6 with the replacement of a strain gage weight sensor within a cavity within the seat cushion for the bladder weight sensor of FIG. 6.

FIG. 6B is a schematic showing the manner in which dynamic forces of the vehicle can be compensated for in a weight measurement of the occupant.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a vehicle showing the position of the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensors relative to the driver and front passenger seats.

FIG. 8A is a side planar view, with certain portions removed or cut away, of a portion of the passenger compartment of a vehicle showing several preferred mounting locations of interior vehicle monitoring sensors shown particularly for sensing the vehicle driver illustrating the wave pattern from a CCD or CMOS optical position sensor mounted along the side of the driver or centered above his or her head.

FIG. 8B is a view as in FIG. 8A illustrating the wave pattern from an optical system using an infrared light source and a CCD or CMOS array receiver using the windshield as a reflection surface and showing schematically the interface between the vehicle interior monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein and an instrument panel mounted inattentiveness warning light or buzzer and reset button.

FIG. 8C is a view as in FIG. 8A illustrating the wave pattern from an optical system using an infrared light source and a CCD or CMOS array receiver where the CCD or CMOS array receiver is covered by a lens permitting a wide angle view of the contents of the passenger compartment.

FIG. 8D is a view as in FIG. 8A illustrating the wave pattern from a pair of small CCD or CMOS array receivers and one infrared transmitter where the spacing of the CCD or CMOS arrays permits an accurate measurement of the distance to features on the occupant.

FIG. 8E is a view as in FIG. 8A illustrating the wave pattern from a set of ultrasonic transmitter/receivers where the spacing of the transducers and the phase of the signal permits an accurate focusing of the ultrasonic beam and thus the accurate measurement of a particular point on the surface of the driver.

FIG. 9 is a circuit diagram of the seated-state detecting unit of the present invention.

FIGS. 10(a), 10(b) and 10(c) are each a diagram showing the configuration of the reflected waves of an ultrasonic wave transmitted from each transmitter of the ultrasonic sensors toward the passenger seat, obtained within the time that the reflected wave arrives at a receiver, FIG. 10(a) showing an example of the reflected waves obtained when a passenger is in a normal seated-state, FIG. 10(b) showing an example of the reflected waves obtained when a passenger is in an abnormal seated-state (where the passenger is seated too close to the instrument panel), and FIG. 10(c) showing a transmit pulse.

FIG. 11 is a diagram of the data processing of the reflected waves from the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensors.

FIG. 12 a flowchart showing the training steps of a neural network.

FIG. 13 a is an explanatory diagram of a process for normalizing the reflected wave and shows normalized reflected waves.

FIG. 13 b is a diagram similar to FIG. 13 a showing a step of extracting data based on the normalized reflected waves and a step of weighting the extracted data by employing the data of the seat track position detecting sensor, the data of the reclining angle detecting sensor, and the data of the weight sensor.

FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the interior of the passenger compartment of an automobile, with parts cut away and removed, showing a variety of transmitters that can be used in a phased array system.

FIG. 15 is a perspective view of a vehicle containing an adult occupant and an occupied infant seat on the front seat with the vehicle shown in phantom illustrating one preferred location of the transducers placed according to the methods taught in at least one of the inventions disclosed herein.

FIG. 16 is a schematic illustration of a system for controlling operation of a vehicle or a component thereof based on recognition of an authorized individual.

FIG. 17 is a schematic illustration of a method for controlling operation of a vehicle based on recognition of an individual.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a seat shown in phantom, with a movable headrest and sensors for measuring the height of the occupant from the vehicle seat, and a weight sensor shown mounted onto the seat.

FIG. 18A is a view taken along line 18A-18A in FIG. 18.

FIG. 18B is an enlarged view of the section designated 18B in FIG. 18.

FIG. 18C is a view of another embodiment of a seat with a weight sensor similar to the view shown in FIG. 18A.

FIG. 18D is a view of another embodiment of a seat with a weight sensor in which a SAW strain gage is placed on the bottom surface of the cushion.

FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a one embodiment of an apparatus for measuring the weight of an occupying item of a seat illustrating weight sensing transducers mounted on a seat control mechanism portion which is attached directly to the seat.

FIG. 20 illustrates a seat structure with the seat cushion and back cushion removed illustrating a three-slide attachment of the seat to the vehicle and preferred mounting locations on the seat structure for strain measuring weight sensors of an apparatus for measuring the weight of an occupying item of a seat in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 20A illustrates an alternate view of the seat structure transducer mounting location taken in the circle 20A of FIG. 20 with the addition of a gusset and where the strain gage is mounted onto the gusset.

FIG. 20B illustrates a mounting location for a weight sensing transducer on a centralized transverse support member in an apparatus for measuring the weight of an occupying item of a seat in accordance with the invention.

FIGS. 21A, 21B and 21C illustrate three alternate methods of mounting strain transducers of an apparatus for measuring the weight of an occupying item of a seat in accordance with the invention onto a tubular seat support structural member.

FIG. 22 illustrates an alternate weight sensing transducer utilizing pressure sensitive transducers.

FIG. 22A illustrates a part of another alternate weight sensing system for a seat.

FIG. 23 illustrates an alternate seat structure assembly utilizing strain transducers.

FIG. 23A is a perspective view of a cantilevered beam type load cell for use with the weight measurement system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein for mounting locations of FIG. 23, for example.

FIG. 23B is a perspective view of a simply supported beam type load cell for use with the weight measurement system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein as an alternate to the cantilevered load cell of FIG. 23A.

FIG. 23C is an enlarged view of the portion designated 23C in FIG. 23B.

FIG. 23D is a perspective view of a tubular load cell for use with the weight measurement system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein as an alternate to the cantilevered load cell of FIG. 23A.

FIG. 23E is a perspective view of a torsional beam load cell for use with the weight measurement apparatus in accordance with the invention as an alternate to the cantilevered load cell of FIG. 23A.

FIG. 24 is a perspective view of an automatic seat adjustment system, with the seat shown in phantom, with a movable headrest and sensors for measuring the height of the occupant from the vehicle seat showing motors for moving the seat and a control circuit connected to the sensors and motors.

FIG. 25 is a view of the seat of FIG. 24 showing a system for changing the stiffness and the damping of the seat.

FIG. 25A is a view of the seat of FIG. 24 wherein the bladder contains a plurality of chambers.

FIG. 26 is a schematic drawing of one embodiment of an occupant restraint device control system in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the operation of one embodiment of an occupant restraint device control method in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 28 is a view showing an inflated airbag and an arrangement for controlling both the flow of gas into and the flow of gas out of the airbag during the crash where the determination is made based on a height sensor located in the headrest and a weight sensor in the seat.

FIG. 28A illustrates the valving system of FIG. 28.

FIG. 29A is a schematic drawing of the basic embodiment of the adjustment system in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 29B is a schematic drawing of another basic embodiment of the adjustment system in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart of an arrangement for controlling a component in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 31 is a side plan view of the interior of an automobile, with portions cut away and removed, with two occupant height measuring sensors, one mounted into the headliner above the occupant's head and the other mounted onto the A-pillar and also showing a seatbelt associated with the seat wherein the seatbelt has an adjustable upper anchorage point which is automatically adjusted based on the height of the occupant.

FIG. 32 is a view of the seat of FIG. 24 showing motors for changing the tilt of seat back and the lumbar support.

FIG. 33 is a view as in FIG. 31 showing a driver and driver seat with an automatically adjustable steering column and pedal system which is adjusted based on the morphology of the driver.

FIG. 34 is a view similar to FIG. 24 showing the occupant's eyes and the seat adjusted to place the eyes at a particular vertical position for proper viewing through the windshield and rear view mirror.

FIG. 35A is a perspective view showing a shipping container including one embodiment of the monitoring system in accordance with the present invention.

FIG. 35B is a cross-sectional view of the shipping container shown in FIG. 35A.

FIG. 36A is a flow chart showing one manner in which a container is monitored in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of a container showing the use of RFID technology in a monitoring system and method in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 36C is a cross-sectional view of a container showing the use of barcode technology in a monitoring system and method in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing one manner in which multiple assets are monitored in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 38 is a diagram of one exemplifying embodiment of the invention.

FIG. 39 is a schematic view of overall telematics system in accordance with the invention.

FIG. 40 is a circuit diagram showing a method of approximately compensating for the drop-off in signal strength due to distance to the target.

FIG. 41 illustrates a circuit that performs a quasi-logarithmic compression amplification of the return signal.

FIG. 42 illustrates a damped transducer where the damping material is placed in the transducer cone.

FIG. 43 illustrates the superimposed reflections from a target placed at three distances from the transducer, 9 cm, 50 cm and 1 meter respectively for a transducer with a damped cone as shown in FIG. 42.

FIG. 44 illustrates the superimposed reflections from a target placed at 16.4 cm, 50 cm and 1 meter respectively for a transducer without a damped cone.

FIG. 45A-45F illustrate a variety of examples of a transducer in a tube design. A straight tube with an exponential horn is illustrated in FIG. 45A. FIGS. 45B and 45C illustrate the bending of the tube through 40 degrees and 90 degrees respectively.

FIG. 45D illustrates the incorporation of a single loop and FIG. 45E of multiple loops. FIG. 45F illustrates the use of a small diameter tube.

FIG. 46 illustrates the effect of a delay in the start of the amplifier for a fraction of a millisecond on the ability to measure close objects.

FIGS. 47A and 47B illustrates the use of a Colpits system for permitting the electronic damping the motion of the transducer cone and thereby eliminating the ringing.

FIG. 48 illustrates an alternative method of electronically reducing the ringing of the ultrasonic transducer.

FIG. 49A is an example of a horn shaped to create an elliptical pattern and the resulting pattern is illustrated in FIG. 49B.

FIG. 50 illustrates an alternate method of achieving a particular desired ultrasonic field shape by using a flat reflector.

FIG. 51 is similar to FIG. 50 except a concave reflector is used.

FIG. 52 is similar to FIG. 50 except a convex reflector is used.

FIG. 53 is a diagram of a neural network similar to FIG. 13 b only with a dual architecture with the addition of a post processing operation for both the categorization and position measurement networks and separate hidden layer nodes for each of the two networks.

FIG. 54 is a graph showing a functional relationship between frequency and temperature.

FIG. 55 is a table showing a functional relationship between frequency and temperature.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Note whenever a patent or literature is referred to below it is to be assumed that all of that patent or literature is to be incorporated by reference in its entirety to the extent the disclosure of these reference is necessary. Also note that although many of the examples below relate to a particular vehicle, an automobile, the invention is not limited to any particular vehicle and is thus applicable to all relevant vehicles including shipping containers and truck trailers and to all compartments of a vehicle including, for example, the passenger compartment and the trunk of an automobile or truck.

1. General Occupant Sensors

Referring to the accompanying drawings, FIG. 1 is a side view, with parts cutaway and removed of a vehicle showing the passenger compartment, or passenger container, containing a rear facing child seat 2 on a front passenger seat 4 and a preferred mounting location for a first embodiment of a vehicle interior monitoring system in accordance with the invention. The interior monitoring system is capable of detecting the presence of an object, occupying objects such as a box, an occupant or a rear facing child seat 2, determining the type of object, determining the location of the object, and/or determining another property or characteristic of the object. A property of the object could be the orientation of a child seat, the velocity of an adult and the like. For example, the vehicle interior monitoring system can determine that an object is present on the seat, that the object is a child seat and that the child seat is rear-facing. The vehicle interior monitoring system could also determine that the object is an adult, that he is drunk and that he is out of position relative to the airbag.

In this embodiment, three transducers 6, 8 and 10 are used alone, or, alternately in combination with one or more antenna near field monitoring sensors or transducers, 12, 14 and 16, although any number of wave-transmitting transducers or radiation-receiving receivers may be used. Such transducers or receivers may be of the type that emit or receive a continuous signal, a time varying signal or a spatial varying signal such as in a scanning system and each may comprise only a transmitter which transmits energy, waves or radiation, only a receiver which receives energy, waves or radiation, both a transmitter and a receiver capable of transmitting and receiving energy, waves or radiation, an electric field sensor, a capacitive sensor, or a self-tuning antenna-based sensor, weight sensor, chemical sensor, motion sensor or vibration sensor, for example.

One particular type of radiation-receiving receiver for use in the invention receives electromagnetic waves and another receives ultrasonic waves.

In an ultrasonic embodiment, transducer 8 can be used as a transmitter and transducers 6 and 10 can be used as receivers. Naturally, other combinations can be used such as where all transducers are transceivers (transmitters and receivers). For example, transducer 8 can be constructed to transmit ultrasonic energy toward the front passenger seat, which is modified, in this case by the occupying item of the passenger seat, i.e., the rear facing child seat 2, and the modified waves are received by the transducers 6 and 10, for example. A more common arrangement is where transducers 6, 8 and 10 are all transceivers. Modification of the ultrasonic energy may constitute reflection of the ultrasonic energy as the ultrasonic energy is reflected back by the occupying item of the seat. The waves received by transducers 6 and 10 vary with time depending on the shape of the object occupying the passenger seat, in this case the rear facing child seat 2. Each different occupying item will reflect back waves having a different pattern. Also, the pattern of waves received by transducer 6 will differ from the pattern received by transducer 10 in view of its different mounting location. This difference generally permits the determination of location of the reflecting surface (i.e., the rear facing child seat 2) through triangulation. Through the use of two transducers 6, 10, a sort of stereographic image is received by the two transducers and recorded for analysis by processor 20, which is coupled to the transducers 6, 8, 10, e.g., by wires or wirelessly. This image will differ for each object that is placed on the vehicle seat and it will also change for each position of a particular object and for each position of the vehicle seat. Elements 6, 8, 10, although described as transducers, are representative of any type of component used in a wave-based analysis technique. Also, although the example of an automobile passenger compartment has been shown, the same principle can be used for monitoring the interior of any vehicle including in particular shipping containers and truck trailers.

Wave-type sensors as the transducers 6, 8, 10 as well as electric field sensors 12, 14, 16 are mentioned above. Electric field sensors and wave sensors are essentially the same from the point of view of sensing the presence of an occupant in a vehicle. In both cases, a time varying electric field is disturbed or modified by the presence of the occupant. At high frequencies in the visual, infrared and high frequency radio wave region, the sensor is based on its capability to sense a change of wave characteristics of the electromagnetic field, such as amplitude, phase or frequency. As the frequency drops, other characteristics of the field are measured. At still lower frequencies, the occupant's dielectric properties modify parameters of the reactive electric field in the occupied space between or near the plates of a capacitor. In this latter case, the sensor senses the change in charge distribution on the capacitor plates by measuring, for example, the current wave magnitude or phase in the electric circuit that drives the capacitor. These measured parameters are directly connected with parameters of the displacement current in the occupied space. In all cases, the presence of the occupant reflects, absorbs or modifies the waves or variations in the electric field in the space occupied by the occupant. Thus, for the purposes of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, capacitance, electric field or electromagnetic wave sensors are equivalent and although they are all technically “field” sensors they will be considered as “wave” sensors herein. What follows is a discussion comparing the similarities and differences between two types of field or wave sensors, electromagnetic wave sensors and capacitive sensors as exemplified by Kithil in U.S. Pat. No. 5,702,634.

An electromagnetic field disturbed or emitted by a passenger in the case of an electromagnetic wave sensor, for example, and the electric field sensor of Kithil, for example, are in many ways similar and equivalent for the purposes of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. The electromagnetic wave sensor is an actual electromagnetic wave sensor by definition because they sense parameters of an electromagnetic wave, which is a coupled pair of continuously changing electric and magnetic fields. The electric field here is not a static, potential one. It is essentially a dynamic, rotational electric field coupled with a changing magnetic one, that is, an electromagnetic wave. It cannot be produced by a steady distribution of electric charges. It is initially produced by moving electric charges in a transmitter, even if this transmitter is a passenger body for the case of a passive infrared sensor.

In the Kithil sensor, a static electric field is declared as an initial material agent coupling a passenger and a sensor (see Column 5, lines 5-7: “The proximity sensor 12 each function by creating an electrostatic field between oscillator input loop 54 and detector output loop 56, which is affected by presence of a person near by, as a result of capacitive coupling, . . . ”). It is a potential, non-rotational electric field. It is not necessarily coupled with any magnetic field. It is the electric field of a capacitor. It can be produced with a steady distribution of electric charges. Thus, it is not an electromagnetic wave by definition but if the sensor is driven by a varying current, then it produces a quasistatic electric field in the space between/near the plates of the capacitor.

Kithil declares that his capacitance sensor uses a static electric field. Thus, from the consideration above, one can conclude that Kithil's sensor cannot be treated as a wave sensor because there are no actual electromagnetic waves but only a static electric field of the capacitor in the sensor system. However, this is not believed to be the case. The Kithil system could not operate with a true static electric field because a steady system does not carry any information. Therefore, Kithil is forced to use an oscillator, causing an alternate current in the capacitor and a reactive quasi-static electric field in the space between the capacitor plates, and a detector to reveal an informative change of the sensor capacitance caused by the presence of an occupant (see FIG. 7 and its description). In this case, the system becomes a “wave sensor” in the sense that it starts generating an actual time-varying electric field that certainly originates electromagnetic waves according to the definition above. That is, Kithil's sensor can be treated as a wave sensor regardless of the shape of the electric field that it creates, a beam or a spread shape.

As follows from the Kithil patent, the capacitor sensor is likely a parametric system where the capacitance of the sensor is controlled by the influence of the passenger body. This influence is transferred by means of the near electromagnetic field (i.e., the wave-like process) coupling the capacitor electrodes and the body. It is important to note that the same influence takes place with a real static electric field also, that is in absence of any wave phenomenon. This would be a situation if there were no oscillator in Kithil's system. However, such a system is not workable and thus Kithil reverts to a dynamic system using time-varying electric fields.

Thus, although Kithil declares that the coupling is due to a static electric field, such a situation is not realized in his system because an alternating electromagnetic field (“quasi-wave”) exists in the system due to the oscillator. Thus, his sensor is actually a wave sensor, that is, it is sensitive to a change of a wave field in the vehicle compartment. This change is measured by measuring the change of its capacitance. The capacitance of the sensor system is determined by the configuration of its electrodes, one of which is a human body, that is, the passenger inside of and the part which controls the electrode configuration and hence a sensor parameter, the capacitance.

The physics definition of “wave” from Webster's Encyclopedic Unabridged Dictionary is: “11. Physics. A progressive disturbance propagated from point to point in a medium or space without progress or advance of the points themselves, . . . . . . . ” In a capacitor, the time that it takes for the disturbance (a change in voltage) to propagate through space, the dielectric and to the opposite plate is generally small and neglected but it is not zero. As the frequency driving the capacitor increases and the distance separating the plates increases, this transmission time as a percentage of the period of oscillation can become significant. Nevertheless, an observer between the plates will see the rise and fall of the electric field much like a person standing in the water of an ocean. The presence of a dielectric body between the plates causes the waves to get bigger as more electrons flow to and from the plates of the capacitor. Thus, an occupant affects the magnitude of these waves which is sensed by the capacitor circuit. Thus, the electromagnetic field is a material agent that carries information about a passenger's position in both Kithil's and a beam-type electromagnetic wave sensor.

For ultrasonic systems, the “image” recorded from each ultrasonic transducer/receiver, is actually a time series of digitized data of the amplitude of the received signal versus time. Since there are two receivers, two time series are obtained which are processed by the processor 20. The processor 20 may include electronic circuitry and associated, embedded software. Processor 20 constitutes one form of generating means in accordance with the invention which generates information about the occupancy of the passenger compartment based on the waves received by the transducers 6, 8, 10.

When different objects are placed on the front passenger seat, the images from transducers 6, 8, 10 for example, are different but there are also similarities between all images of rear facing child seats, for example, regardless of where on the vehicle seat it is placed and regardless of what company manufactured the child seat. Alternately, there will be similarities between all images of people sitting on the seat regardless of what they are wearing, their age or size. The problem is to find the “rules” which differentiate the images of one type of object from the images of other types of objects, e.g., which differentiate the occupant images from the rear facing child seat images. The similarities of these images for various child seats are frequently not obvious to a person looking at plots of the time series and thus computer algorithms are developed to sort out the various patterns. For a more detailed discussion of pattern recognition see U.S. RE 37260 to Varga et al.

The determination of these rules is important to the pattern recognition techniques used in at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. In general, three approaches have been useful, artificial intelligence, fuzzy logic and artificial neural networks (including cellular and modular or combination neural networks and support vector machines—although additional types of pattern recognition techniques may also be used, such as sensor fusion). In some implementations of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, such as the determination that there is an object in the path of a closing window as described below, the rules are sufficiently obvious that a trained researcher can sometimes look at the returned signals and devise a simple algorithm to make the required determinations. In others, such as the determination of the presence of a rear facing child seat or of an occupant, artificial neural networks can be used to determine the rules. One such set of neural network software for determining the pattern recognition rules is available from the International Scientific Research, Inc. of Panama City, Panama.

Electromagnetic energy based occupant sensors exist that use many portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. A system based on the ultraviolet, visible or infrared portions of the spectrum generally operate with a transmitter and a receiver of reflected radiation. The receiver may be a camera or a photo detector such as a pin or avalanche diode as described in detail in above-referenced patents and patent applications. At other frequencies, the absorption of the electromagnetic energy is primarily used and at still other frequencies the capacitance or electric field influencing effects are used. Generally, the human body will reflect, scatter, absorb or transmit electromagnetic energy in various degrees depending on the frequency of the electromagnetic waves. All such occupant sensors are included herein.

In an embodiment wherein electromagnetic energy is used, it is to be appreciated that any portion of the electromagnetic signals that impinges upon, surrounds or involves a body portion of the occupant is at least partially absorbed by the body portion. Sometimes, this is due to the fact that the human body is composed primarily of water, and that electromagnetic energy of certain frequencies is readily absorbed by water. The amount of electromagnetic signal absorption is related to the frequency of the signal, and size or bulk of the body portion that the signal impinges upon. For example, a torso of a human body tends to absorb a greater percentage of electromagnetic energy than a hand of a human body.

Thus, when electromagnetic waves or energy signals are transmitted by a transmitter, the returning waves received by a receiver provide an indication of the absorption of the electromagnetic energy. That is, absorption of electromagnetic energy will vary depending on the presence or absence of a human occupant, the occupant's size, bulk, surface reflectivity, etc. depending on the frequency, so that different signals will be received relating to the degree or extent of absorption by the occupying item on the seat. The receiver will produce a signal representative of the returned waves or energy signals which will thus constitute an absorption signal as it corresponds to the absorption of electromagnetic energy by the occupying item in the seat.

One or more of the transducers 6, 8, 10 can also be image-receiving devices, such as cameras, which take images of the interior of the passenger compartment. These images can be transmitted to a remote facility to monitor the passenger compartment or can be stored in a memory device for use in the event of an accident, i.e., to determine the status of the occupant(s) of the vehicle prior to the accident. In this manner, it can be ascertained whether the driver was falling asleep, talking on the phone, etc.

A memory device for storing images of the passenger compartment, and also for receiving and storing any other information, parameters and variables relating to the vehicle or occupancy of the vehicle, may be in the form a standardized “black box” (instead of or in addition to a memory part in a processor 20). The IEEE Standards Association is currently beginning to develop an international standard for motor vehicle event data recorders. The information stored in the black box and/or memory unit in the processor 20, can include the images of the interior of the passenger compartment as well as the number of occupants and the health state of the occupant(s). The black box would preferably be tamper-proof and crash-proof and enable retrieval of the information after a crash.

Transducer 8 can also be a source of electromagnetic radiation, such as an LED, and transducers 6 and 10 can be CMOS, CCD imagers or other devices sensitive to electromagnetic radiation or fields. This “image” or return signal will differ for each object that is placed on the vehicle seat, or elsewhere in the vehicle, and it will also change for each position of a particular object and for each position of the vehicle seat or other movable objects within the vehicle. Elements 6, 8, 10, although described as transducers, are representative of any type of component used in a wave-based or electric field analysis technique, including, e.g., a transmitter, receiver, antenna or a capacitor plate.

Transducers 12, 14 and 16 can be antennas placed in the seat and instrument panel, or other convenient location within the vehicle, such that the presence of an object, particularly a water-containing object such as a human, disturbs the near field of the antenna. This disturbance can be detected by various means such as with Micrel parts MICREF102 and MICREF104, which have a built-in antenna auto-tune circuit. Note, these parts cannot be used as is and it is necessary to redesign the chips to allow the auto-tune information to be retrieved from the chip.

Other types of transducers can be used along with the transducers 6, 8, 10 or separately and all are contemplated by at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. Such transducers include other wave devices such as radar or electronic field sensing systems such as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,241, U.S. Pat. No. 5,602,734, U.S. Pat. No. 5,691,693, U.S. Pat. No. 5,802,479, U.S. Pat. No. 5,844,486, U.S. Pat. No. 6,014,602, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,275,146 to Kithil, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,948,031 to Rittmueller. Another technology, for example, uses the fact that the content of the near field of an antenna affects the resonant tuning of the antenna. Examples of such a device are shown as antennas 12, 14 and 16 in FIG. 1. By going to lower frequencies, the near field range is increased and also at such lower frequencies, a ferrite-type antenna could be used to minimize the size of the antenna. Other antennas that may be applicable for a particular implementation include dipole, microstrip, patch, Yagi etc. The frequency transmitted by the antenna can be swept and the (VSWR) voltage and current in the antenna feed circuit can be measured. Classification by frequency domain is then possible. That is, if the circuit is tuned by the antenna, the frequency can be measured to determine the object in the field.

An alternate system is shown in FIG. 2, which is a side view showing schematically the interface between the vehicle interior monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein and the vehicle cellular or other communication system 32, such as a satellite based system such as that supplied by Skybitz, having an associated antenna 34. In this view, an adult occupant 30 is shown sitting on the front passenger seat 4 and two transducers 6 and 8 are used to determine the presence (or absence) of the occupant on that seat 4. One of the transducers 8 in this case acts as both a transmitter and receiver while the other transducer 6 acts only as a receiver. Alternately, transducer 6 could serve as both a transmitter and receiver or the transmitting function could be alternated between the two devices. Also, in many cases, more that two transmitters and receivers are used and in still other cases, other types of sensors, such as weight, chemical, radiation, vibration, acoustic, seatbelt tension sensor or switch, heartbeat, self tuning antennas (12, 14), motion and seat and seatback position sensors, are also used alone or in combination with the transducers 6 and 8. As is also the case in FIG. 1, the transducers 6 and 8 are attached to the vehicle embedded in the A-pillar and headliner trim, where their presence is disguised, and are connected to processor 20 that may also be hidden in the trim as shown or elsewhere. Naturally, other mounting locations can also be used and, in most cases, preferred as disclosed in Varga et. al. (U.S. RE 37260).

The transducers 6 and 8 in conjunction with the pattern recognition hardware and software described below enable the determination of the presence of an occupant within a short time after the vehicle is started. The software is implemented in processor 20 and is packaged on a printed circuit board or flex circuit along with the transducers 6 and 8. Similar systems can be located to monitor the remaining seats in the vehicle, also determine the presence of occupants at the other seating locations and this result is stored in the computer memory, which is part of each monitoring system processor 20. Processor 20 thus enables a count of the number of occupants in the vehicle to be obtained by addition of the determined presence of occupants by the transducers associated with each seating location, and in fact, can be designed to perform such an addition. Naturally, the principles illustrated for automobile vehicles are applicable by those skilled in the art to other vehicles such as shipping containers or truck trailers and to other compartments of an automotive vehicle such as the vehicle trunk.

For a general object, transducers 6, 8, 9, 10 can also be used to determine the type of object, determine the location of the object, and/or determine another property or characteristic of the object. A property of the object could be the orientation of a child seat, the velocity of an adult and the like. For example, the transducers 6, 8, 9, 10 can be designed to enable a determination that an object is present on the seat, that the object is a child seat and that the child seat is rear-facing.

The transducers 6 and 8 are attached to the vehicle buried in the trim such as the A-pillar trim, where their presence can be disguised, and are connected to processor 20 that may also be hidden in the trim as shown (this being a non-limiting position for the processor 20). The A-pillar is the roof support pillar that is closest to the front of the vehicle and which, in addition to supporting the roof, also supports the front windshield and the front door. Other mounting locations can also be used. For example, transducers 6, 8 can be mounted inside the seat (along with or in place of transducers 12 and 14), in the ceiling of the vehicle, in the B-pillar, in the C-pillar and in the doors. Indeed, the vehicle interior monitoring system in accordance with the invention may comprise a plurality of monitoring units, each arranged to monitor a particular seating location. In this case, for the rear seating locations, transducers might be mounted in the B-pillar or C-pillar or in the rear of the front seat or in the rear side doors. Possible mounting locations for transducers, transmitters, receivers and other occupant sensing devices are disclosed in the above-referenced patent applications and all of these mounting locations are contemplated for use with the transducers described herein.

The cellular phone or other communications system 32 outputs to an antenna 34. The transducers 6, 8, 12 and 14 in conjunction with the pattern recognition hardware and software, which is implemented in processor 20 and is packaged on a printed circuit board or flex circuit along with the transducers 6 and 8, determine the presence of an occupant within a few seconds after the vehicle is started, or within a few seconds after the door is closed. Similar systems located to monitor the remaining seats in the vehicle, also determine the presence of occupants at the other seating locations and this result is stored in the computer memory which is part of each monitoring system processor 20.

Periodically and in particular in the event of an accident, the electronic system associated with the cellular phone system 32 interrogates the various interior monitoring system memories and arrives at a count of the number of occupants in the vehicle, and optionally, even makes a determination as to whether each occupant was wearing a seatbelt and if he or she is moving after the accident. The phone or other communications system then automatically dials the EMS operator (such as 911 or through a telematics service such as OnStar®) and the information obtained from the interior monitoring systems is forwarded so that a determination can be made as to the number of ambulances and other equipment to send to the accident site, for example. Such vehicles will also have a system, such as the global positioning system, which permits the vehicle to determine its exact location and to forward this information to the EMS operator. Other systems can be implemented in conjunction with the communication with the emergency services operator. For example, a microphone and speaker can be activated to permit the operator to attempt to communicate with the vehicle occupant(s) and thereby learn directly of the status and seriousness of the condition of the occupant(s) after the accident.

Thus, in basic embodiments of the invention, wave or other energy-receiving transducers are arranged in the vehicle at appropriate locations, trained if necessary depending on the particular embodiment, and function to determine whether a life form is present in the vehicle and if so, how many life forms are present and where they are located etc. To this end, transducers can be arranged to be operative at only a single seating location or at multiple seating locations with a provision being made to eliminate a repetitive count of occupants. A determination can also be made using the transducers as to whether the life forms are humans, or more specifically, adults, child in child seats, etc. As noted herein, this is possible using pattern recognition techniques. Moreover, the processor or processors associated with the transducers can be trained to determine the location of the life forms, either periodically or continuously or possibly only immediately before, during and after a crash. The location of the life forms can be as general or as specific as necessary depending on the system requirements, i.e., a determination can be made that a human is situated on the driver's seat in a normal position (general) or a determination can be made that a human is situated on the driver's seat and is leaning forward and/or to the side at a specific angle as well as the position of his or her extremities and head and chest (specifically). The degree of detail is limited by several factors, including, for example, the number and position of transducers and training of the pattern recognition algorithm(s).

In addition to the use of transducers to determine the presence and location of occupants in a vehicle, other sensors could also be used. For example, a heartbeat sensor which determines the number and presence of heartbeat signals can also be arranged in the vehicle, which would thus also determine the number of occupants as the number of occupants would be equal to the number of heartbeat signals detected. Conventional heartbeat sensors can be adapted to differentiate between a heartbeat of an adult, a heartbeat of a child and a heartbeat of an animal. As its name implies, a heartbeat sensor detects a heartbeat, and the magnitude and/or frequency thereof, of a human occupant of the seat, if such a human occupant is present. The output of the heartbeat sensor is input to the processor of the interior monitoring system. One heartbeat sensor for use in the invention may be of the types as disclosed in McEwan (U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,012 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,208). The heartbeat sensor can be positioned at any convenient position relative to the seats where occupancy is being monitored. A preferred location is within the vehicle seatback.

An alternative way to determine the number of occupants is to monitor the weight being applied to the seats, i.e., each seating location, by arranging weight sensors at each seating location which might also be able to provide a weight distribution of an object on the seat. Analysis of the weight and/or weight distribution by a predetermined method can provide an indication of occupancy by a human, an adult or child, or an inanimate object.

Another type of sensor which is not believed to have been used in an interior monitoring system previously is a micropower impulse radar (MIR) sensor which determines motion of an occupant and thus can determine his or her heartbeat (as evidenced by motion of the chest). Such an MIR sensor can be arranged to detect motion in a particular area in which the occupant's chest would most likely be situated or could be coupled to an arrangement which determines the location of the occupant's chest and then adjusts the operational field of the MIR sensor based on the determined location of the occupant's chest. A motion sensor utilizing a micro-power impulse radar (MIR) system as disclosed, for example, in McEwan (U.S. Pat. No. 5,361,070), as well as many other patents by the same inventor.

Motion sensing is accomplished by monitoring a particular range from the sensor as disclosed in that patent. MIR is one form of radar which has applicability to occupant sensing and can be mounted at various locations in the vehicle. It has an advantage over ultrasonic sensors in that data can be acquired at a higher speed and thus the motion of an occupant can be more easily tracked. The ability to obtain returns over the entire occupancy range is somewhat more difficult than with ultrasound resulting in a more expensive system overall. MIR has additional advantages in lack of sensitivity to temperature variation and has a comparable resolution to about 40 kHz ultrasound. Resolution comparable to higher frequency ultrasound is also possible. Additionally, multiple MIR sensors can be used when high speed tracking of the motion of an occupant during a crash is required since they can be individually pulsed without interfering with each through time division multiplexing.

An alternative way to determine motion of the occupant(s) is to monitor the weight distribution of the occupant whereby changes in weight distribution after an accident would be highly suggestive of movement of the occupant. A system for determining the weight distribution of the occupants could be integrated or otherwise arranged in the seats such as the front seat 4 of the vehicle and several patents and publications describe such systems.

More generally, any sensor which determines the presence and health state of an occupant can also be integrated into the vehicle interior monitoring system in accordance with the invention. For example, a sensitive motion sensor can determine whether an occupant is breathing and a chemical sensor can determine the amount of carbon dioxide, or the concentration of carbon dioxide, in the air in the passenger compartment of the vehicle which can be correlated to the health state of the occupant(s). The motion sensor and chemical sensor can be designed to have a fixed operational field situated where the occupant's mouth is most likely to be located. In this manner, detection of carbon dioxide in the fixed operational field could be used as an indication of the presence of a human occupant in order to enable the determination of the number of occupants in the vehicle. In the alternative, the motion sensor and chemical sensor can be adjustable and adapted to adjust their operational field in conjunction with a determination by an occupant position and location sensor which would determine the location of specific parts of the occupant's body, e.g., his or her chest or mouth. Furthermore, an occupant position and location sensor can be used to determine the location of the occupant's eyes and determine whether the occupant is conscious, i.e., whether his or her eyes are open or closed or moving.

The use of chemical sensors can also be used to detect whether there is blood present in the vehicle, for example, after an accident. Additionally, microphones can detect whether there is noise in the vehicle caused by groaning, yelling, etc., and transmit any such noise through the cellular or other communication connection to a remote listening facility (such as operated by OnStar®).

In FIG. 3, a view of the system of FIG. 1 is illustrated with a box 28 shown on the front passenger seat in place of a rear facing child seat. The vehicle interior monitoring system is trained to recognize that this box 28 is neither a rear facing child seat nor an occupant and therefore it is treated as an empty seat and the deployment of the airbag or other occupant restraint device is suppressed. For other vehicles, it may be that just the presence of a box or its motion or chemical or radiation effluents that are desired to be monitored. The auto-tune antenna-based system 12, 14 is particularly adept at making this distinction particularly if the box 28 does not contain substantial amounts of water. Although a simple implementation of the auto-tune antenna system is illustrated, it is of course possible to use multiple antennas located in the seat 4 and elsewhere in the passenger compartment and these antenna systems can either operate at one or a multiple of different frequencies to discriminate type, location and/or relative size of the object being investigated. This training can be accomplished using a neural network or modular neural network with the commercially available software. The system assesses the probability that the box 28 is a person, however, and if there is even the remotest chance that it is a person, the airbag deployment is not suppressed. The system is thus typically biased toward enabling airbag deployment.

In cases where different levels of airbag inflation are possible, and there are different levels of injury associated with an out of position occupant being subjected to varying levels of airbag deployment, it is sometimes possible to permit a depowered or low level airbag deployment in cases of uncertainty. If, for example, the neural network has a problem distinguishing whether a box or a forward facing child seat is present on the vehicle seat, the decision can be made to deploy the airbag in a depowered or low level deployment state. Other situations where such a decision could be made would be when there is confusion as to whether a forward facing human is in position or out-of-position.

Neural networks systems frequently have problems in accurately discriminating the exact location of an occupant especially when different-sized occupants are considered. This results in a gray zone around the border of the keep out zone where the system provides a weak fire or weak no fire decision. For those cases, deployment of the airbag in a depowered state can resolve the situation since an occupant in a gray zone around the keep out zone boundary would be unlikely to be injured by such a depowered deployment while significant airbag protection is still being supplied.

Electromagnetic or ultrasonic energy can be transmitted in three modes in determining the position of an occupant, for example. In most of the cases disclosed above, it is assumed that the energy will be transmitted in a broad diverging beam which interacts with a substantial portion of the occupant or other object to be monitored. This method can have the disadvantage that it will reflect first off the nearest object and, especially if that object is close to the transmitter, it may mask the true position of the occupant or object. It can also reflect off many parts of the object where the reflections can be separated in time and processed as in an ultrasonic occupant sensing system. This can also be partially overcome through the use of the second mode which uses a narrow beam. In this case, several narrow beams are used. These beams are aimed in different directions toward the occupant from a position sufficiently away from the occupant or object such that interference is unlikely.

A single receptor could be used provided the beams are either cycled on at different times or are of different frequencies. Another approach is to use a single beam emanating from a location which has an unimpeded view of the occupant or object such as the windshield header in the case of an automobile or near the roof at one end of a trailer or shipping container, for example. If two spaced apart CCD array receivers are used, the angle of the reflected beam can be determined and the location of the occupant can be calculated. The third mode is to use a single beam in a manner so that it scans back and forth and/or up and down, or in some other pattern, across the occupant, object or the space in general. In this manner, an image of the occupant or object can be obtained using a single receptor and pattern recognition software can be used to locate the head or chest of the occupant or size of the object, for example. The beam approach is most applicable to electromagnetic energy but high frequency ultrasound can also be formed into a narrow beam.

A similar effect to modifying the wave transmission mode can also be obtained by varying the characteristics of the receptors. Through appropriate lenses or reflectors, receptors can be made to be most sensitive to radiation emitted from a particular direction. In this manner, a single broad beam transmitter can be used coupled with an array of focused receivers, or a scanning receiver, to obtain a rough image of the occupant or occupying object.

Each of these methods of transmission or reception could be used, for example, at any of the preferred mounting locations shown in FIG. 5.

As shown in FIG. 7, there are provided four sets of wave-receiving sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 mounted within the passenger compartment of an automotive vehicle. Each set of sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 comprises a transmitter and a receiver (or just a receiver in some cases), which may be integrated into a single unit or individual components separated from one another. In this embodiment, the sensor system 6 is mounted on the A-Pillar of the vehicle. The sensor system 9 is mounted on the upper portion of the B-Pillar. The sensor system 8 is mounted on the roof ceiling portion or the headliner. The sensor system 10 is mounted near the middle of an instrument panel 17 in front of the driver's seat 3.

The sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 are preferably ultrasonic or electromagnetic, although sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 can be any other type of sensors which will detect the presence of an occupant from a distance including capacitive or electric field sensors. Also, if the sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 are passive infrared sensors, for example, then they may only comprise a wave-receiver. Recent advances in Quantum Well Infrared Photodetectors by NASA show great promise for this application. See “Many Applications Possible For Largest Quantum Infrared Detector”, Goddard Space Center News Release Feb. 27, 2002.

The Quantum Well Infrared Photodetector is a new detector which promises to be a low-cost alternative to conventional infrared detector technology for a wide range of scientific and commercial applications, and particularly for sensing inside and outside of a vehicle. The main problem that needs to be solved is that it operates at 76 degrees Kelvin (−323 degrees F.). Chips are being developed capable of cooling other chips economically. It remains to be seen if these low temperatures can be economically achieved.

A section of the passenger compartment of an automobile is shown generally as 40 in FIGS. 8A-8D. A driver 30 of the vehicle sits on a seat 3 behind a steering wheel 42, which contains an airbag assembly 44. Airbag assembly 44 may be integrated into the steering wheel assembly or coupled to the steering wheel 42. Five transmitter and/or receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, 52 and 54 are positioned at various places in the passenger compartment to determine the location of various parts of the driver, e.g., the head, chest and torso, relative to the airbag and to otherwise monitor the interior of the passenger compartment. Monitoring of the interior of the passenger compartment can entail detecting the presence or absence of the driver and passengers, differentiating between animate and inanimate objects, detecting the presence of occupied or unoccupied child seats, rear-facing or forward-facing, and identifying and ascertaining the identity of the occupying items in the passenger compartment. Naturally, a similar system can be used for monitoring the interior of a truck, shipping container or other containers.

A processor such as control circuitry 20 is connected to the transmitter/receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, 52, 54 and controls the transmission from the transmitters, if a transmission component is present in the assemblies, and captures the return signals from the receivers, if a receiver component is present in the assemblies. Control circuitry 20 usually contains analog to digital converters (ADCs) or a frame grabber or equivalent, a microprocessor containing sufficient memory and appropriate software including, for example, pattern recognition algorithms, and other appropriate drivers, signal conditioners, signal generators, etc. Usually, in any given implementation, only three or four of the transmitter/receiver assemblies would be used depending on their mounting locations as described below. In some special cases, such as for a simple classification system, only a single or sometimes only two transmitter/receiver assemblies are used.

A portion of the connection between the transmitter/receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, 52, 54 and the control circuitry 20, is shown as wires. These connections can be wires, either individual wires leading from the control circuitry 20 to each of the transmitter/receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, 52, 54 or one or more wire buses or in some cases, wireless data transmission can be used.

The location of the control circuitry 20 in the dashboard of the vehicle is for illustration purposes only and does not limit the location of the control circuitry 20. Rather, the control circuitry 20 may be located anywhere convenient or desired in the vehicle.

It is contemplated that a system and method in accordance with the invention can include a single transmitter and multiple receivers, each at a different location. Thus, each receiver would not be associated with a transmitter forming transmitter/receiver assemblies. Rather, for example, with reference to FIG. 8A, only element 51 could constitute a transmitter/receiver assembly and elements 49, 50, 52 and 54 could be receivers only.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that in some implementations, a system and method in accordance with the invention include a single receiver and multiple transmitters. Thus, each transmitter would not be associated with a receiver forming transmitter/receiver assemblies. Rather, for example, with reference to FIG. 8A, only element 51 would constitute a transmitter/receiver assembly and elements 49, 50, 52, 54 would be transmitters only.

One ultrasonic transmitter/receiver as used herein is similar to that used on modern auto-focus cameras such as manufactured by the Polaroid Corporation. Other camera auto-focusing systems use different technologies, which are also applicable here, to achieve the same distance to object determination. One camera system manufactured by Fuji of Japan, for example, uses a stereoscopic system which could also be used to determine the position of a vehicle occupant providing there is sufficient light available. In the case of insufficient light, a source of infrared light can be added to illuminate the driver. In a related implementation, a source of infrared light is reflected off of the windshield and illuminates the vehicle occupant. An infrared receiver 56 is located attached to the rear view mirror assembly 55, as shown in FIG. 8E. Alternately, the infrared can be sent by the device 50 and received by a receiver elsewhere. Since any of the devices shown in these figures could be either transmitters or receivers or both, for simplicity, only the transmitted and not the reflected wave fronts are frequently illustrated.

When using the surface of the windshield as a reflector of infrared radiation (for transmitter/receiver assembly and element 52), care must be taken to assure that the desired reflectivity at the frequency of interest is achieved. Mirror materials, such as metals and other special materials manufactured by Eastman Kodak, have a reflectivity for infrared frequencies that is substantially higher than at visible frequencies. They are thus candidates for coatings to be placed on the windshield surfaces for this purpose.

There are two preferred methods of implementing the vehicle interior monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, a microprocessor system and an application specific integrated circuit system (ASIC). Both of these systems are represented schematically as 20 herein. In some systems, both a microprocessor and an ASIC are used. In other systems, most if not all of the circuitry is combined onto a single chip (system on a chip). The particular implementation depends on the quantity to be made and economic considerations.

1.1 Ultrasonics

1.1.1 General

The maximum acoustic frequency that is practical to use for acoustic imaging in the systems is about 40 to 160 kilohertz (kHz). The wavelength of a 50 kHz acoustic wave is about 0.6 cm which is too coarse to determine the fine features of a person's face, for example. It is well understood by those skilled in the art that features which are much smaller than the wavelength of the irradiating radiation cannot be distinguished. Similarly, the wavelength of common radar systems varies from about 0.9 cm (for 33 GHz K band) to 133 cm (for 225 MHz P band) which are also too coarse for person-identification systems.

Referring now to FIG. 5, a section of the passenger compartment of an automobile is shown generally as 40 in FIG. 5. A driver of a vehicle 30 sits on a seat 3 behind a steering wheel 42 which contains an airbag assembly 44. Four transmitter and/or receiver assemblies 50, 52, 53 and 54 are positioned at various places in or around the passenger compartment to determine the location of the head, chest and torso of the driver 30 relative to the airbag assembly 44. Usually, in any given implementation, only one or two of the transmitters and receivers would be used depending on their mounting locations as described below.

FIG. 5 illustrates several of the possible locations of such devices. For example, transmitter and receiver 50 emits ultrasonic acoustical waves which bounce off the chest of the driver 30 and return. Periodically, a burst of ultrasonic waves at about 50 kilohertz is emitted by the transmitter/receiver and then the echo, or reflected signal, is detected by the same or different device. An associated electronic circuit measures the time between the transmission and the reception of the ultrasonic waves and determines the distance from the transmitter/receiver to the driver 30 based on the velocity of sound. This information can then be sent to a microprocessor that can be located in the crash sensor and diagnostic circuitry which determines if the driver 30 is close enough to the airbag assembly 44 that a deployment might, by itself, cause injury to the driver 30. In such a case, the circuit disables the airbag system and thereby prevents its deployment. In an alternate case, the sensor algorithm assesses the probability that a crash requiring an airbag is in process and waits until that probability exceeds an amount that is dependent on the position of the driver 30. Thus, for example, the sensor might decide to deploy the airbag based on a need probability assessment of 50%, if the decision must be made immediately for a driver 30 approaching the airbag, but might wait until the probability rises to 95% for a more distant driver. Although a driver system has been illustrated, the passenger system would be similar.

Alternate mountings for the transmitter/receiver include various locations on the instrument panel on either side of the steering column such as 53 in FIG. 5. Also, although some of the devices herein illustrated assume that for the ultrasonic system, the same device is used for both transmitting and receiving waves, there are advantages in separating these functions, at least for standard transducer systems. Since there is a time lag required for the system to stabilize after transmitting a pulse before it can receive a pulse, close measurements are enhanced, for example, by using separate transmitters and receivers. In addition, if the ultrasonic transmitter and receiver are separated, the transmitter can transmit continuously, provided the transmitted signal is modulated such that the received signal can be compared with the transmitted signal to determine the time it takes for the waves to reach and reflect off of the occupant.

Many methods exist for this modulation including varying the frequency or amplitude of the waves or pulse modulation or coding. In all cases, the logic circuit which controls the sensor and receiver must be able to determine when the signal which was most recently received was transmitted. In this manner, even though the time that it takes for the signal to travel from the transmitter to the receiver, via reflection off of the occupant or other object to be monitored, may be several milliseconds, information as to the position of the occupant is received continuously which permits an accurate, although delayed, determination of the occupant's velocity from successive position measurements. Other modulation methods that may be applied to electromagnetic radiations include TDMA, CDMA, noise or pseudo-noise, spatial, etc.

Conventional ultrasonic distance measuring devices must wait for the signal to travel to the occupant or other monitored object and return before a new signal is sent. This greatly limits the frequency at which position data can be obtained to the formula where the frequency is equal to the velocity of sound divided by two times the distance to the occupant. For example, if the velocity of sound is taken at about 1000 feet per second, occupant position data for an occupant or object located one foot from the transmitter can only be obtained every 2 milliseconds which corresponds to a frequency of about 500 Hz. At a three-foot displacement and allowing for some processing time, the frequency is closer to about 100 Hz.

This slow frequency that data can be collected seriously degrades the accuracy of the velocity calculation. The reflection of ultrasonic waves from the clothes of an occupant or the existence of thermal gradients, for example, can cause noise or scatter in the position measurement and lead to significant inaccuracies in a given measurement. When many measurements are taken more rapidly, as in the technique described here, these inaccuracies can be averaged and a significant improvement in the accuracy of the velocity calculation results.

The determination of the velocity of the occupant need not be derived from successive distance measurements. A potentially more accurate method is to make use of the Doppler Effect where the frequency of the reflected waves differs from the transmitted waves by an amount which is proportional to the occupant's velocity. In one embodiment, a single ultrasonic transmitter and a separate receiver are used to measure the position of the occupant, by the travel time of a known signal, and the velocity, by the frequency shift of that signal. Although the Doppler Effect has been used to determine whether an occupant has fallen asleep, it has not previously been used in conjunction with a position measuring device to determine whether an occupant is likely to become out of position, i.e., an extrapolated position in the future based on the occupant's current position and velocity as determined from successive position measurements, and thus in danger of being injured by a deploying airbag, or that a monitored object is moving. This combination is particularly advantageous since both measurements can be accurately and efficiently determined using a single transmitter and receiver pair resulting in a low cost system.

One problem with Doppler measurements is the slight change in frequency that occurs during normal occupant velocities. This requires that sophisticated electronic techniques and a low Q receiver should be utilized to increase the frequency and thereby render it easier to measure the velocity using the phase shift. For many implementations, therefore, the velocity of the occupant is determined by calculating the difference between successive position measurements.

The following discussion will apply to the case where ultrasonic sensors are used although a similar discussion can be presented relative to the use of electromagnetic sensors such as active infrared sensors, taking into account the differences in the technologies. Also, the following discussion will relate to an embodiment wherein the seat is the front passenger seat, although a similar discussion can apply to other vehicles and monitoring situations.

The ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor systems, 6, 8, 9 and 10 in FIG. 7 can be controlled or driven, one at a time or simultaneously, by an appropriate driver circuit such as ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor driver circuit 58 shown in FIG. 9. The transmitters of the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor systems 6, 8, 9 and 10 transmit respective ultrasonic or electromagnetic waves toward the seat 4 and transmit pulses (see FIG. 10(c)) in sequence at times t1, t2, t3 and t4 (t4>t3>t2>t1) or simultaneously (t1=t2=t3=t4). The reflected waves of the ultrasonic or electromagnetic waves are received by the receivers ChA-ChD of the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensors 6, 8, 9 and 10. The receiver ChA is associated with the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor system 8, the receiver ChB is associated with the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor system 5, the receiver ChD is associated with the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor system 6, and the receiver ChD is associated with the ultrasonic or electromagnetic sensor system 9.

FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) show examples of the reflected ultrasonic waves USRW that are received by receivers ChA-ChD. FIG. 10(a) shows an example of the reflected wave USRW that is obtained when an adult sits in a normally seated space on the passenger seat 4, while FIG. 10(b) shows an example of the reflected wave USRW that are obtained when an adult sits in a slouching state (one of the abnormal seated-states) in the passenger seat 4.

In the case of a normally seated passenger, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the location of the ultrasonic sensor system 6 is closest to the passenger A. Therefore, the reflected wave pulse P1 is received earliest after transmission by the receiver ChD as shown in FIG. 10(a), and the width of the reflected wave pulse P1 is larger. Next, the distance from the ultrasonic sensor 8 is closer to the passenger A, so a reflected wave pulse P2 is received earlier by the receiver ChA compared with the remaining reflected wave pulses P3 and P4. Since the reflected wave pauses P3 and P4 take more time than the reflected wave pulses P1 and P2 to arrive at the receivers ChC and ChB, the reflected wave pulses P3 and P4 are received as the timings shown in FIG. 10(a). More specifically, since it is believed that the distance from the ultrasonic sensor system 6 to the passenger A is slightly shorter than the distance from the ultrasonic sensor system 10 to the passenger A, the reflected wave pulse P3 is received slightly earlier by the receiver ChC than the reflected wave pulse P4 is received by the receiver ChB.

In the case where the passenger A is sitting in a slouching state in the passenger seat 4, the distance between the ultrasonic sensor system 6 and the passenger A is shortest. Therefore, the time from transmission at time t3 to reception is shortest, and the reflected wave pulse P3 is received by the receiver ChC, as shown in FIG. 10(b). Next, the distances between the ultrasonic sensor system 10 and the passenger A becomes shorter, so the reflected wave pulse P4 is received earlier by the receiver ChB than the remaining reflected wave pulses P2 and P1. When the distance from the ultrasonic sensor system 8 to the passenger A is compared with that from the ultrasonic sensor system 9 to the passenger A, the distance from the ultrasonic sensor system 8 to the passenger A becomes shorter, so the reflected wave pulse P2 is received by the receiver ChA first and the reflected wave pulse P1 is thus received last by the receiver ChD.

The configurations of the reflected wave pulses P1-P4, the times that the reflected wave pulses P1-P4 are received, the sizes of the reflected wave pulses P1-P4 are varied depending upon the configuration and position of an object such as a passenger situated on the front passenger seat 4. FIGS. 10(a) and (b) merely show examples for the purpose of description and therefore the present invention is not limited to these examples.

The outputs of the receivers ChA-ChD, as shown in FIG. 9, are input to a band pass filter 60 through a multiplex circuit 59 which is switched in synchronization with a timing signal from the ultrasonic sensor drive circuit 58. The band pass filter 60 removes a low frequency wave component from the output signal based on each of the reflected wave USRW and also removes some of the noise. The output signal based on each of the reflected wave USRW is passed through the band pass filter 60, then is amplified by an amplifier 61. The amplifier 61 also removes the high frequency carrier wave component in each of the reflected waves USRW and generates an envelope wave signal. This envelope wave signal is input to an analog/digital converter (ADC) 62 and digitized as measured data. The measured data is input to a processing circuit 63, which is controlled by the timing signal which is in turn output from the ultrasonic sensor drive circuit 58.

The processing circuit 63 collects measured data at intervals of 7 ms (or at another time interval with the time interval also being referred to as a time window or time period), and 47 data points are generated for each of the ultrasonic sensor systems 6, 8, 9 and 10. For each of these reflected waves USRW, the initial reflected wave portion T1 and the last reflected wave portion T2 are cut off or removed in each time window. The reason for this will be described when the training procedure of a neural network is described later, and the description is omitted for now. With this, 32, 31, 37 and 38 data points will be sampled by the ultrasonic sensor systems 6, 8, 9 and 10, respectively. The reason why the number of data points differs for each of the ultrasonic sensor systems 6, 8, 9 and 10 is that the distance from the passenger seat 4 to the ultrasonic sensor systems 6, 8, 9 and 10 differ from one another.

Each of the measured data is input to a normalization circuit 64 and normalized. The normalized measured data is input to the neural network 65 as wave data.

A comprehensive occupant sensing system will now be discussed which involves a variety of different sensors, again this is for illustration purposes only and a similar description can be constructed for other vehicles including shipping container and truck trailer monitoring. Many of these sensors will be discussed in more detail under the appropriate sections below. FIG. 6 shows a passenger seat 70 to which an adjustment apparatus including a seated-state detecting unit according to the present invention may be applied. The seat 70 includes a horizontally situated bottom seat portion 4 and a vertically oriented back portion 72. The seat portion 4 is provided with one or more pressure or weight sensors 7, 76 that determine the weight of the object occupying the seat or the pressure applied by the object to the seat. The coupled portion between the seated portion 4 and the back portion 72 is provided with a reclining angle detecting sensor 57, which detects the tilted angle of the back portion 72 relative to the seat portion 4. The seat portion 4 is provided with a seat track position-detecting sensor 74. The seat track position detecting sensor 74 detects the quantity of movement of the seat portion 4 which is moved from a back reference position, indicated by the dotted chain line. Optionally embedded within the back portion 72 are a heartbeat sensor 71 and a motion sensor 73. Attached to the headliner is a capacitance sensor 78. The seat 70 may be the driver seat, the front passenger seat or any other seat in a motor vehicle as well as other seats in transportation vehicles or seats in non-transportation applications.

Pressure or weight measuring means such as the sensors 7 and 76 are associated with the seat, e.g., mounted into or below the seat portion 4 or on the seat structure, for measuring the pressure or weight applied onto the seat. The pressure or weight may be zero if no occupying item is present and the sensors are calibrated to only measure incremental weight or pressure. Sensors 7 and 76 may represent a plurality of different sensors which measure the pressure or weight applied onto the seat at different portions thereof or for redundancy purposes, e.g., such as by means of an airbag or fluid filled bladder 75 in the seat portion 4. Airbag or bladder 75 may contain a single or a plurality of chambers, each of which may be associated with a sensor (transducer) 76 for measuring the pressure in the chamber. Such sensors may be in the form of strain, force or pressure sensors which measure the force or pressure on the seat portion 4 or seat back 72, a part of the seat portion 4 or seat back 72, displacement measuring sensors which measure the displacement of the seat surface or the entire seat 70 such as through the use of strain gages mounted on the seat structural members, such as 7, or other appropriate locations, or systems which convert displacement into a pressure wherein one or more pressure sensors can be used as a measure of weight and/or weight distribution. Sensors 7, 76 may be of the types disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701 and below herein. Although pressure or weight here is disclosed and illustrated with regard to measuring the pressure applied by or weight of an object occupying a seat in an automobile or truck, the same principles can be used to measure the pressure applied by and weight of objects occupying other vehicles including truck trailers and shipping containers. For example, a series of fluid filled bladders under a segmented floor could be used to measure the weight and weight distribution in a truck trailer.

Many practical problems have arisen during the development stages of bladder and strain gage based weight systems. Some of these problems relate to bladder sensors and in particular to gas-filled bladder sensors and are effectively dealt with in U.S. Pat. No. 5,918,696, U.S. Pat. No. 5,927,427, U.S. Pat. No. 5,957,491, U.S. Pat. No. 5,979,585, U.S. Pat. No. 5,984,349, U.S. Pat. No. 6,021,863, U.S. Pat. No. 6,056,079, U.S. Pat. No. 6,076,853, U.S. Pat. No. 6,260,879 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,286,861. Other problems relate to seatbelt usage and to unanticipated stresses and strains that occur in seat mounting structures and will be discussed below.

As illustrated in FIG. 9, the output of the pressure or weight sensor(s) 7 and 76 is amplified by an amplifier 66 coupled to the pressure or weight sensor(s) 7,76 and the amplified output is input to the analog/digital converter 67.

A heartbeat sensor 71 is arranged to detect a heartbeat, and the magnitude thereof, of a human occupant of the seat, if such a human occupant is present. The output of the heartbeat sensor 71 is input to the neural network 65. The heartbeat sensor 71 may be of the type as disclosed in McEwan (U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,012 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,208). The heartbeat sensor 71 can be positioned at any convenient position relative to the seat 4 where occupancy is being monitored. A preferred location is within the vehicle seatback. The heartbeat of a stowaway in a cargo container or truck trailer can similarly be measured be a sensor on the vehicle floor or other appropriate location that measures vibrations.

The reclining angle detecting sensor 57 and the seat track position-detecting sensor 74, which each may comprise a variable resistor, can be connected to constant-current circuits, respectively. A constant-current is supplied from the constant-current circuit to the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, and the reclining angle detecting sensor 57 converts a change in the resistance value on the tilt of the back portion 72 to a specific voltage. This output voltage is input to an analog/digital converter 68 as angle data, i.e., representative of the angle between the back portion 72 and the seat portion 4. Similarly, a constant current can be supplied from the constant-current circuit to the seat track position-detecting sensor 74 and the seat track position detecting sensor 74 converts a change in the resistance value based on the track position of the seat portion 4 to a specific voltage. This output voltage is input to an analog/digital converter 69 as seat track data. Thus, the outputs of the reclining angle-detecting sensor 57 and the seat track position-detecting sensor 74 are input to the analog/digital converters 68 and 69, respectively. Each digital data value from the ADCs 68, 69 is input to the neural network 65. Although the digitized data of the pressure or weight sensor(s) 7, 76 is input to the neural network 65, the output of the amplifier 66 is also input to a comparison circuit. The comparison circuit, which is incorporated in the gate circuit algorithm, determines whether or not the weight of an object on the passenger seat 70 is more than a predetermined weight, such as 60 lbs., for example. When the weight is more than 60 lbs., the comparison circuit outputs a logic 1 to the gate circuit to be described later. When the weight of the object is less than 60 lbs., a logic 0 is output to the gate circuit. A more detailed description of this and similar systems can be found in the above-referenced patents and patent applications assigned to the current assignee and in the description below. The system described above is one example of many systems that can be designed using the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein for detecting the occupancy state of the seat of a vehicle.

As diagrammed in FIG. 12, the first step is to mount the four sets of ultrasonic sensor systems 11-14, the weight sensors 7,76, the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, and the seat track position detecting sensor 74, for example, into a vehicle (step S1). For other vehicle monitoring tasks different sets of sensors could be used. Next, in order to provide data for the neural network 65 to learn the patterns of seated states, data is recorded for patterns of all possible seated or occupancy states and a list is maintained recording the seated or occupancy states for which data was acquired. The data from the sensors/transducers 6, 8, 9, 10, 57, 71, 73, 74, 76 and 78 for a particular occupancy of the passenger seat, for example, is called a vector (step S2). It should be pointed out that the use of the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, seat track position detecting sensor 74, heartbeat sensor 71, capacitive sensor 78 and motion sensor 73 is not essential to the detecting apparatus and method in accordance with the invention. However, each of these sensors, in combination with any one or more of the other sensors enhances the evaluation of the seated-state of the seat or the occupancy of the vehicle.

Next, based on the training data from the reflected waves of the ultrasonic sensor systems 6, 8, 9, 10 and the other sensors 7, 71, 73, 76, 78 the vector data is collected (step S3). Next, the reflected waves P1-P4 are modified by removing the initial reflected waves from each time window with a short reflection time from an object (range gating) (period T1 in FIG. 11) and the last portion of the reflected waves from each time window with a long reflection time from an object (period P2 in FIG. 11) (step S4). It is believed that the reflected waves with a short reflection time from an object is due to cross-talk, that is, waves from the transmitters which leak into each of their associated receivers ChA-ChD. It is also believed that the reflected waves with a long reflection time are reflected waves from an object far away from the passenger seat or from multipath reflections. If these two reflected wave portions are used as data, they will add noise to the training process. Therefore, these reflected wave portions are eliminated from the data.

Recent advances in ultrasonic transducer design have now permitted the use of a single transducer acting as both a sender (transmitter) and receiver. These same advances have substantially reduced the ringing of the transducer after the excitation pulse has been caused to die out to where targets as close as about 2 inches from the transducer can be sensed. Thus, the magnitude of the T1 time period has been substantially reduced.

As shown in FIG. 13 a, the measured data is normalized by making the peaks of the reflected wave pulses P1-P4 equal (step S5 of FIG. 12). This eliminates the effects of different reflectivities of different objects and people depending on the characteristics of their surfaces such as their clothing. Data from the weight sensor, seat track position sensor and seat reclining angle sensor is also frequently normalized based typically on fixed normalization parameters. When other sensors are used for other types of monitoring, similar techniques are used.

The data from the ultrasonic transducers are now also preferably fed through a logarithmic compression circuit that substantially reduces the magnitude of reflected signals from high reflectivity targets compared to those of low reflectivity. Additionally, a time gain circuit is used to compensate for the difference in sonic strength received by the transducer based on the distance of the reflecting object from the transducer.

As various parts of the vehicle interior identification and monitoring system described in the above reference patents and patent applications are implemented, a variety of transmitting and receiving transducers will be present in the vehicle passenger compartment. If several of these transducers are ultrasonic transmitters and receivers, they can be operated in a phased array manner, as described elsewhere for the headrest, to permit precise distance measurements and mapping of the components of the passenger compartment. This is illustrated in FIG. 14 which is a perspective view of the interior of the passenger compartment showing a variety of transmitters and receivers, 6, 8, 9, 23, 49-51 which can be used in a sort of phased array system. In addition, information can be transmitted between the transducers using coded signals in an ultrasonic network through the vehicle compartment airspace. If one of these sensors is an optical CCD or CMOS array, the location of the driver's eyes can be accurately determined and the results sent to the seat ultrasonically. Obviously, many other possibilities exist for automobile and other vehicle monitoring situations.

To use ultrasonic transducers in a phase array mode generally requires that the transducers have a low Q. Certain new micromachined capacitive transducers appear to be suitable for such an application. The range of such transducers is at present limited, however.

The speed of sound varies with temperature, humidity, and pressure. This can be compensated for by using the fact that the geometry between the transducers is known and the speed of sound can therefore be measured. Thus, on vehicle startup and as often as desired thereafter, the speed of sound can be measured by one transducer, such as transducer 18 in FIG. 15, sending a signal which is directly received by another transducer 5. Since the distance separating them is known, the speed of sound can be calculated and the system automatically adjusted to remove the variation due to variations in the speed of sound. Therefore, the system operates with same accuracy regardless of the temperature, humidity or atmospheric pressure. It may even be possible to use this technique to also automatically compensate for any effects due to wind velocity through an open window. An additional benefit of this system is that it can be used to determine the vehicle interior temperature for use by other control systems within the vehicle since the variation in the velocity of sound is a strong function of temperature and a weak function of pressure and humidity.

The problem with the speed of sound measurement described above is that some object in the vehicle may block the path from one transducer to the other. This of course could be checked and a correction would not be made if the signal from one transducer does not reach the other transducer. The problem, however, is that the path might not be completely blocked but only slightly blocked. This would cause the ultrasonic path length to increase, which would give a false indication of a temperature change. This can be solved by using more than one transducer. All of the transducers can broadcast signals to all of the other transducers. The problem here, of course, is which transducer pair should be believed if they all give different answers. The answer is the one that gives the shortest distance or the greatest calculated speed of sound. By this method, there are a total of 6 separate paths for four ultrasonic transducers.

An alternative method of determining the temperature is to use the transducer circuit to measure some parameter of the transducer that changes with temperature. For example, the natural frequency of ultrasonic transducers changes in a known manner with temperature and therefore by measuring the natural frequency of the transducer, the temperature can be determined. Since this method does not require communication between transducers, it would also work in situations where each transducer has a different resonant frequency.

The process, by which all of the distances are carefully measured from each transducer to the other transducers, and the algorithm developed to determine the speed of sound, is a novel part of the teachings of the instant invention for use with ultrasonic transducers. Prior to this, the speed of sound calculation was based on a single transmission from one transducer to a known second transducer. This resulted in an inaccurate system design and degraded the accuracy of systems in the field.

If the electronic control module that is part of the system is located in generally the same environment as the transducers, another method of determining the temperature is available. This method utilizes a device and whose temperature sensitivity is known and which is located in the same box as the electronic circuit. In fact, in many cases, an existing component on the printed circuit board can be monitored to give an indication of the temperature. For example, the diodes in a log comparison circuit have characteristics that their resistance changes in a known manner with temperature. It can be expected that the electronic module will generally be at a higher temperature than the surrounding environment, however, the temperature difference is a known and predictable amount. Thus, a reasonably good estimation of the temperature in the passenger compartment, or other container compartment, can also be obtained in this manner. Naturally, thermisters or other temperature transducers can be used.

The placement of ultrasonic transducers for the example of ultrasonic occupant position sensor system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein include the following novel disclosures: (1) the application of two sensors to single-axis monitoring of target volumes; (2) the method of locating two sensors spanning a target volume to sense object positions, that is, transducers are mounted along the sensing axis beyond the objects to be sensed; (3) the method of orientation of the sensor axis for optimal target discrimination parallel to the axis of separation of distinguishing target features; and (4) the method of defining the head and shoulders and supporting surfaces as defining humans for rear facing child seat detection and forward facing human detection.

A similar set of observations is available for the use of electromagnetic, capacitive, electric field or other sensors and for other vehicle monitoring situations. Such rules however must take into account that some of such sensors typically are more accurate in measuring lateral and vertical dimensions relative to the sensor than distances perpendicular to the sensor. This is particularly the case for CMOS and CCD-based transducers.

Considerable work is ongoing to improve the resolution of the ultrasonic transducers. To take advantage of higher resolution transducers, data points should be obtained that are closer together in time. This means that after the envelope has been extracted from the returned signal, the sampling rate should be increased from approximately 1000 samples per second to perhaps 2000 samples per second or even higher. By doubling or tripling the amount of data required to be analyzed, the system which is mounted on the vehicle will require greater computational power. This results in a more expensive electronic system. Not all of the data is of equal importance, however. The position of the occupant in the normal seating position does not need to be known with great accuracy whereas, as that occupant is moving toward the keep out zone boundary during pre-crash braking, the spatial accuracy requirements become more important. Fortunately, the neural network algorithm generating system has the capability of indicating to the system designer the relative value of each data point used by the neural network. Thus, as many as, for example, 500 data points per vector may be collected and fed to the neural network during the training stage and, after careful pruning, the final number of data points to be used by the vehicle mounted system may be reduced to 150, for example. This technique of using the neural network algorithm-generating program to prune the input data is an important teaching of the present invention.

By this method, the advantages of higher resolution transducers can be optimally used without increasing the cost of the electronic vehicle-mounted circuits. Also, once the neural network has determined the spacing of the data points, this can be fine-tuned, for example, by acquiring more data points at the edge of the keep out zone as compared to positions well into the safe zone. The initial technique is done by collecting the full 500 data points, for example, while in the system installed in the vehicle the data digitization spacing can be determined by hardware or software so that only the required data is acquired.

1.1.2 Thermal Gradients

Thermal gradients can affect the propagation of sound within a vehicle interior in at least two general ways. These have been termed “long-term” and “short-term” thermal instability. When ultrasound waves travel through a region of varying air density, the direction the waves travel can be bent in much the same way that light waves are bent when going through the waves of a swimming pool resulting in varying reflection patterns off of the bottom.

Long-term instability is caused when a stable thermal gradient occurs in the vehicle as happens, for example, when the sun beats down on the vehicle's roof and the windows are closed. This effect can be reproduced in vehicles in laboratory tests using a heat lamp within the vehicle. The effect has been largely eliminated through training the neural network with data taken when the gradient is present. Additionally, changes in the electronics hardware including greater signal strength and a log amplifier, as discussed below, have eliminated the effect.

Short-term instability results when there is a flow of hot or cold air within the vehicle, such as caused by operating the heater when the vehicle is cold, or the air conditioner when the vehicle is hot. Bench tests have demonstrated that a combination of greater signal strength and a logarithmic amplification of the return signal can substantially reduce the variability of the reflected ultrasound signal from a target caused by short term instability. As with the long-term instability, it is important to train the neural network with this effect present. When the combination of these hardware changes and training is used, the short-term thermal instability is substantially reduced. If the data from five or more consecutive vectors is averaged, the effect becomes insignificant, see pre and post-processing descriptions below. A vector is the combined digitized data from, for example in this case, the four transducers, which is inputted into the neural network as described above.

Different techniques for compensating for thermal gradients are listed below.

1.1.2.1 Logarithmic Compression Amplifier

One method that has proven to be successful in reducing the effects of both short and long term thermal instability is to use a log compression amplifier, also referred to as a log compression amplifier circuit. A log compression amplifier is a general term used here to indicate an amplifier that amplifies the small return signals more than the large signals. Thus, there is a selective amplification of signals. This is coupled with changes to the circuit to increase the signal strength level of the return signal. The increase in signal strength can be accomplished in several ways, for example, by an increase in the transducer drive voltage, which results in a higher sound pressure level, or by generally increasing the gain of the amplifier of the return signal. A circuit diagram showing a method of approximately compensating for the drop-off in signal strength due to the distance between the target and the transducer is shown in FIG. 40. In both cases, if the log compression amplifier were not present, the analog to digital converter (ADC) would saturate on many of the reflected waves. The log compression amplifier prevents this by amplifying the higher return signals less than the lower signals in such a manner as to prevent this saturation. The log compression amplifier thus precedes the ADC in the signal processing arrangement. FIG. 41 illustrates a circuit that performs a quasi-logarithmic compression amplification of the return signal.

The log compression amplifier receives the signals from the ultrasonic receivers and selectively amplifies them and directs the amplified signals to the ADC. The use of a log compression amplifier between ultrasonic receivers and ADCs in a vehicular occupant identification and position detecting system provides significant advantages over prior art occupant identification and position detecting systems.

The operation of the quasi-logarithmic compression amplifier circuit shown on FIG. 41 is as follows:

(1) The echo detected by the ultrasonic transducer is amplified by stage U1.

(2) The function of stage U2 is to vary the gain of the amplifier with time to compensate for the signal attenuation with distance (time) of the echo reflected from various surfaces.

(3) The actual compression circuit is accomplished by U4, capacitor C1 and inductor L1 with the associated resistor diode network consisting of diodes D1-D14 and resistors R1-R5.

(4) C1 and L1 are tuned to the operating frequency of the transducer, typically between 40 and 80 kHz.

(5) For small signals, the diodes do not conduct and therefore the gain is at the maximum since there is no loading of the tuned circuit. Thus, the amplification is high.

(6) When the signal is high enough for diodes D1, D3 and D2, D4 to conduct resistor R5 shunts the tuned circuit lowering the Q and reducing the gain. Q is a measure of resonance capability of a transducer whereby a low Q is indicative of a weak resonance and a high Q is indicative of high resonance. D1, D3 and D2, D4 are connected back to back so that the negative half cycle has the same gain as the positive half cycle.

(7) When the signal increases more, diode D5 and D6 will conduct, shunting the tuned circuit with R4 as well as R5, which further reduces the gain of the stage.

(8) When the signal increases more, diode D7 and D8 will conduct, shunting the tuned circuit with R3 as well as R4 and R5, which further reduces the gain of the stage.

(9) When the signal increases more, diode D11 and D12 will conduct, shunting the tuned circuit with R1 as well as R2, R3, R4 and R5 which further reduces the gain of the stage.

(10) When the signal increases more, all of the diodes will conduct and the resistance of the diodes will shunt the resistors lowering the gain.

(11) The diodes are connected back-to-back so that the positive and negative half cycles will be compressed equally.

(12) The circuit can be temperature stabilized by maintaining the diodes at a constant temperature using apparatus known to those skilled in the art.

(13) The amount of compression can be changed by changing resistor values.

(14) The range of the circuit may be changed by changing the number of diodes and resistors in the network.

(15) The output of the network is buffered by a high impedance circuit with a buffer stage U3.

(16) U3 may be made into a demodulator by adding a diode and a resistor in the buffer stage.

The component designated AD8031A in FIG. 41 is a wide bandwidth rail-to-rail in and out operational amplifier. This operational amplifier and data sheets therefor may be obtained from Analog Devices, Incorporated.

Other circuits and other mathematical functions can be used as long as they amplify the lower level signals more than the higher level signals. In particular, a similar effect can be achieved by clipping the higher level signals by eliminating all return signal amplitudes above a certain value. When ultrasonic sensors are used in a pure ranging mode while thermal instabilities are present, it has been found that the location of a reflected signal is substantially invariable, provided the object is not moving, whereas the magnitude of the reflection may vary by factors of 10 or 100. It may sometimes be difficult to distinguish an actual return from the desired object from noise. Such noise may also be invariant in that it may be the result of reflections off of surfaces that are at substantial angles off of the axis of the transducer. These reflections are normally ignored since they are generally small in comparison with the main reflection. When thermal instabilities are present, however, these reflections can become significant relative to the main reflected pulse. One method of compensating for this effect is to average the returned amplitudes over a number of cycles. During dynamic out of position cases, however, there is not sufficient time to perform this averaging and each cycle must be evaluated independently of the other cycles. Using the selective amplification techniques described above, the apparent variation in the signal is substantially reduced and therefore the effects of the thermal instabilities are substantially eliminated. Again, there are many methods of accomplishing the desired result as long as the magnitude of the large reflected signals and reduced relative to the small reflected signals.

In at least some of these embodiments of the invention, multiple wave-emitting transducers are provided and operate simultaneously to transmit waves so that return waves, modified by the object, can be used to identify the object interacting with the waves. The object is thus identified based on the waves received by a plurality of the transducers after being modified by the object, i.e., waves are transmitted by a plurality of transducers toward the object, are modified thereby and return to the transducer and these returned waves are used to identify the object. Multiple wave-emitting transducers can also provided and operate simultaneously to transmit waves so that return waves, modified by the object, can be used to determine the position of the object interacting with the waves. The position of the object is thus determined based on the waves received by a plurality of the transducers after being modified by the object, i.e., waves are transmitted by a plurality of transducers toward the object, are modified thereby and return to the transducer and these returned waves are used to determine the position of the object. In a similar manner, multiple wave-emitting transducers may be provided and operate simultaneously to transmit waves so that return waves, modified by the object, can be used to determine the type of the object interacting with the waves. The type of the object is thus determined based on the waves received by a plurality of the transducers after being modified by the object, i.e., waves are transmitted by a plurality of transducers toward the object, are modified thereby and returned to the transducer and these returned waves are used to determine the type of the object. The identity, position and/or type can thus be provided.

1.1.2.2. Training Method with Heat

Since neural networks are preferably used herein as a pattern recognition system to differentiate occupancy conditions within the vehicle, it is quite straightforward to take data with and without the long-term and short-term thermal effects discussed above. The fact that the neural network can find and use the information within the data is not obvious since, especially in the short-term case, the reflected signals from the vehicle interior can vary significantly with time. Nevertheless, the neural network has proven that sufficient information is generally present to make an identification decision. Although neural networks are the preferred method of solving this problem, it is possible to use other pattern recognition systems, such as the sensor fusion system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,482,314 to Corrado et al., using data taken with and without the thermal instabilities, resulting in a more accurate system than would be otherwise achievable.

A neural network for determining the position of an object in a vehicle can be generated in accordance with the invention by conducting a plurality of data generation steps, each data generating step comprising the steps of placing an object in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, irradiating at least a portion of the passenger compartment in which the object is situated (with ultrasonic waves from an ultrasonic transducer), receiving reflected radiation from the object at a receiver, and forming a data set of a signal representative of the reflected radiation from the object, the distance from the object to the receiver and the temperature of the passenger compartment between the object and the receiver. Then, the temperature of the air in the passenger compartment, or at least in the area between the object and the receiver, is changed, and the irradiation step, radiation receiving step and data set forming step are performed for the object at different temperatures between the object and the receiver. Thereafter, a pattern recognition algorithm, e.g., a neural network, is generated from the data sets such that upon operational input of a signal representative of reflected radiation from the object, the algorithm provides an approximation of the distance from the object to the receiver. By using a plurality of ultrasonic transducers, the contour or configuration of the object can be established thereby enabling the position of the object to be obtained.

In an enhanced embodiment, different objects are used to form the data and the identity of the object is included in the data set such that upon operational input of a signal representative of reflected radiation from the object, the algorithm provides an approximation of the identity of the object. Further, the objects can be placed in different positions in the passenger compartment so that both the identity and actual position of the object are included in the data set. As such, upon operational input of a signal representative of reflected radiation from the object, the algorithm provides an approximation of the identity and position of the object. In the alternative, a single object can be placed in different positions in the passenger compartment so that the actual position of the object is included in the data set. As such, upon operational input of a signal representative of reflected radiation from the object, the algorithm provides an approximation of the position of the object. The temperature of the air may be changed by dynamically changing the temperature of the air, e.g., by introducing a flow of blowing air at a different temperature than the ambient temperature of the passenger compartment. The blowing air flow may be created by operating a vehicle heater or air conditioner of the vehicle. The temperature of the air may also be changed by creating a temperature gradient between a top and a bottom of the passenger compartment.

The generation of a trained neural network in consideration of the temperature between the object and the ultrasonic receiver(s) can be used in conjunction with any of the other methods disclosed herein for improving the accuracy of the determination of the identity and position of an object. For example, the ultrasonic transducers can be arranged in a tubular mounting structure, the ringing of the transducers can be reduced or even completely suppressed and the transducer cone mechanically damped.

1.1.2.3. Single Transducer Send and Receive

When standard piezoelectric ceramic ultrasonic transducers, such as manufactured by MuRata, are used, and excited with a driving pulse of a few cycles, the transducer rings (continues to vibrate and emit ultrasound like a bell) for a considerable period after the driving pulse has stopped. In one common case, eight cycles were used to drive the transducer at 40 kHz and, even though the driving pulse was over at about 0.2 milliseconds, the transducer was still ringing at 1.3 milliseconds. Thus, if a single transducer is to be used for both sending and receiving the ultrasonic waves, it is unable to sense the reflected waves from a target that is closer than about eight to twelve inches. In many situations within the vehicle, important targets are closer than eight inches and thus transducers must be used in pairs, one for sending and the other for receiving. This is less of a problem when piezo-film or electrostatic transducers are used, but such transducers have other significant problems related to temperature sensitivity, the generated signal strength and physical size.

Another point worth noting is that when a piezo-ceramic transducer is used with a horn, as described elsewhere in this specification, the location of the transducer in the horn is critically important. As the transducer is moved further into and out of the base of the horn, the field pattern of ultrasonic radiation changes. At the proper location, the main pattern generally has the widest field angle and the radiation pattern is characterized by the absence of side lobes of ultrasonic radiation. That is, all of the energy is confined to the main field. Side lobes can cause several undesirable effects. In particular, when the transducers are used in pairs, one for sending and the other for receiving, the lobes contribute to cross-talk between the two transducers reducing the ability to measure objects close to the transducer. Also, side lobes frequently send ultrasonic energy into places in the passenger compartment where undesirable reflections result. In one case, for example, reflections from the driver were recorded. In another case reflections from adjacent fixed surfaces such, as the instrument panel (IP) or headliner surface, were received with the effect that when new IP and headliner parts were used, the reflection patterns changed and the system accuracy was significantly degraded. When reflections, either directly or indirectly, occur from such surfaces, the ability to transfer the system from one vehicle to another identical vehicle is compromised.

A. Damped Transducer

The ringing problem described above is related to the Q (a measure of the resonance capability of the transducer) of the device, which is typically in the range of about 10 to 20 for piezo-ceramic transducers. Attempts to add damping to the transducer have proven to be difficult to manufacture. A primary transducer supplier, for example, declines to supply transducers with greater damping or lower Q. In addition, many attempts to add damping have been reported in the patent literature with limited success. Experiments have determined, however, that if the damping material is placed in the transducer cone as shown in FIG. 42, in a manner as described herein, the damping can be accurately controlled. The greater the amount of the damping material, which is typically a silicone rubber compound, the greater the damping, with the hardness or durometer of the rubber playing a lesser but significant role.

If the cone is entirely filled with a preferred compound, too much damping may result for some applications depending on the material. However, if the rubber is diluted with a solvent in the proper proportions, the cone can be filled with the diluted mixture and the proper residue will result after the solvent evaporates. In this manner, not only can the proper amount of damping material be administered, but also the resulting uniform coating is desirable. One preferred compound is silicone RTV diluted with Xylene. By this method, a surprisingly consistently damped transducer is achieved. Other damping compounds can be used and different methods of achieving an accurate amount of damping material within the cone can be developed. Additionally, damping material can be placed on other parts of the transducer to achieve similar results. Another approach is to incorporate another plate parallel to, but on the opposite side of, the piezoelectric material from the resonating disk in the transducer assembly, such as one made from tungsten, which serves to reduce the transducer Q. However, the placement within the cone has had the best results and therefore is preferred.

FIG. 43 illustrates the superimposed reflections from a target placed at three distances from the transducer, 9 cm, 50 cm and 1 meter respectively for a single send and receive transducer with a damped cone as described above. FIG. 44 illustrates the superimposed reflections from a target placed at 16.4 cm, 50 cm and 1 meter respectively for a transducer without a damped cone. The upper curves represent the envelopes of the returned signals. In each case the returned signals from the closest target are shown in the lower curves.

Several distinct differences are evident. The closest that could be achieved without the ringing pulse overwhelming the reflected target pulse was 9 cm for the damped case and 16.4 cm for the undamped case. The undamped case also exhibited several unwanted signals that do not represent reflections from the target and could confuse the neural network. No such unwanted reflections were evident in the damped case. The 9 cm target reflection is clearly evident in the damped case while the 16.4 reflection interfered with the ringing signal in the undamped case. In both cases, the logarithmic amplifier was turned on after 600 microseconds as described below

B. Transducer in a Tube

Another method of achieving a single transducer send and receive assembly is to place the transducer into a tube with the length of the tube determined by the distance required for the ringing to subside and the closest required sensing distance. That is, the length of tube is equal to the distance required for the ringing to subside less the closest required sensing distance. In this situation, since the combined length of the tube and closest required sensing distance is equal to the distance required for the ringing to subside, the ringing will subside at the start of the operative sensing distance. For example, if the minimum target sensing distance is 4 inches and 8 inches is required for the ringing to subside, then the tube can be made 4 inches long. The use of a tube as a conduit for ultrasound is disclosed in DuVall et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,629,681 entitled “Tubular Ultrasonic Displacement Sensor”.

DuVall et al. shows a displacement sensor and switch including a tube which function based on the detection of a constriction in the tube caused by an external object. The sensor or switch is placed, e.g., across a road to count vehicles, along a vehicular window, door, sunroof and trunk to detect an obstruction in the closing of the same, and in a vehicle door for use as a crash sensor. In all of these situations, the tube must be placed in a position in which it will be compressed or constricted by the external object since such compression or constriction is essentially to the operation of the sensor or switch. The tube is used as a conduit for transmitting sonic waves. A sonic transducer is arranged at both ends of the tube or at only one end of the tube. Sonic energy is directed from a transmitting transducer into the tube and received by a receiving transducer. If the tube is compressed (deflected) or obstructed, a change in the received sonic energy is detected and the location of the compression or obstruction can be determined therefrom.

A variety of examples of a transducer in a tube design are illustrated in FIGS. 45A-45F. A straight tube 820 with an exponential horn 820A is illustrated in FIG. 45A. FIGS. 45B and 45C illustrate the bending of the tube 820 through 40 degrees and 90 degrees, respectively. FIG. 45D illustrates the incorporation of a single loop 820B and FIG. 45E of multiple loops 820C, which can be used to achieve a significant tube length in a confined space. It has been found that there is about a 3-dB drop in signal intensity that occurs when transmitting through an 8-inch tube having the same diameter as the transducer and no significant effect has been observed from coiling the tube. A surprising result, however, is that very little additional attenuation occurs even if the tube diameter is substantially decreased providing care is taken in the lead in of the ultrasound into the tube. Thus, it is possible to use a tube which has perhaps a diameter of half that of the transducer will little additional signal loss. This fact substantially facilitates the implementation of this concept since space in the A and B pillars and the headliner is limited.

A smaller tube 820D is illustrated in FIG. 45F where the tube is now shown to have a straight shape; however, it can be easily bent to adjust to the space available. FIG. 45D and FIG. 45E illustrate a transducer assembly similar to FIG. 45A but wherein the tube is now coiled and can be molded as two parts and later joined together permitting the assembly to occupy a small space. Thus, now the single transducer send and receive assembly not only permits measurements of objects very close to the mounting surface, the headliner for example, but the assembly need not occupy significantly more space than the original two transducer design. There is a substantial cost saving since only a single transducer is required and only a single pair of wires also is needed. A mounting device is required in any case and the design of FIG. 45E is no more expensive that the earlier mounting hardware design which needed to accommodate two transducers. Thus, a substantial improvement in performance has been achieved with the additional benefit of a substantial reduction in cost.

Care must be taken in the design of the tube assembly since the reflections of the waves back into the tube at the end of the tube depend on the ratio of the tube diameter to the wavelength. The smaller the tube, the greater the reflection. If the tube diameter is greater than one wavelength, less than one percent of the energy will be reflected but this still may be large compared with the reflection off of a distant target. One method of partially solving this problem is through the use of a wave pattern shaping horn as disclosed below and illustrated in FIGS. 45A-45F.

1.1.2.4. Delay in Turning on the Logarithmic Compression Amplifier

If the return signal logarithmic compression amplifier is turned on at the time that the transducer is being driven, in some designs, the combination of the very strong driving pulse and the signal smoothing effect of the amplifier can cause a feed forward effect. This creates an interference with the signal being received making it more difficult to measure reflections from objects close to the transducer. It has been found that if the start of the amplifier is delayed for a fraction of a millisecond the ability to measure close objects is improved. This is illustrated in FIG. 46 where the effects of three different cases is shown for the standard 40 kHz undamped ultrasonic transducer.

1.1.2.5. Electronic Damping

Although the use of a Colpits oscillator is well known in the art of buzzers, such as used in alarms on watches where energy considerations require that the buzzer be driven at its natural frequency, such oscillators have heretofore not been applied to ultrasonic transducers. Particularly, the Colpits oscillator has not been used in a circuit for electronically reducing and preferably suppressing the motion of the transducer cone 822 and thereby eliminating the ringing. The principle, as illustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B, is to use a separate small, auxiliary transducer 821, which could be formed as part of the main transducer 825, for the purpose of measuring the motion of the main transducer 825. This auxiliary transducer 821 monitors the motion of the resonator 824 and provides the information to feedback to appropriate electronic circuitry. Transducer 821 may be donut-shaped or bar-shaped or an isolated section of the ceramic of the main transducer 825. This feedback is used during the driving phase to ascertain that the transducer is being driven at its natural frequency. The separate transducer also permits exact monitoring of the transducer motion after the driving phase, permitting an inverted signal to be used to reverse drive the transducer, i.e., mechanically dampen the resonator 824, thereby stopping its motion. This design requires some added complication to the transducer and circuitry but provides the optimum reduction or suppression and thus the closest approach to the transducer by a target.

In addition to the Colpits oscillator, another design that may also have application to solving this problem and is known in the art is the Hartley oscillator.

By reducing or eliminating the ringing, all of these damping methods provide better control over the total number of pulses that are sent to the passenger compartment. This results in a sharper image of the contents of the passenger compartment and thus more accurate information.

An alternate method of eliminating the ringing is illustrated in FIG. 48. In this case, the natural frequency of each transducer is sensed and the drive circuitry is tuned to drive the transducer exactly at its natural frequency. Once the natural frequency is known, however, then, based on some trial and error development, a sequence of pulses is derived which is fed into the transducer drive circuit with reversed polarity to counteract the motion of the transducer and quickly reduce or suppress its oscillations. Thus, by this method the same results as are achieved from the Colpits design with a much simpler implementation that does not require an additional sensing element to be designed into the transducer or the additional wires to the transducer that are needed in the Colpits design. Note that the waveforms in FIG. 48 are shown as square waves whereas they are in fact sine waves. Also note that the ringing has been shown as shorter than the drive pulse whereas in fact, it can last four to five times longer depending on the transducer design. With the implementation of the technique disclosed here, the period of the ringing is reduced to about 10% of what is typically present in the standard transducer.

1.1.2.6. Field Shaping

The purpose of an ultrasonic occupant sensing system is to transmit ultrasonic waves into the passenger compartment and from the received reflected waves determine the occupancy state of the vehicle. Thus, waves that do not reflect off of surfaces of interest, such as the driver (when the passenger side is being monitored) and the instrument panel (IP) and headliner as discussed above, add noise to the system. In the worst case, they can interfere with or mask other important reflected signals. For this reason, significant improvements to the occupant sensing system can be achieved by carefully controlling the shape of the ultrasonic fields emitted by each of the transducers.

A. Horns

A horn is generally required especially when transferring the ultrasound waves from the tube to the passenger compartment. The angle of radiation from the tube without the horn would be quite large sending radiation into areas where no desired object would be situated. Since the horn can now be arbitrarily shaped, the radiation angle can not only be made narrower but can be arbitrarily elliptically shaped so as to cover the desired volume in the most efficient manner. An example of a horn 826 shaped to create an elliptical pattern is illustrated in FIG. 49A (the opening at the end of the tube being elliptical) whereas the elliptical pattern 826A created by the horn 826 is shown in FIG. 49B. Previously, the output from the transducer had to be baffled or blocked so that it did not receive reflections from the rear seat or the driver, for example. This wasted energy and required additional hardware and thus increased the cost of the installation.

The horn may be a part of the tube, i.e., formed as a unitary structure, or formed as a separate unit and then attached to the tube. Generally, the transducer would be mounted in a cylindrical tube and the horn would begin right at the end of the cylindrical tube. As such, the horn starts out as being cylindrical in the vicinity of the transducer and then expands into the horn. The tube does not have to be cylindrical but may have other forms.

B. Reflective Mode

An alternate method of achieving the desired field shape is to use a reflector. This has the advantage that more control of the sound waves can be achieved through the careful shaping of the reflector surface as illustrated in FIGS. 50, 51 and 52. FIG. 50 illustrates the reflection off of a flat plane 827A, FIG. 51 illustrates the reflection off of a concave surface 827B and FIG. 52 illustrates the reflection off of a convex surface 827C, respectively. The figures illustrate the extremes of reflections that can be achieved and permit a great deal of freedom in the design of the resulting field patterns. The design problem is significantly more complicated than appears from the figures, however. Since the dimensions of the reflectors are of the same order of magnitude as the wave length of the ultrasound, simple ray tracing, as shown in the figures, will not produce accurate results and an accurate computer model, or extensive trial and error testing, is required.

1.1.2.7. Neural Network Improvements/Dual Level ANN

A dual level neural network architecture has proven advantageous in improving categorization accuracy and to prepare for the next level occupant sensing system that includes Dynamic Out-of-Position measurements (DOOP). This will be discussed in section 11.1 below.

1.1.2.8. Dynamic Out-of-Position (DOOP)

Although it has been proven that crash sensors mounted in the crush zone are better and faster at discriminating airbag required crashes from those where an airbag deployment is not desired, the automobile manufacturers have preferred to use electronic sensors mounted in the passenger compartment, so called single point sensors. Since there is no acceptable theory that guides a sensor designer in determining the proper algorithm for use with single point sensors (see for Breed, D. S., Sanders, W. T. and Castelli, V. “A Critique of Single Point Crash Sensing”, Society of Automotive Engineers Paper SAE 920124, 1992), there are many such algorithms in existence with varying characteristics. Some perform better than others. There is a concern among the automobile manufacturers that such sensors might trigger late in some real world crashes for which they have not been tested. In such cases, the automobile manufacturers do not want the airbag to deploy.

If the occupant position sensor designer could rely on the single point sensor doing a reasonable job in triggering on time, or at least as good a job as the electromechanical crush zone mounted sensors, then cases such as high speed barrier crashes need not be considered. Since the characteristics of the electromechanical sensors are well known and can be easily modeled, the occupant position sensor designer can determine when this kind of sensor would trigger in all crashes and as a result high speed barrier crashes, for example, need not be considered. Single point sensor algorithms, on the other hand, are generally proprietary to the supplier. Therefore no assumptions can be made about their ability to respond in time to various crashes. Consequently, the occupant sensor designer must assume the worst case in that the sensor will trigger at the worst possible time in all crashes. It has been shown that if the sensor responds nearly as well as the electromechanical crush zone mounted sensor, that determining the position of the occupant every 50 milliseconds is adequate (see for example Society of Automotive Engineers paper 940527, “Vehicle Occupant Position Sensing” by Breed et al, which is included herein by reference). With the requirement that all worst cases be considered, the time required for measuring the position of an occupant who is not wearing a seatbelt in a high speed short duration crash is closer to 10-20 milliseconds.

Sound travels in air at about 331 meters/second (˜1086 feet/second). If an object is as much as three feet from the transducer, the ultrasound will require about 6 milliseconds to travel to the object and back. If the processor requires an additional three milliseconds to process the data (assuming that the neural network is solved each time new data from any transducer is available), it requires a total of about 10 milliseconds for a single transducer to interrogate the desired volume. If four transducers are used, as in the present design, at least 40 milliseconds are therefore required. As discussed above, this is too long and thus an alternative arrangement is required when ultrasound is used for DOOP. One solution is to operate the system in two modes. Mode one would use four transducers to identify what is in the subject volume and where it is, relative to the airbag, before the crash begins and mode two would use only one, or at most two, transducers to monitor the motion of the object during the crash. The problem with this solution is that occasionally the selected transducer for mode two could be blocked by a newspaper, for example, or a hat. If two transducers were used this problem would theoretically be solved but there is a problem as to which transducer should be believed if they are providing different answers. This latter problem is sufficiently complicated as to require a neural network type solution. In this case however, the neural network really needs the output from all four of the transducers to make an accurate decision due to the vast number of different configurations that can occur in the passenger compartment. To make a highly reliable decision, therefore, all of the transducers need to be used which means that they all have to work at the same time. This can be accomplished if each one uses a different frequency. One could operate at 45 kHz, a second at 55 kHz, the third at 65 kHz and the forth at 75 kHz, for example. The 10 kHz (or even 5 kHz) spacing is sufficient to permit each one to transmit and receive without hearing the transmissions from any other transducer. Thus, the apparatus used in the instant invention contemplates, for most applications, the use of multiple frequencies in contrast to all other systems which have thus far been disclosed.

For the majority of the cases, the position of the occupant at the start of a crash is all that is necessary to determine if he or she is out of position for airbag deployment determination. This is because the motion of the occupant is usually very small during the time that the crash sensors determine that the airbag should be deployed. Below is a mathematical analysis demonstrating this conclusion. There are some rare cases, however, where it would be desirable to track the occupant in as close to real time as possible. Such cases include: (1) panic braking where the occupant begins at a significant distance from the danger zone; (2) a multiple accident scenario where the first accident is not sufficient to deploy the airbag but does impart a significant relative velocity to the occupant; and (3) an unusually high deceleration prior to a crash such as might occur due to sliding along a guard rail or going through mud or water. Some automobile manufacturers add a fourth category, which is the case of a mal-functioning or poorly functioning crash sensor where the motion of the occupant even in a barrier crash can be significant. For these cases, dynamic out of position (DOOP) needs to be considered and careful attention paid to the development of the post processor algorithms.

Dynamic Out-of-Position Analysis

Concern has been expressed as to whether the Ultrasonic Automatic Occupant Sensor (UAOS) is sufficiently fast to detect Dynamic Out-of-Position (DOOP). This is based on the belief that the UAOS updates only every 100 milliseconds and that to measure DOOP an update every 10 milliseconds is required. This study therefore will demonstrate two points:

The UAOS can achieve an update rate of once every 10 milliseconds.

A slower update rate of 50 milliseconds or 20 milliseconds is in fact sufficient.

One critical point is that the UAOS system, because of the use of pattern recognition, knows the location of the important parts of the occupant and therefore will probably not be fooled by motions of the extremities. Simpler systems could misinterpret the motion of the arms of the belted occupant for the occupant's chest.

The first issue is to determine what update timing is required for DOOP and when. If the occupant is initially positioned far back from the airbag, for example, there is little doubt that even a 50 millisecond update time is sufficient.

In order to get a preliminary understanding of the problem, consider the simple case to a constant deceleration pulse varying from 1 to 16 G's for a period of 0.1 seconds. 1 G represents something greater than what occurs in braking and 16 G's represents an approximation to a 35 MPH barrier crash. The argument is made that a square wave approximates braking pulses and that vehicles are designed to attempt to achieve a square wave barrier crash pulse. It is also believed that the square wave approximation to a crash pulse is more severe for the purposes here than some other shape. Later in this preliminary report, a Haversine crash pulse will be considered. A Haversine crash pulse is a sine wave upwardly displaced so that the lowest point is on the x-axis.

The problem then can be stated that: given that there is some clearance from the airbag at the time that an airbag inflation is initiated such that if an occupant is closer than that clearance the airbag should not be deployed (the restricted zone), how much additional clearance must be provided to allow a prediction to be made that the occupant will move to within the restricted zone before the sensor triggers. This additional clearance, called the sensing clearance, will of course depend on the sensing time which we will assume here will vary from 10 to 100 milliseconds. The worst case is where the occupant is at rest and then begins moving just after his promotion has been measured. Since it is assumed that a measurement has been made before occupant motion begins, the calculation of the sensing clearance amounts to determining the motion of the occupant, represented here as an unrestrained mass, that can take place during the sensing period. The worst case initial position of the occupant is where the occupant is initially very close to the restricted zone since if he or she starts out at a greater distance there is more time to take position measurements and then project the position of the occupant at a later time.

For the assumptions above, which are believed to be worst case, the sensing clearance can be calculated as shown in the table:

“na” in the crash sensor would have triggered before a second measurement reading can be ACCELERATION SENSING TIME G's 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.1 SENSING CLEARANCE (inches) 1 0.02 0.08 0.17 0.48 1.93 2 0.04 0.15 0.35 0.97 3.86 4 0.08 0.31 0.70 1.93 7.73 8 0.15 0.62 1.39 na na 16 0.31 1.24 na na na VELOCITY (mph) 1 0.22 0.44 0.66 1.10 2.20 2 0.44 0.88 1.32 2.20 4.39 4 0.88 1.76 2.63 4.39 8.78 8 1.76 3.51 5.27 8.78 17.56 16 3.51 7.03 10.54 17.56 35.13 taken. For the 16 G 0.03 second case, for example, the sensor would have triggered before 0.02 seconds. From the table, it can be seen that for this worst case scenario for 20 millisecond sampling the sensing clearance is about 1 inch, for 30 milliseconds it is about 1.5 inches and even for 50 milliseconds it is less than 2 inches.

In the table below, 0.7 G braking was assumed followed by a Haversine shaped crash pulse. The program was run for a variety of crash impact speeds, braking durations and initial occupant positions. Out of many thousands of cases which were run, only those cases are shown where the computer predicted that the occupant was further than 8 inches, the restricted clearance, and where the actual position at sensor triggering was within the restricted clearance, that is less than 8 inches. The sensor triggering time was based on the 5 inch less 30 millisecond criteria. It is noteworthy that only a simple linear extrapolation of the last two measurements was used to predict the occupant position. A more realistic extrapolation formula would of course give better results.

Crash impact speeds were varied from 8 to 34 mph with 2 mph steps. For each impact speed, crash duration was varied from 30 ms to 180 ms with 30 ms steps and for each crash duration, pre-crash braking times varied from 100 to 2200 ms with 300 ms steps. Finally, for each pre-crash braking time initial occupant clearance varied from 30 inches to 4 inches by 4 inches steps. From that full set, these are the cases where the occupant clearance at sensor fire was less than or equal to 8 inches and the predicted clearance was over 8 inches. Driver motion when airbag opened, inches 5.0000 Airbag deployment time, ms 30.0000 Time between position and velocity measurements, ms 20.0000 Pre-crash braking deceleration, g 0.7000 Minimum occupant clearance at sensor fire, inches 8.0000

Vcr is the crash impact speed, mph

T is the crash duration, ms

tb is the pre-crash braking time, ms

Dpab0 is the initial occupant clearance, inches

Vc0 is the vehicle pre-braking speed, mph

ts is the required sensor fire time, ms

Dpaba is the actual occupant clearance at ts

Dbarpabts is the predicted occupant clearance at ts

Dpabm is the last measured occupant clearance, inches

Dpabm2 is the previous measured occupant clearance, inches Vcr T tb Dpab0 Vc0 ts Dpaba Dbarpabts Dpabm Dpabm2 8.0 90.0 100.0 12.0 9.54 150.49 7.9 8.82 9.59 10.36 8.0 120.0 100.0 12.0 9.54 165.17 7.2 8.01 8.96 9.92 10.0 120.0 100.0 12.0 11.54 157.44 7.7 8.53 9.35 10.16 12.0 150.0 100.0 12.0 13.54 164.91 7.5 8.19 9.06 9.94 14.0 150.0 100.0 12.0 15.54 160.24 7.7 8.47 9.27 10.08 16.0 150.0 100.0 12.0 17.54 156.47 8.0 8.68 9.44 10.19 16.0 180.0 100.0 12.0 17.54 168.03 7.4 8.09 8.97 9.84 18.0 180.0 100.0 12.0 19.54 164.57 7.6 8.28 9.12 9.95 20.0 180.0 100.0 12.0 21.54 161.62 7.8 8.45 9.25 10.04 22.0 180.0 100.0 12.0 23.54 159.05 7.9 8.59 9.35 10.12

From these results, a sensing clearance of less than 1 inch appears to be adequate.

To further validate the conclusions here, a study should be done using real crash pulses and realistic braking decelerations. From the above analysis, it is unlikely that sensing times faster than 20 milliseconds are required and 50 milliseconds is probably adequate.

In specifying the 8 inch restricted zone, the automobile manufacturers have obviously not taken into account the velocity of the occupant as he or she enters that zone since the amount of displacement into the restricted zone while the airbag is deploying will obviously vary with occupant velocity. A full MADYMO simulation validated by crash and sled tests, of course, will ultimately settle this issue. MADYMO is a computer program which is available from TNO Road Vehicles Research Institute, Schoemakerstraat 97, Delft, The Netherlands. It is often used to simulate crash tests (as described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,695,242).

A. DOOP—Multiple Frequencies

In a standard ultrasonic system as described above, typically four transducers interrogate the occupant, one after the other. The first transducer transmits a few cycles of typically 40 kHz ultrasound and waits for all of the echoes to return and then the second transducer transmits, etc. Since it takes as much as 7 to 10 milliseconds for the waves to be transmitted, received and for the reverberations to subside, it takes approximately 40 milliseconds for four to do so. If four different frequencies are used, on the other hand, all four transmitters can transmit and receive simultaneously reducing the total time to 10 milliseconds. The time required to calculate the neural network is small compared with 10 milliseconds and can take place while the transducers are transmitting. If the driver is also included, as many as eight frequencies would be used.

In particular, in one method for identifying an object in a passenger compartment of a vehicle, a plurality of ultrasonic wave-emitting and receiving transducers are mounted on the vehicle, each arranged to transmit and receive waves at a different frequency, the transducers are controlled, e.g., by a central processor, to simultaneously transmit waves at the different frequencies into the passenger compartment, and the object is identified based on the waves received by at least some of the transducers after being modified by passing through the passenger compartment, i.e., reflected by the object. Since different objects will most likely cause different reflections to the ultrasonic receivers, the object can be identified with reasonable precision based on the returned waves. By appropriately determining the spacing between the frequencies of the waves transmitted and received by the transducers, the possibility of each transducer receiving waves transmitted by another transducer is reduced and the accuracy of the system is improved. The position of the object can also be determined, in addition to or instead of the determination of the identity of the object, based on the waves received by at least some of the transducers after being modified by passing through the passenger compartment.

The improvements relating to the use of ultrasonic transducers described herein may be used in conjunction with this embodiment. For example, motion of a respective vibrating element or cone of one or more of the transducers can be electronically diminished or suppressed to reduce ringing of the transducer and one or more of the transducers may be arranged in a respective tube having an opening through which the waves are transmitted and received. Neural networks may be used and reside in the central processor, and which are possibly trained using heat as discussed above.

A similar arrangement for identifying an object in a passenger compartment of the vehicle includes a plurality of wave-emitting and receiving transducers mounted on the vehicle, each transducer being arranged to transmit and receive waves at a different frequency, and a processor coupled to the transducers for controlling the transducers to simultaneously transmit waves at the different frequencies into the passenger compartment. The processor or processor means receive signals representative of the waves received by the transducers after being modified by passing through the passenger compartment and identifies the object based on the signals representative of the waves received by the transducers. Depending on its design and programming, the processor can also determine the position of the object based on the signals representative of the waves received by the transducers, either in addition to or instead of the determination of the identity of the object.

The improvements relating to the use of ultrasonic transducers described herein may be used in conjunction with this embodiment. For example, the signals from the receivers may be operated upon by a compression amplifier such as those described above and one or more of the transducers may be arranged in a respective tube having an opening through which the waves are transmitted and received.

Although this system is described with particular advantageous use for ultrasonic transducers, it is conceivable that other transducers which transmit in ranges other than the ultrasonic range can also be used in accordance with the invention.

B. Differential Mode—Velocity

In addition to the inputs from the transducers, it has been found that the difference between the current vector and the previous vector also contains valuable information as to the motion of the occupant. It represents a kind of velocity vector and is useful in predicting where the occupant will be in the next time period. In addition to a vector representing the latest difference, a series of such difference or velocity vectors has also proven useful for the dynamic out-of-position calculation. Additionally, the difference vector provides a check on the accuracy of the vector since the motion of an occupant must be within a certain narrow band within a 10-millisecond period. This fact can be used to correct errors within a vector.

1.1.2.9 Frequency Adjustment

For optimum horn performance, i.e., maximum gain and minimum side lobes and a fixed beam angle, the transducer is mounted so that the cone is a distance d from the start of horn expansion. This is typically ¼ Lambda. Since Lambda is related to the speed of sound which changes with temperature, Lambda changes with temperature. If this is not corrected for, the horn will be optimum at only one frequency. Without correction, beam angle and side lobes will occur with temperature change.

In one embodiment, it is desired to maintain a constant Lambda with temperature and therefore, the frequency must be changed with temperature. Calculations to obtain the desired frequency as a function of the temperature in which the ultrasonic waves will be propagated are as follows:

c:=−40 . . . 80 Temperature range 40 KHz a 20 deg C.

v(c):=331.5+0.607−c Speed of sound meters/second $\begin{matrix} {\lambda = \frac{v(20)}{40}} & {\lambda = 8.591} & {Millimeters} \\ {{F(c)} = \frac{v(c)}{\lambda}} & \quad & {KHz} \end{matrix}$

A graph of temperature vs. frequency is shown in FIG. 54 and a chart over a selected range is shown in FIG. 55. In order to provide for all of the frequencies in the range, the bandwidth of the transducer and the system must cover the frequency range.

To implement this compensation, a temperature sensor would be provided to measure or otherwise determine the temperature of the air in the space into which ultrasonic waves are to be propagated. The temperature sensor would be coupled to the transmission control unit for the transducer which would determine the optimum frequency for wave transmission into the space. The transmission control unit would then adjust the bandwidth of the transducer (in a manner known to those skilled in the art) to cause the transducer to generate waves having the optimum frequency. As the temperature in the space changes, the transmission control unit would vary the transmission frequency as a function thereof. In this manner, Lambda would remain substantially constant.

This temperature compensation can be applied in combination with the other temperature gradient compensation techniques described above, to the extent possible.

1.1.2.10 Humidity Adjustment

Humidity affects the propagation of ultrasonic waves, especially in an enclosed environment such as a passenger compartment of a vehicle or the interior of a cargo trailer. Therefore, another technique which can be applied in the invention when transmitting ultrasonic waves and receiving and processing ultrasonic waves, e.g., to determine the presence or absence of objects in the interior spaces or information about objects in the interior spaces, is to measure or otherwise determine the humidity in the interior space into which the waves are to be transmitted and adjust the transmission parameters, e.g., the frequency, gain, etc., and/or the reception parameters, e.g., the portion of the signal which is processed. One particular combination which affects ultrasonic wave propagation is the combination of low humidity and high temperature.

To implement this compensation, a humidity sensor would be provided to measure or otherwise determine the temperature of the air in the interior space into which ultrasonic waves are to be propagated. The humidity sensor would be coupled to the transmission control unit for the transducer which would determine the optimum parameters for wave transmission into the space based at least in part on the measured humidity, and/or the reception and processing control unit would which determine the optimum parameters for wave reception. The transmission control unit would then adjust the transducer (in any manner known to those skilled in the art) to cause the transducer to generate waves having suitable parameters for air at the measured humidity.

This humidity correction can be applied in combination with the other temperature gradient compensation techniques described above, to the extent possible. Thus, it is conceivable to measure both temperature and humidity and adjust the wave transmission and reception based thereon.

Although humidity compensation in the context of an ultrasonic motion detector, i.e., only ultrasonic wave reception, is known from U.S. Pat. No. 4,608,674, such a motion detector sends out a signal and uses the doppler shift of the reflected signal to determine if there is motion in a region of interest. Humidity compensation serves to generate a range compensation signal to ensure that only motion of objects in the desired range is provided. Such humidity compensation for motion detection is inapplicable to the instant situation where the wave-receiving sensors, i.e., volume sensors, are not interested in motion of objects but rather are interested in obtaining information based on reflections of any objects in the region of interest.

Thus, in accordance with the invention, the transmission control unit would receive a determination or measurement of the humidity in the space into which waves are to be transmitted and adjust the wave transmission to ensure that reflections of any objects in the range are obtained, and possibly reflections from only objects in the range. Similarly, a reception control unit would receive a determination or measurement of the humidity in the space from which waves are being received and would adjust the wave reception and/or processing to ensure that reflections of any objects in the range are obtained, and possibly reflections from only objects in the range.

1.1.2.11. Other Applications—Miscellaneous

A. Location of the Seatback and Seat

The positions of the seatback and the seat are valuable information in determining the location of the occupant for seats without position sensors. One cost-effective method of obtaining this information is to use one or more ultrasonic transducers to locate the seat or seatback relative to a particular point in the vehicle. In many cases, only the seatback location is required as it gives an indication of the location of the occupant's chest for various combinations of seat and seatback position. This measure is particularly useful in helping to differentiate a forward facing human from an empty seat.

B. Ultrasonic Weight Sensor

An ultrasonic transducer also can be used as a pressure or weight sensor by measuring the deflection of the seat bottom relative to some seat supporting structure.

C. Thermometer Temperature Compensation

In previous applications, the speed of sound has been determined by measuring the time it takes the sound to travel from one transducer to another. This is successful only if the second transducer can hear the particular frequency being sent by the first transducer. It can be fooled if an object partially obstructs the path from the one transducer to the other creating a second path for the sound to travel. The speed of sound is primarily a function of the temperature of the air. From about −40° C. to 85° C., the speed of sound changes by about 24%. The speed of sound is also affected by humidity, however, this effect is considerably smaller. It is not affected by barometric pressure except to the extent that the temperature is affected. In going from 0% to 100% relative humidity at about 40° C., the speed of sound changes by less than about 1.5%. Thus, it is clear that the temperature is the dominant consideration in this system. The percentage 1.5% represents about 3 centimeters for a target at about 1 meter which is below the accuracy of the ultrasonic system. For these reasons, temperature compensation is all that is required and that can be handled in some cases by placing a temperature sensor on the electronic circuit board and measuring the temperature directly, thereby avoiding the multipath effect.

One problem with measuring the temperature on the printed circuit board, however, is that that temperature may not be representative of the air temperature within the vehicle passenger compartment. An alternate and preferred method is to use a characteristic of each of the transducers which changes with temperature as a measurement of the temperature at the transducer. Since the transducers are generally not in a box with other electronic circuitry, they should have a temperature which is an approximation of the surrounding air temperature. Of the three properties which have been identified as varying with temperature and which are easily measured, capacitance, inductance and resonant frequency, the resonant frequency is the easiest to determine and is thus the preferred method as described above although the measure of the capacitance is also practical.

D. Electromagnetic Thermal Compensation

Generally, the examples provided above have focused on compensating for thermal gradients which affect ultrasonic waves. It is to be understood however that the same techniques can be used to compensate for thermal gradients which affect other types of waves such as electromagnetic waves (optics). Thermal gradients adversely affect optics (e.g., create mirages) but typically do so to a lesser extent than they affect ultrasonic waves.

For example, an optical system used in a vehicle, in the same manner as an ultrasonic system is used as discussed in detail above, may include a high dynamic range camera (HDRC). HDRC's are known devices to those skilled in the art. In accordance with the invention, the HDRC can be coupled to a log compression amplifier so that the log compression amplifier amplifies some electromagnetic waves received by the HDRC relative to others. Thus, in this embodiment, the log compression amplifier would compensate for thermal instability affecting the propagation of electromagnetic waves within the vehicle interior. Some HDRC cameras are already designed to have this log compression built in such as one developed by Fraunhofer-Inst. of Microelectron. Circuits & Systems in Duisburg, Germany. An alternate approach using a combination of spatially varying images is described in International Application No. WO 00/79784 assigned to Columbia University.

Although the above discussion has centered on the front passenger seat, it is obvious that the same or similar apparatus can be used for the driver seat as well as the rear seats. Although attention has been focused of frontal protection airbags, again the apparatus can be applied to solving similar problems in side and rear impacts and to control the deployment of other occupant restraints in addition to airbags. Thus, to reiterate some of the more novel features of the invention, this application discloses: (1) the use of a tubular mounting structure for the transducers; (2) the use of electronic reduction or suppression of transducer ringing; (3) the use of mechanical damping of the transducer cone, all three of which permits the use of a single transducer for both sending and receiving; (4) the use of a shaped horn to control the pattern of ultrasound; (5) the use of the resonant frequency monitoring principle to permit speed of sound compensation; (6) the use of multiple frequencies with sufficient spacing to isolate the signals from each other; (7) the ability to achieve a complete neural network update using four transducers every 10 to 20 milliseconds; (8) the ability to package the transducer and tube into a small package due to the ability to use a small diameter tube for transmission with minimal signal loss; (9) the use of a logarithmic compression amplifier to minimize the effects of thermal gradients in the vehicle; and (10) the significant cost reduction and performance improvement which results from the applications of the above principles. To the extent possible, the foregoing features can be used in combination with one another.

Thus, disclosed above is a method and apparatus for use in a system to identify, locate and/or monitor occupants, including their parts, and other objects in the passenger compartment and in particular a child seat in the rear facing position or an out-of-position occupant in which the contents of the vehicle are irradiated with ultrasonic radiation, e.g., by transmitting ultrasonic radiation waves from an ultrasonic wave generating apparatus, and ultrasonic radiation is received using at least one ultrasonic transducer properly located in the vehicle passenger compartment, and in specific predetermined optimum locations. The ultrasonic radiation is reflected from any objects in the passenger compartment. More particularly, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein relates to methods and apparatus for enabling a single ultrasonic transducer to be used for both sending and receiving ultrasonic waves, to provide temperature compensation for a system using an ultrasonic transducer, to reduce the effects of thermal gradients on the accuracy of a system using an ultrasonic transducer, for enabling all of a plurality of ultrasonic transducers to send and receive data (waves) simultaneously, for enabling precise control of the radiated pattern of ultrasound waves, in order to achieve a speed, cost and accuracy of recognition heretofore not possible. Outputs from the ultrasonic receivers, are analyzed by appropriate computational means employing trained pattern recognition technologies, to classify, identify and/or locate the contents, and/or determine the orientation of a rear facing child seat, for example. In general, the information obtained by the identification and monitoring system is used to affect the operation of some other system in the vehicle and particularly the passenger and/or driver airbag systems, which may include a front airbag, a side airbag, a knee bolster, or combinations of the same. However, the information obtained can be used for a multitude of other vehicle systems.

1.2 Optics

In FIG. 4, the ultrasonic transducers of the previous designs are replaced by laser transducers 8 and 9 which are connected to a microprocessor 20. In all other manners, the system operates the same. The design of the electronic circuits for this laser system is described in some detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,653,462 and in particular FIG. 8 thereof and the corresponding description. In this case, a pattern recognition system such as a neural network system is employed and uses the demodulated signals from the laser transducers 8 and 9.

A more complicated and sophisticated system is shown conceptually in FIG. 5 where transmitter/receiver assembly 52 is illustrated. In this case, as described briefly above, an infrared transmitter and a pair of optical receivers are used to capture the reflection of the passenger. When this system is used to monitor the driver as shown in FIG. 5, with appropriate circuitry and a microprocessor, the behavior of the driver can be monitored. Using this system, not only can the position and velocity of the driver be determined and used in conjunction with an airbag system, but it is also possible to determine whether the driver is falling asleep or exhibiting other potentially dangerous behavior by comparing portions of his/her image over time. In this case, the speed of the vehicle can be reduced or the vehicle even stopped if this action is considered appropriate. This implementation has the highest probability of an unimpeded view of the driver since he/she must have a clear view through the windshield in order to operate the motor vehicle.

The output of microprocessor 20 of the monitoring system is shown connected schematically to a general interface 36 which can be the vehicle ignition enabling system; the entertainment system; the seat, mirror, suspension or other adjustment systems; telematics or any other appropriate vehicle system.

FIG. 8A illustrates a typical wave pattern of transmitted infrared waves from transmitter/receiver assembly 49, which is mounted on the side of the vehicle passenger compartment above the front, driver's side door. Transmitter/receiver assembly 51, shown overlaid onto transmitter/receiver 49, is actually mounted in the center headliner of the passenger compartment (and thus between the driver's seat and the front passenger seat), near the dome light, and is aimed toward the driver. Typically, there will be a symmetrical installation for the passenger side of the vehicle. That is, a transmitter/receiver assembly would be arranged above the front, passenger side door and another transmitter/receiver assembly would be arranged in the center headliner, near the dome light, and aimed toward the front, passenger side door. Additional transducers can be mounted in similar places for monitoring both rear seat positions, another can be used for monitoring the trunk or any other interior volumes. As with the ultrasonic installations, most of the examples below are for automobile applications since these are generally the most complicated. Nevertheless, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is not limited to automobile vehicles and similar but generally simpler designs apply to other vehicles such as shipping containers, railroad cars and truck trailers.

In a preferred embodiment, each transmitter/receiver assembly 49, 51 comprises an optical transducer, which may be a camera and an LED, that will frequently be used in conjunction with other optical transmitter/receiver assemblies such as shown at 50, 52 and 54, which act in a similar manner. In some cases, especially when a low cost system is used primarily to categorize the seat occupancy, a single or dual camera installation is used. In many cases, the source of illumination is not co-located with the camera. For example, in one preferred implementation, two cameras such as 49 and 51 are used with a single illumination source located at 49.

These optical transmitter/receiver assemblies frequently comprise an optical transmitter, which may be an infrared LED (or possibly a near infrared (NIR) LED), a laser with a diverging lens or a scanning laser assembly, and a receiver such as a CCD or CMOS array and particularly an active pixel CMOS camera or array or a HDRL or HDRC camera or array as discussed below. The transducer assemblies map the location of the occupant(s), objects and features thereof, in a two or three-dimensional image as will now be described in more detail.

Optical transducers using CCD arrays are now becoming price competitive and, as mentioned above, will soon be the technology of choice for interior vehicle monitoring. A single CCD array of 160 by 160 pixels, for example, coupled with the appropriate trained pattern recognition software, can be used to form an image of the head of an occupant and accurately locate the head, eyes, ears etc. for some of the purposes of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein.

The location or position of the occupant can be determined in various ways as noted and listed above and below as well. Generally, any type of occupant sensor can be used. Some particular occupant sensors which can be used in the systems and methods in accordance with the invention. Specifically, a camera or other device for obtaining images of a passenger compartment of the vehicle occupied by the occupant and analyzing the images can be mounted at the locations of the transmitter and/or receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, and 54 in FIG. 8C. The camera or other device may be constructed to obtain three-dimensional images and/or focus the images on one or more optical arrays such as CCDs. Further, a mechanism for moving a beam of radiation through a passenger compartment of the vehicle occupied by the occupant, i.e., a scanning system, can be used. When using ultrasonic or electromagnetic waves, the time of flight between the transmission and reception of the waves can be used to determine the position of the occupant. The occupant sensor can also be arranged to receive infrared radiation from a space in a passenger compartment of the vehicle occupied by the occupant. It can also comprise an electric field sensor operative in a seat occupied by the occupant or a capacitance sensor operative in a seat occupied by the occupant. The implementation of such sensors in the invention will be readily appreciated by one skilled in the art in view of the disclosure herein of general occupant sensors for sensing the position of the occupant using waves, energy or radiation.

Looking now at FIG. 16, a schematic illustration of a system for controlling operation of a vehicle based on recognition of an authorized individual in accordance with the invention is shown. One or more images of the passenger compartment 105 are received at 106 and data derived therefrom at 107. Multiple image receivers may be provided at different locations. The data derivation may entail any one or more of numerous types of image processing techniques such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,397,136 including those designed to improve the clarity of the image. A pattern recognition algorithm, e.g., a neural network, is trained in a training phase 108 to recognize authorized individuals. The training phase can be conducted upon purchase of the vehicle by the dealer or by the owner after performing certain procedures provided to the owner, e.g., entry of a security code or key. In the case of the operator of a truck or when such an operator takes possession of a trailer or cargo container, the identity of the operator can be sent by telematics to a central station for recording and perhaps further processing.

In the training phase for a theft prevention system, the authorized driver(s) would sit themselves in the driver or passenger seat and optical images would be taken and processed to obtain the pattern recognition algorithm. A processor 109 is embodied with the pattern recognition algorithm thus trained to identify whether a person is the authorized individual by analysis of subsequently obtained data derived from optical images. The pattern recognition algorithm in processor 109 outputs an indication of whether the person in the image is an authorized individual for which the system is trained to identify. A security system 110 enables operations of the vehicle when the pattern recognition algorithm provides an indication that the person is an individual authorized to operate the vehicle and prevents operation of the vehicle when the pattern recognition algorithm does not provide an indication that the person is an individual authorized to operate the vehicle.

Optionally, an optical transmitting unit 111 is provided to transmit electromagnetic energy into the passenger compartment, or other volume in the case of other vehicles, such that electromagnetic energy transmitted by the optical transmitting unit is reflected by the person and received by the optical image reception device 106.

As noted above, several different types of optical reception devices can be used including a CCD array, a CMOS array, focal plane array (FPA), Quantum Well Infrared Photodetector (QWIP), any type of two-dimensional image receiver, any type of three-dimensional image receiver, an active pixel camera and an HDRC camera.

The processor 109 can be trained to determine the position of the individuals included in the images obtained by the optical image reception device, as well as the distance between the optical image reception devices and the individuals.

Instead of a security system, another component in the vehicle can be affected or controlled based on the recognition of a particular individual. For example, the rear view mirror, seat, seat belt anchorage point, headrest, pedals, steering wheel, entertainment system, ride quality, air-conditioning/ventilation system can be adjusted.

Systems based on ultrasonics and neural networks have been very successful in analyzing the seated-state of both the passenger and driver seats of automobiles. Such systems are now going into production for preventing airbag deployment when a rear facing child seat or and out-of-position occupant is present. The ultrasonic systems, however, suffer from certain natural limitations that prevent system accuracy from getting better than about 99 percent. These limitations relate to the fact that the wavelength of ultrasound is typically between 3 mm and 8 mm. As a result, unexpected results occur which are due partially to the interference of reflections from different surfaces. Additionally, commercially available ultrasonic transducers are tuned devices that require several cycles before they transmit significant energy and similarly require several cycles before they effectively receive the reflected signals. This requirement has the effect of smearing the resolution of the ultrasound to the point that, for example, using a conventional 40 kHz transducer, the resolution of the system is approximately three inches.

In contrast, the wavelength of near infrared is less than one micron and no significant interferences occur. Similarly, the system is not tuned and therefore is theoretically sensitive to a very few cycles. As a result, resolution of the optical system is determined by the pixel spacing in the CCD or CMOS arrays. For this application, typical arrays have been chosen to be 100 pixels by 100 pixels and therefore the space being imaged can be broken up into pieces that are significantly less than 1 cm in size. Naturally, if greater resolution is required arrays having larger numbers of pixels are readily available. Another advantage of optical systems is that special lenses can be used to magnify those areas where the information is most critical and operate at reduced resolution where this is not the case. For example, the area closest to the at-risk zone in front of the airbag can be magnified.

To summarize, although ultrasonic neural network systems are operating with high accuracy, they do not totally eliminate the problem of deaths and injuries caused by airbag deployments. Optical systems, on the other hand, at little or no increase in cost, have the capability of virtually 100 percent accuracy. Additional problems of ultrasonic systems arise from the slow speed of sound and diffraction caused by variations is air density. The slow sound speed limits the rate at which data can be collected and thus eliminates the possibility of tracking the motion of an occupant during a high speed crash.

In an embodiment wherein electromagnetic energy is used, it is to be appreciated that any portion of the electromagnetic signals that impinges upon a body portion of the occupant is at least partially absorbed by the body portion. Sometimes, this is due to the fact that the human body is composed primarily of water, and that electromagnetic energy at certain frequencies can be readily absorbed by water. The amount of electromagnetic signal absorption is related to the frequency of the signal, and size or bulk of the body portion that the signal impinges upon. For example, a torso of a human body tends to absorb a greater percentage of electromagnetic energy as compared to a hand of a human body for some frequencies.

Thus, when electromagnetic waves or energy signals are transmitted by a transmitter, the returning waves received by a receiver provide an indication of the absorption of the electromagnetic energy. That is, absorption of electromagnetic energy will vary depending on the presence or absence of a human occupant, the occupant's size, bulk, etc., so that different signals will be received relating to the degree or extent of absorption by the occupying item on a seat or elsewhere in the vehicle. The receiver will produce a signal representative of the returned waves or energy signals which will thus constitute an absorption signal as it corresponds to the absorption of electromagnetic energy by the occupying item in the seat.

Another optical infrared transmitter and receiver assembly is shown generally at 52 in FIG. 5 and is mounted onto the instrument panel facing the windshield. Although not shown in this view, reference 52 consists of three devices, one transmitter and two receivers, one on each side of the transmitter. In this case, the windshield is used to reflect the illumination light, and also the light reflected back by the driver, in a manner similar to the “heads-up” display which is now being offered on several automobile models. The “heads-up” display, of course, is currently used only to display information to the driver and is not used to reflect light from the driver to a receiver. In this case, the distance to the driver is determined stereoscopically through the use of the two receivers. In its most elementary sense, this system can be used to measure the distance between the driver and the airbag module. In more sophisticated applications, the position of the driver, and particularly of the driver's head, can be monitored over time and any behavior, such as a drooping head, indicative of the driver falling asleep or of being incapacitated by drugs, alcohol or illness can be detected and appropriate action taken. Other forms of radiation including visual light, radar, terahertz and microwaves as well as high frequency ultrasound could also be used by those skilled in the art.

A passive infrared system could be used to determine the position of an occupant relative to an airbag or even to detect the presence of a human or other life form in a vehicle. Passive infrared measures the infrared radiation emitted by the occupant and compares it to the background. As such, unless it is coupled with an imager and a pattern recognition system, it can best be used to determine that an occupant is moving toward the airbag since the amount of infrared radiation would then be increasing. Therefore, it could be used to estimate the velocity of the occupant but not his/her position relative to the airbag, since the absolute amount of such radiation will depend on the occupant's size, temperature and clothes as well as on his position. When passive infrared is used in conjunction with another distance measuring system, such as the ultrasonic system described above, the combination would be capable of determining both the position and velocity of the occupant relative to the airbag. Such a combination would be economical since only the simplest circuits would be required. In one implementation, for example, a group of waves from an ultrasonic transmitter could be sent to an occupant and the reflected group received by a receiver. The distance to the occupant would be proportional to the time between the transmitted and received groups of waves and the velocity determined from the passive infrared system. This system could be used in any of the locations illustrated in FIG. 5 as well as others not illustrated including truck trailers and cargo containers.

Recent advances in Quantum Well Infrared Photodetectors (QWIP) are particularly applicable here due to the range of frequencies that they can be designed to sense (3-18 microns) which encompasses the radiation naturally emitted by the human body. Currently, QWIPs need to be cooled and thus are not quite ready for vehicle applications. There are, however, longer wave IR detectors based of focal plane arrays (FPA) that are available in low resolution now. As the advantages of SWIR, MWIR and LWIR become more evident, devices that image in this part of the electromagnetic spectrum will become more available.

Passive infrared could also be used effectively in conjunction with a pattern recognition system. In this case, the passive infrared radiation emitted from an occupant can be focused onto a QWIP or FPA or even a CCD array, in some cases, and analyzed with appropriate pattern recognition circuitry, or software, to determine the position of the occupant. Such a system could be mounted at any of the preferred mounting locations shown in FIG. 5 as well as others not illustrated.

Lastly, it is possible to use a modulated scanning beam of radiation and a single pixel receiver, PIN or avalanche diode, in the inventions described above. Any form of energy or radiation used above may also be in the infrared or radar spectrums and may be polarized and filters may be used in the receiver to block out sunlight etc. These filters may be notch filters and may be made integral with the lens as one or more coatings on the lens surface as is well known in the art. Note, in many applications, this may not be necessary as window glass blocks all IR except the near IR.

For some cases, such as a laser transceiver that may contain a CMOS array, CCD, PIN or avalanche diode or other light sensitive devices, a scanner is also required that can be either solid state as in the case of some radar systems based on a phased array, an acoustical optical system as is used by some laser systems, or a mirror or MEMS based reflecting scanner, or other appropriate technology.

1.3 Ultrasonics and Optics

In some cases, a combination of an optical system such as a camera and an ultrasonic system can be used. In this case, the optical system can be used to acquire an image providing information as to the vertical and lateral dimensions of the scene and the ultrasound can be used to provide longitudinal information, for example.

A more accurate acoustic system for determining the distance to a particular object, or a part thereof, in the passenger compartment is exemplified by transducers 24 in FIG. 8E. In this case, three ultrasonic transmitter/receivers 24 are shown spaced apart mounted onto the A-pillar of the vehicle. Due to the wavelength, it is difficult to get a narrow beam using ultrasonics without either using high frequencies that have limited range or a large transducer. A commonly available 40 kHz transducer, for example, is about 1 cm. in diameter and emits a sonic wave that spreads at about a sixty-degree angle. To reduce this angle requires making the transducer larger in diameter. An alternate solution is to use several transducers and to phase the transmissions from the transducers so that they arrive at the intended part of the target in phase. Reflections from the selected part of the target are then reinforced whereas reflections from adjacent parts encounter interference with the result that the distance to the brightest portion within the vicinity of interest can be determined. A low-Q transducer may be necessary for this application.

By varying the phase of transmission from the three transducers 24, the location of a reflection source on a curved line can be determined. In order to locate the reflection source in space, at least one additional transmitter/receiver is required which is not co-linear with the others. The waves shown in FIG. 8E coming from the three transducers 24 are actually only the portions of the waves which arrive at the desired point in space together in phase. The effective direction of these wave streams can be varied by changing the transmission phase between the three transmitters 24.

A determination of the approximate location of a point of interest on the occupant can be accomplished by a CCD or CMOS array and appropriate analysis and the phasing of the ultrasonic transmitters is determined so that the distance to the desired point can be determined.

Although the combination of ultrasonics and optics has been described, it will now be obvious to others skilled in the art that other sensor types can be combined with either optical or ultrasonic transducers including weight sensors of all types as discussed below, as well as electric field, chemical, temperature, humidity, radiation, vibration, acceleration, velocity, position, proximity, capacitance, angular rate, heartbeat, radar, other electromagnetic, and other sensors.

1.4 Other Transducers

In FIG. 4, the ultrasonic transducers of the previous designs can be replaced by laser or other electromagnetic wave transducers or transceivers 8 and 9, which are connected to a microprocessor 20. As discussed above, these are only illustrative mounting locations and any of the locations described herein are suitable for particular technologies. Also, such electromagnetic transceivers are meant to include the entire electromagnetic spectrum including from X-rays to low frequencies where sensors such as capacitive or electric field sensors including so called “displacement current sensors” as discussed in detail elsewhere herein, and the auto-tune antenna sensor also discussed herein operate.

2. Adaptation

Let us now consider the process of adapting a system of occupant or object sensing transducers to a vehicle. For example, if a candidate system for an automobile consisting of eight transducers is considered, four ultrasonic transducers and four weight transducers, and if cost considerations require the choice of a smaller total number of transducers, it is a question of which of the eight transducers should be eliminated. Fortunately, the neural network technology discussed below provides a technique for determining which of the eight transducers is most important, which is next most important, etc. If the six most critical transducers are chosen, that is the six transducers which contain or provide the most useful information as determined by the neural network, a neural network can be trained using data from those six transducers and the overall accuracy of the system can be determined. Experience has determined, for example, that typically there is almost no loss in accuracy by eliminating two of the eight transducers, for example, two of the strain gage weight sensors. A slight loss of accuracy occurs when one of the ultrasonic transducers is then eliminated. In this manner, by the process of adaptation, the most cost effective system can be determined from a proposed set of sensors.

This same technique can be used with the additional transducers described throughout this disclosure. A transducer space can be determined with perhaps twenty different transducers comprised of ultrasonic, optical, electromagnetic, electric field, motion, heartbeat, weight, seat track, seatbelt payout, seatback angle and other types of transducers depending on the particular vehicle application. The neural network can then be used in conjunction with a cost function to determine the cost of system accuracy. In this manner, the optimum combination of any system cost and accuracy level can be determined.

System Adaptation involves the process by which the hardware configuration and the software algorithms are determined for a particular vehicle. Each vehicle model or platform will most likely have a different hardware configuration and different algorithms. Some of the various aspects that make up this process are as follows:

-   -   The determination of the mounting location and aiming or         orientation of the transducers.     -   The determination of the transducer field angles or area or         volume monitored     -   The use of a combination neural network algorithm generating         program such as available from International Scientific         Research, Inc. to help generate the algorithms or other pattern         recognition algorithm generation program. (as described below)     -   The process of the collection of data in the vehicle, for         example, for neural network training purposes.     -   The method of automatic movement of the vehicle seats or other         structures or objects etc. while data is collected     -   The determination of the quantity of data to acquire and the         setups needed to achieve a high system accuracy, typically         several hundred thousand vectors or data sets.     -   The collection of data in the presence of varying environmental         conditions such as with thermal gradients.     -   The photographing of each data setup.     -   The makeup of the different databases and the use of typically         three different databases.     -   The method by which the data is biased to give higher         probabilities for, e.g., forward facing humans.     -   The automatic recording of the vehicle setup including seat,         seat back, headrest, window, visor, armrest, and other object         positions, for example, to help insure data integrity.     -   The use of a daily setup to validate that the transducer         configuration and calibration has not changed.     -   The method by which bad data is culled from the database.     -   The inclusion of the Fourier transforms and other pre-processors         of the data in the algorithm generation process if appropriate.     -   The use of multiple algorithm levels, for example, for         categorization and position.     -   The use of multiple algorithms in parallel.     -   The use of post processing filters and the particularities of         these filters.     -   The addition of fuzzy logic or other human intelligence based         rules.     -   The method by which data errors are corrected using, for         example, a neural network.     -   The use of a neural network generation program as the pattern         recognition algorithm generating system, if appropriate.     -   The use of back propagation neural networks for training.     -   The use of vector or data normalization.     -   The use of feature extraction techniques, for ultrasonic systems         for example, including:         -   The number of data points prior to a peak.         -   The normalization factor.         -   The total number of peaks.         -   The vector or data set mean or variance.     -   The use of feature extraction techniques, for optics systems for         example, including:         -   Motion.         -   Edge detection.         -   Feature detection such as the eyes, head etc.         -   Texture detection.         -   Recognizing specific features of the vehicle.         -   Line subtraction—i.e., subtracting one line of pixels from             the adjacent line with every other line illuminated. This             works primarily only with rolling shutter cameras. The             equivalent for a snapshot camera is to subtract an             artificially illuminated image from one that is illuminated             only with natural light.     -   The use of other computational intelligence systems such as         genetic algorithms     -   The use the data screening techniques.     -   The techniques used to develop stable networks including the         concepts of old and new networks.     -   The time spent or the number of iterations spent in, and method         of, arriving at stable networks.     -   The technique where a small amount of data is collected first         such as 16 sheets followed by a complete data collection         sequence.     -   The use of a cellular neural network for high speed data         collection and analysis when electromagnetic transducers are         used.     -   The use of a support vector machine.

The process of adapting the system to the vehicle begins with a survey of the vehicle model. Any existing sensors, such as seat position sensors, seat back sensors, door open sensors etc., are immediate candidates for inclusion into the system. Input from the customer will determine what types of sensors would be acceptable for the final system. These sensors can include: seat structure-mounted weight sensors, pad-type weight sensors, pressure-type weight sensors (e.g., bladders), seat fore and aft position sensors, seat-mounted capacitance, electric field or antenna sensors, seat vertical position sensors, seat angular position sensors, seat back position sensors, headrest position sensors, ultrasonic occupant sensors, optical occupant sensors, capacitive sensors, electric field sensors, inductive sensors, radar sensors, vehicle velocity and acceleration sensors, shock and vibration sensors, temperature sensors, chemical sensors, radiation sensors, brake pressure, seatbelt force, payout and buckle sensors, accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc. A candidate array of sensors is then chosen and mounted onto the vehicle. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein contemplates final systems including any such sensors or combinations of such sensors, where appropriate, for the monitoring of the interior and/or exterior of any vehicle as the term is defined above.

The vehicle can also be instrumented so that data input by humans is minimized. Thus, the positions of the various components in the vehicle such as the seats, windows, sun visor, armrest, etc. are automatically recorded where possible. Also, the position of the occupant while data is being taken is also recorded through a variety of techniques such as direct ultrasonic ranging sensors, optical ranging sensors, radar ranging sensors, optical tracking sensors etc., where appropriate. Special cameras can also be installed to take one or more pictures of the setup to correspond to each vector of data collected or at some other appropriate frequency. Herein, a vector is used to represent a set of data collected at a particular epoch or representative of the occupant or environment of vehicle at a particular point in time.

A standard set of vehicle setups is chosen for initial trial data collection purposes. Typically, the initial trial will consist of between 20,000 and 100,000 setups, although this range is not intended to limit the invention.

Initial digital data collection now proceeds for the trial setup matrix. The data is collected from the transducers, digitized and combined to form to a vector of input data for analysis by a pattern recognition system such as a neural network program or combination neural network program. This analysis should yield a training accuracy of nearly 100%. If this is not achieved, then additional sensors are added to the system or the configuration changed and the data collection and analysis repeated. Note, in some cases the task is sufficiently simple that a neural network is not necessary, such as the determination that a trailer is not empty.

In addition to a variety of seating states for objects in the passenger compartment, for example, the trial database can also include environmental effects such as thermal gradients caused by heat lamps and the operation of the air conditioner and heater, or where appropriate lighting variations or other environmental variations that might affect particular transducer types. A sample of such a matrix is presented in FIGS. 82A-82H of the '881 application, with some of the variables and objects used in the matrix being designated or described in FIGS. 76-81D for automotive occupant sensing (of the '881 application). A similar matrix can be generated for other vehicle monitoring applications such as cargo containers and truck trailers. After the neural network has been trained on the trial database, the trial database will be scanned for vectors that yield erroneous results (which would likely be considered bad data). A study of those vectors along with vectors from associated in time cases are compared with the photographs to determine whether there is erroneous data present. If so, an attempt is made to determine the cause of the erroneous data. If the cause can be found, for example if a voltage spike on the power line corrupted the data, then the vector will be removed from the database and an attempt is made to correct the data collection process so as to remove such disturbances.

At this time, some of the sensors may be eliminated from the sensor matrix. This can be determined during the neural network analysis, for example, by selectively eliminating sensor data from the analysis to see what the effect if any results. Caution should be exercised here, however, since once the sensors have been initially installed in the vehicle, it requires little additional expense to use all of the installed sensors in future data collection and analysis.

The neural network, or other pattern recognition system, that has been developed in this first phase can be used during the data collection in the next phases as an instantaneous check on the integrity of the new vectors being collected.

The next set of data to be collected when neural networks are used, for example, is the training database. This will usually be the largest database initially collected and will cover such setups as listed, for example, in FIGS. 82A-82H of the '881 application for occupant sensing. The training database, which may contain 500,000 or more vectors, will be used to begin training of the neural network or other pattern recognition system. In the foregoing description, a neural network will be used for exemplary purposes with the understanding that the invention is not limited to neural networks and that a similar process exists for other pattern recognition systems. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein is largely concerned with the use of pattern recognition systems for vehicle internal monitoring. The best mode is to use trained pattern recognition systems such as neural networks. While this is taking place, additional data will be collected according to FIGS. 78-80 and 83 of the independent and validation databases (of the '881 application).

The training database is usually selected so that it uniformly covers all seated states that are known to be likely to occur in the vehicle. The independent database may be similar in makeup to the training database or it may evolve to more closely conform to the occupancy state distribution of the validation database. During the neural network training, the independent database is used to check the accuracy of the neural network and to reject a candidate neural network design if its accuracy, measured against the independent database, is less than that of a previous network architecture.

Although the independent database is not actually used in the training of the neural network, nevertheless, it has been found that it significantly influences the network structure or architecture. Therefore, a third database, the validation or real world database, is used as a final accuracy check of the chosen system. It is the accuracy against this validation database that is considered to be the system accuracy. The validation database is usually composed of vectors taken from setups which closely correlate with vehicle occupancy in real vehicles on the roadway or wherever they are used. Initially, the training database is usually the largest of the three databases. As time and resources permit, the independent database, which perhaps starts out with 100,000 vectors, will continue to grow until it becomes approximately the same size or even larger than the training database. The validation database, on the other hand, will typically start out with as few as 50,000 vectors. However, as the hardware configuration is frozen, the validation database will continuously grow until, in some cases, it actually becomes larger than the training database. This is because near the end of the program, vehicles will be operating on highways, ships, railroad tracks etc. and data will be collected in real world situations. If in the real world tests, system failures are discovered, this can lead to additional data being taken for both the training and independent databases as well as the validation database.

Once a neural network, or other pattern recognition system, has been trained or otherwise developed using all of the available data from all of the transducers, it is expected that the accuracy of the network will be very close to 100%. It is usually not practical to use all of the transducers that have been used in the training of the system for final installation in real production vehicle models. This is primarily due to cost and complexity considerations. Usually, the automobile manufacturer, or other customer, will have an idea of how many transducers would be acceptable for installation in a production vehicle. For example, the data may have been collected using 20 different transducers but the customer may restrict the final selection to 6 transducers. The next process, therefore, is to gradually eliminate transducers to determine what is the best combination of six transducers, for example, to achieve the highest system accuracy. Ideally, a series of neural networks, for example, would be trained using all combinations of six transducers from the 20 available. The activity would require a prohibitively long time. Certain constraints can be factored into the system from the beginning to start the pruning process. For example, it would probably not make sense to have both optical and ultrasonic transducers present in the same system since it would complicate the electronics. In fact, the customer may have decided initially that an optical system would be too expensive and therefore would not be considered. The inclusion of optical transducers, therefore, serves as a way of determining the loss in accuracy as a function of cost. Various constraints, therefore, usually allow the immediate elimination of a significant number of the initial group of transducers. This elimination and the training on the remaining transducers provides the resulting accuracy loss that results.

The next step is to remove each of the transducers one at a time and determine which sensor has the least effect on the system accuracy. This process is then repeated until the total number of transducers has been pruned down to the number desired by the customer. At this point, the process is reversed to add in one at a time those transducers that were removed at previous stages. It has been found, for example, that a sensor that appears to be unimportant during the early pruning process can become very important later on. Such a sensor may add a small amount of information due to the presence of various other transducers. Whereas the various other transducers, however, may yield less information than still other transducers and, therefore may have been removed during the pruning process. Reintroducing the sensor that was eliminated early in the cycle therefore can have a significant effect and can change the final choice of transducers to make up the system.

The above method of reducing the number of transducers that make up the system is but one of a variety approaches which have applicability in different situations. In some cases, a Monte Carlo or other statistical approach is warranted, whereas in other cases, a design of experiments approach has proven to be the most successful. In many cases, an operator conducting this activity becomes skilled and after a while knows intuitively what set of transducers is most likely to yield the best results. During the process it is not uncommon to run multiple cases on different computers simultaneously. Also, during this process, a database of the cost of accuracy is generated. The automobile manufacturer, for example, may desire to have the total of 6 transducers in the final system, however, when shown the fact that the addition of one or two additional transducers substantially increases the accuracy of the system, the manufacturer may change his mind. Similarly, the initial number of transducers selected may be 6 but the analysis could show that 4 transducers give substantially the same accuracy as 6 and therefore the other 2 can be eliminated at a cost saving.

While the pruning process is occurring, the vehicle is subjected to a variety of real world tests and would be subjected to presentations to the customer. The real world tests are tests that are run at different locations than where the fundamental training took place. It has been found that unexpected environmental factors can influence the performance of the system and therefore these tests can provide critical information. The system therefore, which is installed in the test vehicle, should have the capability of recording system failures. This recording includes the output of all of the transducers on the vehicle as well as a photograph of the vehicle setup that caused the error. This data is later analyzed to determine whether the training, independent or validation setups need to be modified and/or whether the transducers or positions of the transducers require modification.

Once the final set of transducers in some cases is chosen, the vehicle is again subjected to real world testing on highways, or wherever it is eventually to be used, and at customer demonstrations. Once again, any failures are recorded. In this case, however, since the total number of transducers in the system is probably substantially less than the initial set of transducers, certain failures are to be expected. All such failures, if expected, are reviewed carefully with the customer to be sure that the customer recognizes the system failure modes and is prepared to accept the system with those failure modes.

The system described so far has been based on the use of a single neural network or other pattern recognition system. It is frequently necessary and desirable to use combination neural networks, multiple neural networks, cellular neural networks or support vector machines or other pattern recognition systems. For example, for determining the occupancy state of a vehicle seat or other part of the vehicle, there may be at least two different requirements. The first requirement is to establish what is occupying the seat, for example, and the second requirement is to establish where that object is located. Another requirement might be to simply determine whether an occupying item warranting analysis by the neural networks is present. Generally, a great deal of time, typically many seconds, is available for determining whether a forward facing human or an occupied or unoccupied rear facing child seat, for example, occupies a vehicle seat. On the other hand, if the driver of the vehicle is trying to avoid an accident and is engaged in panic braking, the position of an unbelted occupant can be changing rapidly as he or she is moving toward the airbag. Thus, the problem of determining the location of an occupant is time critical. Typically, the position of the occupant in such situations must be determined in less than 20 milliseconds. There is no reason for the system to have to determine that a forward facing human being is in the seat while simultaneously determining where that forward facing human being is. The system already knows that the forward facing human being is present and therefore all of the resources can be used to determine the occupant's position. Thus, in this situation, a dual level or modular neural network can be advantageously used. The first level determines the occupancy of the vehicle seat and the second level determines the position of that occupant. In some situations, it has been demonstrated that multiple neural networks used in parallel can provide some benefit. This will be discussed in more detail below. Both modular and multiple parallel neural networks are examples of combination neural networks.

The data fed to the pattern recognition system will usually not be the raw vectors of data as captured and digitized from the various transducers. Typically, a substantial amount of preprocessing of the data is undertaken to extract the important information from the data that is fed to the neural network. This is especially true in optical systems and where the quantity of data obtained, if all were used by the neural network, would require very expensive processors. The techniques of preprocessing data will not be described in detail here. However, the preprocessing techniques influence the neural network structure in many ways. For example, the preprocessing used to determine what is occupying a vehicle seat is typically quite different from the preprocessing used to determine the location of that occupant. Some particular preprocessing concepts will be discussed in more detail below.

A pattern recognition system, such as a neural network, can sometimes make irrational decisions. This typically happens when the pattern recognition system is presented with a data set or vector that is unlike any vector that has been in its training set. The variety of seating states of a vehicle is unlimited. Every attempt is made to select from that unlimited universe a set of representative cases. Nevertheless, there will always be cases that are significantly different from any that have been previously presented to the neural network. The final step, therefore, to adapting a system to a vehicle, is to add a measure of human intelligence or common sense. Sometimes this goes under the heading of fuzzy logic and the resulting system has been termed in some cases, a neural fuzzy system. In some cases, this takes the form of an observer studying failures of the system and coming up with rules and that say, for example, that if transducer A perhaps in combination with another transducer produces values in this range, then the system should be programmed to override the pattern recognition decision and substitute therefor a human decision.

An example of this appears in R. Scorcioni, K. Ng, M. M. Trivedi, N. Lassiter; “MoNiF: A Modular Neuro-Fuzzy Controller for Race Car Navigation”; in Proceedings of the 1997 IEEE Symposium on Computational Intelligence and Robotics Applications, Monterey, Calif., USA July 1997, which describes the case of where an automobile was designed for autonomous operation and trained with a neural network, in one case, and a neural fuzzy system in another case. As long as both vehicles operated on familiar roads both vehicles performed satisfactorily. However, when placed on an unfamiliar road, the neural network vehicle failed while the neural fuzzy vehicle continued to operate successfully. Naturally, if the neural network vehicle had been trained on the unfamiliar road, it might very well have operated successful. Nevertheless, the critical failure mode of neural networks that most concerns people is this uncertainty as to what a neural network will do when confronted with an unknown state.

One aspect, therefore, of adding human intelligence to the system, is to ferret out those situations where the system is likely to fail. Unfortunately, in the current state-of-the-art, this is largely a trial and error activity. One example is that if the range of certain parts of vector falls outside of the range experienced during training, the system defaults to a particular state. In the case of suppressing deployment of one or more airbags, or other occupant protection apparatus, this case would be to enable airbag deployment even if the pattern recognition system calls for its being disabled. An alternate method is to train a particular module of a modular neural network to recognize good from bad data and reject the bad data before it is fed to the main neural networks.

The foregoing description is applicable to the systems described in the following drawings and the connection between the foregoing description and the systems described below will be explained below. However, it should be appreciated that the systems shown in the drawings do not limit the applicability of the methods or apparatus described above.

Referring again to FIG. 6, and to FIG. 6A which differs from FIG. 6 only in the use of a strain gage weight sensor mounted within the seat cushion, motion sensor 73 can be a discrete sensor that detects relative motion in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Such sensors are frequently based on ultrasonics and can measure a change in the ultrasonic pattern that occurs over a short time period. Alternately, the subtracting of one position vector from a previous position vector to achieve a differential position vector can detect motion. For the purposes herein, a motion sensor will be used to mean either a particular device that is designed to detect motion for the creation of a special vector based on vector differences or a neural network trained to determine motion based on successive vectors.

An ultrasonic, optical or other sensor or transducer system 9 can be mounted on the upper portion of the front pillar, i.e., the A-Pillar, of the vehicle and a similar sensor system 6 can be mounted on the upper portion of the intermediate pillar, i.e., the B-Pillar. Each sensor system 6, 9 may comprise a transducer. The outputs of the sensor systems 6 and 9 can be input to a band pass filter 60 through a multiplex circuit 59 which can be switched in synchronization with a timing signal from the ultrasonic sensor drive circuit 58, for example, and then can be amplified by an amplifier 61. The band pass filter 60 removes a low frequency wave component from the output signal and also removes some of the noise. The envelope wave signal can be input to an analog/digital converter (ADC) 62 and digitized as measured data. The measured data can be input to a processing circuit 63, which can be controlled by the timing signal which can be in turn output from the sensor drive circuit 58. The above description applies primarily to systems based on ultrasonics and will differ somewhat for optical, electric field and other systems and for different vehicle types.

Each of the measured data can be input to a normalization circuit 64 and normalized. The normalized measured data can be input to the combination neural network (circuit) 65, for example, as wave data.

The output of the pressure or weight sensor(s) 7, 76 or 97 (see FIG. 6A) can be amplified by an amplifier 66 coupled to the pressure or weight sensor(s) 7, 76 and 97 and the amplified output can be input to an analog/digital converter and then directed to the neural network 65, for example, of the processor means. Amplifier 66 can be useful in some embodiments but it may be dispensed with by constructing the sensors 7, 76, 97 to provide a sufficiently strong output signal, and even possibly a digital signal. One manner to do this would be to construct the sensor systems with appropriate electronics.

The neural network 65 can be directly connected to the ADCs 68 and 69, the ADC associated with amplifier 66 and the normalization circuit 64. As such, information from each of the sensors in the system (a stream of data) can be passed directly to the neural network 65 for processing thereby. The streams of data from the sensors are usually not combined prior to the neural network 65 and the neural network 65 can be designed to accept the separate streams of data (e.g., at least a part of the data at each input node) and process them to provide an output indicative of the current occupancy state of the seat or of the vehicle. The neural network 65 thus includes or incorporates a plurality of algorithms derived by training in the manners discussed herein. Once the current occupancy state of the seat or vehicle is determined, it is possible to control vehicular components or systems, such as the airbag system or telematics system, in consideration of the current occupancy state of the seat or vehicle.

A discussion of the methodology of adapting a monitoring system to an automotive vehicle for the purpose primarily of controlling a component such as a restraint system is disclosed in the '881 application with reference to FIGS. 28-36. Generally simpler systems are used for cargo container, truck trailer and other vehicle monitoring cases.

In addition to variations in occupancy or seated states, it is important to consider environmental effects during the data collection. Thermal gradients or thermal instabilities are particularly important for systems based on ultrasound since sound waves can be significantly diffracted by density changes in air. There are two aspects of the use of thermal gradients or instability in training. First, the fact that thermal instabilities exist and therefore data with thermal instabilities present should be part of database. For this case, a rather small amount of data collected with thermal instabilities would be used. A much more important use of thermal instability comes from the fact that they add variability to data. Thus, considerably more data is taken with thermal instability and in fact, in some cases a substantial percentage of the database is taken with time varying thermal gradients in order to provide variability to the data so that the neural network does not memorize but instead generalizes from the data. This is accomplished by taking the data with a cold vehicle with the heater operating and with a hot vehicle with the air conditioner operating, for example. Additional data is also taken with a heat lamp in a closed vehicle to simulate a stable thermal gradient caused by sun loading.

To collect data for 500,000 vehicle configurations is not a formidable task. A trained technician crew can typically collect data on in excess on 2000 configurations or vectors per hour. The data is collected typically every 50 to 100 milliseconds. During this time, the occupant is continuously moving, assuming a continuously varying position and posture in the vehicle including moving from side to side, forward and back, twisting his/her head, reading newspapers and books, moving hands, arms, feet and legs, until the desired number of different seated state examples are obtained. In some cases, this process is practiced by confining the motion of an occupant into a particular zone. In some cases, for example, the occupant is trained to exercise these different seated state motions while remaining in a particular zone that may be the safe zone, the keep out zone, or an intermediate gray zone. In this manner, data is collected representing the airbag disable, depowered airbag-enabled or full power airbag-enabled states. In other cases, the actual position of the back of the head and/or the shoulders of the occupant are tracked using string pots, high frequency ultrasonic transducers, optically, by RF or other equivalent methods. In this manner, the position of the occupant can be measured and the decision as to whether this should be a disable or enable airbag case can be decided later. By continuously monitoring the occupant, an added advantage results in that the data can be collected to permit a comparison of the occupant from one seated state to another. This is particularly valuable in attempting to project the future location of an occupant based on a series of past locations as would be desirable for example to predict when an occupant would cross into the keep out zone during a panic braking situation prior to crash.

It is important to note that it is not necessary to tailor the system for every vehicle produced but rather to tailor it for each model or platform. However, a neural network, and especially a combination neural network, can be designed with some adaptability to compensate for vehicle to vehicle differences within a platform such as mounting tolerances, or to changes made by the owner or due to aging. A platform is an automobile manufacturer's designation of a group of vehicle models that are built on the same vehicle structure. A model would also apply to a particular size, shape or geometry of truck trailer or cargo container

The methods above have been described mainly in connection with the use of ultrasonic transducers. Many of the methods, however, are also applicable to optical, radar, capacitive, electric field and other sensing systems and where applicable, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is not limited to ultrasonic systems. In particular, an important feature of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is the proper placement of two or more separately located receivers such that the system still operates with high reliability if one of the receivers is blocked by some object such as a newspaper or box. This feature is also applicable to systems using electromagnetic radiation instead of ultrasonic, however the particular locations will differ based on the properties of the particular transducers. Optical sensors based on two-dimensional cameras or other image sensors, for example, are more appropriately placed on the sides of a rectangle surrounding the seat to be monitored, for the automotive vehicle case, rather than at the corners of such a rectangle as is the case with ultrasonic sensors. This is because ultrasonic sensors measure an axial distance from the sensor where the 2D camera is most appropriate for measuring distances up and down and across its field view rather than distances to the object. With the use of electromagnetic radiation and the advances which have recently been made in the field of very low light level sensitivity, it is now possible, in some implementations, to eliminate the transmitters and use background light as the source of illumination along with using a technique such as auto-focusing or stereo vision to obtain the distance from the receiver to the object. Thus, only receivers would be required further reducing the complexity of the system.

Although implicit in the above discussion, an important feature of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein which should be emphasized is the method of developing a system having distributed transducer mountings. Other systems which have attempted to solve the rear facing child seat (RFCS) and out-of-position problems have relied on a single transducer mounting location or at most, two transducer mounting locations. Such systems can be easily blinded by a newspaper or by the hand of an occupant, for example, which is imposed between the occupant and the transducers. This problem is almost completely eliminated through the use of three or more transducers which are mounted so that they have distinctly different views of the passenger compartment volume of interest. If the system is adapted using four transducers, for example, the system suffers only a slight reduction in accuracy even if two of the transducers are covered so as to make them inoperable. However, the automobile manufacturers may not wish to pay the cost of several different mounting locations and an alternate is to mount the sensors high where blockage is difficult and to diagnose whether a blockage state exists.

It is important in order to obtain the full advantages of the system when a transducer is blocked, that the training and independent databases contains many examples of blocked transducers. If the pattern recognition system, the neural network in this case, has not been trained on a substantial number of blocked transducer cases, it will not do a good job in recognizing such cases later. This is yet another instance where the makeup of the databases is crucial to the success of designing the system that will perform with high reliability in a vehicle and is an important aspect of the instant invention. When camera-based transducers are used, for example, an alternative strategy is to diagnose when a newspaper or other object is blocking a camera, for example. In most cases, a short time blockage is of little consequence since earlier decisions provide the seat occupancy and the decision to enable deployment or suppress deployment of the occupant restraint will not change. For a prolonged blockage, the diagnostic system can provide a warning light indicating to the driver, operator or other interested party which may be remote from the vehicle, that the system is malfunctioning and the deployment decision is again either not changed or changed to the default decision, which is usually to enable deployment for the automobile occupant monitoring case.

Let us now consider some specific issues:

1. Blocked transducers. It is sometimes desirable to positively identify a blocked transducer and when such a situation is found to use a different neural network which has only been trained on the subset of unblocked transducers. Such a network, since it has been trained specifically on three transducers, for example, will generally perform more accurately than a network which has been trained on four transducers with one of the transducers blocked some of the time. Once a blocked transducer has been identified the occupant or other interested party can be notified if the condition persists for more than a reasonable time.

2. Transducer Geometry. Another technique, which is frequently used in designing a system for a particular vehicle, is to use a neural network to determine the optimum mounting locations, aiming or orientation directions and field angles of transducers. For particularly difficult vehicles, it is sometimes desirable to mount a large number of ultrasonic transducers, for example, and then use the neural network to eliminate those transducers which are least significant. This is similar to the technique described above where all kinds of transducers are combined initially and later pruned.

3. Data quantity. Since it is very easy to take large amounts data and yet large databases require considerably longer training time for a neural network, a test of the variability of the database can be made using a neural network. If, for example, after removing half of the data in the database, the performance of a trained neural network against the validation database does not decrease, then the system designer suspects that the training database contains a large amount of redundant data. Techniques such as similarity analysis can then be used to remove data that is virtually indistinguishable from other data. Since it is important to have a varied database, it is undesirable generally to have duplicate or essentially duplicate vectors in the database since the presence of such vectors can bias the system and drive the system more toward memorization and away from generalization.

4. Environmental factors. An evaluation can be made of the beneficial effects of using varying environmental influences, such as temperature or lighting, during data collection on the accuracy of the system using neural networks along with a technique such as design of experiments.

5. Database makeup. It is generally believed that the training database must be flat, meaning that all of the occupancy states that the neural network must recognize must be approximately equally represented in the training database. Typically, the independent database has approximately the same makeup as the training database. The validation database, on the other hand, typically is represented in a non-flat basis with representative cases from real world experience. Since there is no need for the validation database to be flat, it can include many of the extreme cases as well as being highly biased towards the most common cases. This is the theory that is currently being used to determine the makeup of the various databases. The success of this theory continues to be challenged by the addition of new cases to the validation database. When significant failures are discovered in the validation database, the training and independent databases are modified in an attempt to remove the failure.

6. Biasing. All seated state occupancy states are not equally important. The final system for the automotive case for example must be nearly 100% accurate for forward facing “in-position” humans, i.e., normally positioned humans. Since that will comprise the majority of the real world situations, even a small loss in accuracy here will cause the airbag to be disabled in a situation where it otherwise would be available to protect an occupant. A small decrease in accuracy will thus result in a large increase in deaths and injuries. On the other hand, there are no serious consequences if the airbag is deployed occasionally when the seat is empty. Various techniques are used to bias the data in the database to take this into account. One technique is to give a much higher value to the presence of a forward facing human during the supervised learning process than to an empty seat. Another technique is to include more data for forward facing humans than for empty seats. This, however, can be dangerous as an unbalanced network leads to a loss of generality.

7. Screening. It is important that the loop be closed on data acquisition. That is, the data must be checked at the time the data is acquired to be sure that it is good data. Bad data can happen, for example, because of electrical disturbances on the power line, sources of ultrasound such as nearby welding equipment, or due to human error. If the data remains in the training database, for example, then it will degrade the performance of the network. Several methods exist for eliminating bad data. The most successful method is to take an initial quantity of data, such as 30,000 to 50,000 vectors, and create an interim network. This is normally done anyway as an initial check on the system capabilities prior to engaging in an extensive data collection process. The network can be trained on this data and, as the real training data is acquired, the data can be tested against the neural network created on the initial data set. Any vectors that fail are examined for reasonableness.

8. Vector normalization method. Through extensive research, it has been found that the vector should be normalized based on all of the data in the vector, that is have all its data values range from 0 to 1. For particular cases, however, it has been found desirable to apply the normalization process selectively, eliminating or treating differently the data at the early part of the data from each transducer. This is especially the case when there is significant ringing on the transducer or cross talk when a separate ultrasonic send and receive transducer is used. There are times when other vector normalization techniques are required and the neural network system can be used to determine the best vector normalization technique for a particular application.

9. Feature extraction. The success of a neural network system can frequently be aided if additional data is inputted into the network. One ultrasonic example can be the number of 0 data points before the first peak is experienced. Alternately, the exact distance to the first peak can be determined prior to the sampling of the data. Other features can include the number of peaks, the distance between the peaks, the width of the largest peak, the normalization factor, the vector mean or standard deviation, etc. These normalization techniques are frequently used at the end of the adaptation process to slightly increase the accuracy of the system.

10. Noise. It has been frequently reported in the literature that adding noise to the data that is provided to a neural network can improve the neural network accuracy by leading to better generalization and away from memorization. However, the training of the network in the presence of thermal gradients has been shown to substantially eliminate the need to artificially add noise to the data for ultrasonic systems. Nevertheless, in some cases, improvements have been observed when random arbitrary noise of a rather low level is superimposed on the training data.

11. Photographic recording of the setup. After all of the data has been collected and used to train a neural network, it is common to find a significant number of vectors which, when analyzed by the neural network, give a weak or wrong decision. These vectors must be carefully studied especially in comparison with adjacent vectors to see if there is an identifiable cause for the weak or wrong decision. Perhaps the occupant was on the borderline of the keep out zone and strayed into the keep out zone during a particular data collection event. For this reason, it is desirable to photograph each setup simultaneous with the collection of the data. This can be done using one or more cameras mounted in positions where they can have a good view of the seat occupancy. Sometimes several cameras are necessary to minimize the effects of blockage by a newspaper, for example. Having the photographic record of the data setup is also useful when similar results are obtained when the vehicle is subjected to real world testing. During real world testing, one or more cameras should also be present and the test engineer is required to initiate data collection whenever the system does not provide the correct response. The vector and the photograph of this real world test can later be compared to similar setups in the laboratory to see whether there is data that was missed in deriving the matrix of vehicle setups for training the vehicle.

12. Automation. When collecting data in the vehicle it is desirable to automate the motion of the vehicle seat, seatback, windows, visors etc. so that in this manner, the positions of these items can be controlled and distributed as desired by the system designer. This minimizes the possibility of taking too much data at one configuration and thereby unbalancing the network.

13. Automatic setup parameter recording. To achieve an accurate data set, the key parameters of the setup should be recorded automatically. These include the temperatures at various positions inside the vehicle and for the automotive case, the position of the vehicle seat, and seatback, the position of the headrest, visor and windows and, where possible, the position of the vehicle occupant(s). The automatic recordation of these parameters minimizes the effects of human errors.

14. Laser Pointers. For the ultrasonic case, during the initial data collection with full horns mounted on the surface of the passenger compartment, care must the exercised so that the transducers are not accidentally moved during the data collection process. In order to check for this possibility, a small laser diode is incorporated into each transducer holder. The laser is aimed so that it illuminates some other surface of the passenger compartment at a known location. Prior to each data taking session, each of the transducer aiming points is checked.

15. Multi-frequency transducer placement. When data is collected for dynamic out-of-position, each of the ultrasonic transducers must operate at a different frequency so that all transducers can transmit simultaneously. By this method, data can be collected every 10 milliseconds, which is sufficiently fast to approximately track the motion of an occupant during pre-crash braking prior to an impact. A problem arises in the spacing of the frequencies between the different transducers. If the spacing is too close, it becomes very difficult to separate the signals from different transducers and it also affects the sampling rate of the transducer data and thus the resolution of the transducers. If an ultrasonic transducer operates at a frequency much below about 35 kHz, it can be sensed by dogs and other animals. If the transducer operates at a frequency much above 70 kHz, it is very difficult to make the open type of ultrasonic transducer, which produces the highest sound pressure. If the multiple frequency system is used for both the driver and passenger-side, as many as eight separate frequencies are required. In order to find eight frequencies between 35 kHz and 70 kHz, a frequency spacing of 5 kHz is required. In order to use conventional electronic filters and to provide sufficient spacing to permit the desired resolution at the keep out zone border, a 10 kHz spacing is desired. These incompatible requirements can be solved through a careful, judicious placement of the transducers such that transducers that are within 5 kHz of each other are placed such that there is no direct path between the transducers and any indirect path is sufficiently long so that it can be filtered temporally. As an example, the transducers can operate at the following frequencies: 65 kHz, 55 kHz, 35 kHz, 45 kHz, 50 kHz, 40 kHz, 60 kHz, 70 kHz. Actually, other arrangements adhering to the principle described above would also work.

16. Use of a PC in data collection. When collecting data for the training, independent, and validation databases, it is frequently desirable to test the data using various screening techniques and to display the data on a monitor. Thus, during data collection the process is usually monitored using a desktop PC for data taken in the laboratory and a laptop PC for data taken on the road.

17. Use of referencing markers and gages. In addition to and sometimes as a substitution for, the automatic recording of the positions of the seats, seatbacks, windows etc. as described above, a variety of visual markings and gages are frequently used. This includes markings to show the angular position of the seatback, the location of the seat on the seat track, the degree of openness of the window, etc. Also in those cases where automatic tracking of the occupant is not implemented, visual markings are placed such that a technician can observe that the test occupant remains within the required zone for the particular data taking exercise. Sometimes, a laser diode is used to create a visual line in the space that represents the boundary of the keep out zone or other desired zone boundary.

18. Subtracting out data that represents reflections from known seat parts or other vehicle components. This is particularly useful if the seat track and seatback recline positions are known.

19. Improved identification and tracking can sometimes be obtained if the object can be centered or otherwise located in a particular part of the neural network in a manner similar to the way the human eye centers an object to be examined in the center of its field of view.

20. Continuous tracking of the object in place of a zone-based system also improves the operation of the pattern recognition system since discontinuities are frequently difficult for the pattern recognition system, such as a neural network, to handle. In this case, the location of the occupant relative to the airbag cover, for example, would be determined and then a calculation as to what zone the object is located in can be determined and the airbag deployment decision made (suppression, depowered, delayed, deployment). This also permits a different suppression zone to be used for different sized occupants further improving the matching of the airbag deployment to the occupant.

It is important to realize that the adaptation process described herein applies to any combination of transducers that provide information about the vehicle occupancy. These include weight sensors, capacitive sensors, electric field sensors, inductive sensors, moisture sensors, chemical sensors, ultrasonic, radiation, optic, infrared, radar, X-ray among others. The adaptation process begins with a selection of candidate transducers for a particular vehicle model. This selection is based on such considerations as cost, alternate uses of the system other than occupant sensing, vehicle interior compartment geometry, desired accuracy and reliability, vehicle aesthetics, vehicle manufacturer preferences, and others. Once a candidate set of transducers has been chosen, these transducers are mounted in the test vehicle according to the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. The vehicle is then subjected to an extensive data collection process wherein various objects are placed in the vehicle at various locations as described below and an initial data set is collected. A pattern recognition system is then developed using the acquired data and an accuracy assessment is made. Further studies are made to determine which, if any, of the transducers can be eliminated from the design. In general, the design process begins with a surplus of sensors plus an objective as to how many sensors are to be in the final vehicle installation. The adaptation process can determine which of the transducers are most important and which are least important and the least important transducers can be eliminated to reduce system cost and complexity.

A process for adapting an ultrasonic system to a vehicle will now be described. Note, some steps will not apply to some vehicles. A more detailed list of steps is provided in Appendix 2 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/940,811 incorporated by reference herein. Although the pure ultrasonic system is described here for automotive applications, a similar or analogous set of steps applies for other vehicle types and when other technologies such as weight and optical (scanning or imager) or other electromagnetic wave or electric field systems such as capacitance and field monitoring systems are used. This description is thus provided to be exemplary and not limiting:

1. Select transducer, horn and grill designs to fit the vehicle. At this stage, usually full horns are used which are mounted so that they project into the compartment. No attempt is made at this time to achieve an esthetic matching of the transducers to the vehicle surfaces. An estimate of the desired transducer fields is made at this time either from measurements in the vehicle directly or from CAD drawings.

2. Make polar plots of the transducer ultrasonic fields. Transducers and candidate horns and grills are assembled and tested to confirm that the desired field angles have been achieved. This frequently requires some adjustment of the transducers in the horn and of the grill. A properly designed grill for ultrasonic systems can perform a similar function as a lens for optical systems.

3. Check to see that the fields cover the required volumes of the vehicle passenger compartment and do not impinge on adjacent flat surfaces that may cause multipath effects. Redesign horns and grills if necessary.

4. Install transducers into vehicle.

5. Map transducer fields in the vehicle and check for multipath effects and proper coverage.

6. Adjust transducer aim and re-map fields if necessary.

7. Install daily calibration fixture and take standard setup data.

8. Acquire 50,000 to 100,000 vectors of data

9. Adjust vectors for volume considerations by removing some initial data points if cross talk or ringing is present and some final points to keep data in the desired passenger compartment volume.

10. Normalize vectors.

11. Run neural network algorithm generating software to create algorithm for vehicle installation.

12. Check the accuracy of the algorithm. If not sufficiently accurate collect more data where necessary and retrain. If still not sufficiently accurate, add additional transducers to cover holes.

13. When sufficient accuracy is attained, proceed to collect ˜500,000 training vectors varying:

-   -   Occupancy (see Appendices 1 and 3 of U.S. patent application         Ser. No. 10/940,881 incorporated by reference herein):     -   Occupant size, position (zones), clothing etc     -   Child seat type, size, position etc.     -   Empty seat     -   Vehicle configuration:     -   Seat position     -   Window position     -   Visor and armrest position     -   Presence of other occupants in adjoining seat or rear seat     -   Temperature     -   Temperature gradient—stable     -   Temperature turbulence—heater and air conditioner     -   Wind turbulence—High speed travel with windows open, top down         etc.     -   Other similar features when the adaptation is to a vehicle other         than an automobile.

14. Collect ˜100,000 vectors of Independent data using other combinations of the above

15. Collect ˜50,000 vectors of “real world data” to represent the acceptance criteria and more closely represent the actual seated state probabilities in the real world.

16. Train network and create an algorithm using the training vectors and the Independent data vectors.

17. Validate the algorithm using the real world vectors.

18. Install algorithm into the vehicle and test.

19. Decide on post processing methodology to remove final holes (areas of inaccuracy) in system

20. Implement post-processing methods into the algorithm

21. Final test. The process up until step 13 involves the use of transducers with full horns mounted on the surfaces of the interior passenger compartment. At some point, the actual transducers which are to be used in the final vehicle must be substituted for the trial transducers. This is either done prior to step 13 or at this step. This process involves designing transducer holders that blend with the visual surfaces of the vehicle compartment so that they can be covered with a properly designed grill that helps control the field and also serves to retain the esthetic quality of the interior. This is usually a lengthy process and involves several consultations with the customer. Usually, therefore, the steps from 13-20 are repeated at this point after the final transducer and holder design has been selected. The initial data taken with full horns gives a measure of the best system that can be made to operate in the vehicle. Some degradation in performance is expected when the aesthetic horns and grills are substituted for the full horns. By conducting two complete data collection cycles, an accurate measure of this accuracy reduction can be obtained.

22. Up until this point, the best single neural network algorithm has been developed. The final step is to implement the principles of a combination neural network in order to remove some remaining error sources such as bad data and to further improve the accuracy of the system. It has been found that the implementation of combination neural networks can reduce the remaining errors by up to 50 percent. A combination neural network CAD optimization program provided by International Scientific Research Inc. can now be used to derive the neural network architecture. Briefly, the operator lays out a combination neural network involving many different neural networks arranged in parallel and in series and with appropriate feedbacks which the operator believes could be important. The software then optimizes each neural network and also provides an indication of the value of the network. The operator can then selectively eliminate those networks with little or no value and retrain the system. Through this combination of pruning, retraining and optimizing the final candidate combination neural network results.

23. Ship to customers to be used in production vehicles.

24. Collect additional real world validation data for continuous improvement.

More detail on the operation of the transducers and control circuitry as well as the neural network is provided in the above-referenced patents and patent applications and elsewhere herein. One particular example of a successful neural network for the two transducer case had 78 input nodes, 6 hidden nodes and 1 output node and for the four transducer case had 176 input nodes 20 hidden layer nodes on hidden layer one, 7 hidden layer nodes on hidden layer two and 1 output node. The weights of the network were determined by supervised training using the back propagation method as described in the above-referenced patents and patent applications and in more detail in the references cited therein. Other neural network architectures are possible including RCE, Logicon Projection, Stochastic, cellular, or support vector machine, etc. An example of a combination neural network system is shown in FIG. 37 of the '881 application, incorporated by reference herein. Any of the network architectures mention here can be used for any of the boxes in FIG. 37.

Finally, the system is trained and tested with situations representative of the manufacturing and installation tolerances that occur during the production and delivery of the vehicle as well as usage and deterioration effects. Thus, for example, the system is tested with the transducer mounting positions shifted by up to one inch in any direction and rotated by up to 5 degrees, with a simulated accumulation of dirt and other variations. This tolerance to vehicle variation also sometimes permits the installation of the system onto a different but similar model vehicle with, in many cases, only minimal retraining of the system.

3. Mounting Locations for and Quantity of Transducers

Ultrasonic transducers are relatively good at measuring the distance along a radius to a reflective object. An optical array, to be discussed now, on the other hand, can get accurate measurements in two dimensions, the lateral and vertical dimensions relative to the transducer. Assuming the optical array has dimensions of 100 by 100 as compared to an ultrasonic sensor that has a single dimension of 100, an optical array can therefore provide 100 times more information than the ultrasonic sensor. Most importantly, this vastly greater amount of information does not cost significantly more to obtain than the information from the ultrasonic sensor.

As illustrated in FIGS. 8A-8D, the optical sensors are typically located for an automotive vehicle at the positions where the desired information is available with the greatest resolution. These positions are typically in the center front and center rear of the occupancy seat and at the center on each side and top. This is in contrast to the optimum location for ultrasonic sensors, which are the corners of such a rectangle that outlines the seated volume. Styling and other constraints often prevent mounting of transducers at the optimum locations.

An optical infrared transmitter and receiver assembly is shown generally at 52 in FIG. 8B and is mounted onto the instrument panel facing the windshield. Assembly 52 can either be recessed below the upper face of the instrument panel or mounted onto the upper face of the instrument panel. Assembly 52, shown enlarged, comprises a source of infrared radiation, or another form of electromagnetic radiation, and a CCD, CMOS or other appropriate arrays of typically 160 pixels by 160 pixels. In this embodiment, the windshield is used to reflect the illumination light provided by the infrared radiation toward the objects in the passenger compartment and also reflect the light being reflected back by the objects in the passenger compartment, in a manner similar to the “heads-up” display which is now being offered on several automobile models. The “heads-up” display, of course, is currently used only to display information to the driver and is not used to reflect light from the driver to a receiver. Once again, unless one of the distance measuring systems as described below is used, this system alone cannot be used to determine distances from the objects to the sensor. Its main purpose is object identification and monitoring. Depending on the application, separate systems can be used for the driver and for the passenger. In some cases, the cameras located in the instrument panel which receive light reflected off of the windshield can be co-located with multiple lenses whereby the respective lenses aimed at the driver and passenger seats respectively.

Assembly 52 is actually about two centimeters or less in diameter and is shown greatly enlarged in FIG. 8B. Also, the reflection area on the windshield is considerably smaller than illustrated and special provisions are made to assure that this area of the windshield is flat and reflective as is done generally when heads-up displays are used. For cases where there is some curvature in the windshield, it can be at least partially compensated for by the CCD optics.

Transducers 23-25 are illustrated mounted onto the A-pillar of the vehicle, however, since these transducers are quite small, typically less than 2 cm on a side, they could alternately be mounted onto the windshield itself, or other convenient location which provides a clear view of the portion of the passenger compartment being monitored. Other preferred mounting locations include the headliner above and also the side of the seat. Some imagers are now being made that are less than 1 cm on a side.

In the preferred implementation, as shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, four transducer assemblies are positioned around the seat to be monitored, each can comprise one or more LEDs with a diverging lenses and a CMOS array. Although illustrated together, the illuminating source in many cases will not be co-located with the receiving array. The LED emits a controlled angle, 120° for example, diverging cone of infrared radiation that illuminates the occupant from both sides and from the front and rear. This angle is not to be confused with the field angle used in ultrasonic systems. With ultrasound, extreme care is required to control the field of the ultrasonic waves so that they will not create multipath effects and add noise to the system. With infrared, there is no reason, in the implementation now being described, other than to make the most efficient use of the infrared energy, why the entire vehicle cannot be flooded with infrared energy either from many small sources or from a few bright ones.

The image from each array is used to capture two dimensions of occupant position information, thus, the array of assembly 50 positioned on the windshield header, which is approximately 25% of the way laterally across the headliner in front of the driver, provides a both vertical and transverse information on the location of the driver. A similar view from the rear is obtained from the array of assembly 54 positioned behind the driver on the roof of the vehicle and above the seatback potion of the seat 72. As such, assembly 54 also provides both vertical and transverse information on the location of the driver. Finally, arrays of assemblies 49 and 51 provide both vertical and longitudinal driver location information. Another preferred location is the headliner centered directly above the seat of interest. The position of the assemblies 49-52 and 54 may differ from that shown in the drawings. In the invention, in order that the information from two or more of the assemblies 49-52 and 54 may provide a three-dimensional image of the occupant, or portion of the passenger compartment, the assemblies generally should not be arranged side-by-side. A side-by-side arrangement as used in several prior art references discussed above, will provide two essentially identical views with the difference being a lateral shift. This does not enable a complete three-dimensional view of the occupant.

One important point concerns the location and number of optical assemblies. It is possible to use fewer than four such assemblies with a possible resulting loss in accuracy. The number of four was chosen so that either a forward or rear assembly or either of the side assemblies can be blocked by a newspaper, for example, without seriously degrading the performance of the system. Since drivers rarely are reading newspapers while driving, fewer than four arrays are usually adequate for the driver side. In fact, one is frequently sufficient. One camera is also usually sufficient for the passenger side if the goal of the system is classification only or if camera blockage is tolerated for occupant tracking.

The particular locations of the optical assemblies were chosen to give the most accurate information as to the locations of the occupant. This is based on an understanding of what information can be best obtained from a visual image. There is a natural tendency on the part of humans to try to gauge distance from the optical sensors directly. This, as can be seen above, is at best complicated involving focusing systems, stereographic systems, multiple arrays and triangulation, time of flight measurement, etc. What is not intuitive to humans is to not try to obtain this distance directly from apparatus or techniques associated with the mounting location. Whereas ultrasound is quite good for measuring distances from the transducer (the z-axis), optical systems are better at measuring distances in the vertical and lateral directions (the x and y-axes). Since the precise locations of the optical transducers are known, that is, the geometry of the transducer locations is known relative to the vehicle, there is no need to try to determine the displacement of an object of interest from the transducer (the z-axis) directly. This can more easily be done indirectly by another transducer. That is, the vehicle z-axis to one transducer is the camera x-axis to another.

Another preferred location of a transmitter/receiver 54 for use with airbags is attached to the steering wheel (see FIG. 5) and gives an accurate determination of the distance of the driver's chest from the airbag module. This implementation would generally be used with another device such as 50 at another location. Details about mounting a transmitter/receiver on a cover of an airbag module are set forth in the '881 application.

One problem of the system using a transmitter/receiver on an airbag cover as shown in FIG. 5 is that a driver may have inadvertently placed his hand over the transmitter/receiver 54, thus defeating the operation of the device. A second confirming transmitter/receiver 50 can therefore be placed at some other convenient position such as on the roof or headliner of the passenger compartment as shown in FIG. 5. This transmitter/receiver 50 operates in a manner similar to transmitter/receiver 54.

The applications described herein have been illustrated using the driver of the vehicle. The same systems of determining the position of the occupant relative to the airbag apply to the passenger, sometimes requiring minor modifications. Also of course, a similar system can be appropriately designed for other monitoring situations such as for cargo containers and truck trailers.

It is likely that the sensor required triggering time based on the position of the occupant will be different for the driver than for the passenger. Current systems are based primarily on the driver with the result that the probability of injury to the passenger is necessarily increased either by deploying the airbag too late or by failing to deploy the airbag when the position of the driver would not warrant it but the passenger's position would. With the use of occupant position sensors for both the passenger and driver, the airbag system can be individually optimized for each occupant and result in further significant injury reduction. In particular, either the driver or passenger system can be disabled if either the driver or passenger is out of position.

There is almost always a driver present in vehicles that are involved in accidents where an airbag is needed. Only about 30% of these vehicles, however, have a passenger. If the passenger is not present, there is usually no need to deploy the passenger side airbag. The occupant position sensor, when used for the passenger side with proper pattern recognition circuitry, can also ascertain whether or not the seat is occupied, and if not, can disable the deployment of the passenger side airbag and thereby save the cost of its replacement. A sophisticated pattern recognition system could even distinguish between an occupant and a bag of groceries or a box, for example, which in some cargo container or truck trailer monitoring situations is desired. Finally, there has been much written about the out of position child who is standing or otherwise positioned adjacent to the airbag, perhaps due to pre-crash braking. The occupant position sensor described herein can prevent the deployment of the airbag in this situation.

3.1 Single Camera, Dual Camera with Single Light Source

Many automobile companies are opting to satisfy the requirements of FMVSS-208 by using a weight only system such as the bladder or strain gage systems disclosed here. Such a system provides an elementary measure of the weight of the occupying object but does not give a reliable indication of its position, at least for automotive vehicles. It can also be easily confused by any object that weighs 60 or more pounds and that is interpreted as an adult. Weight only systems are also static systems in that due to vehicle dynamics that frequently accompany a pre crash braking event they are unable to track the position of the occupant. The load from seatbelts can confuse the system and therefore a special additional sensor must be used to measure seatbelt tension. In some systems, the device must be calibrated for each vehicle and there is some concern as to whether this calibration will be proper for the life on the vehicle.

A single camera can frequently provide considerably more information than a weight only system without the disadvantages of weight sensors and do so at a similar cost. Such a single camera in its simplest installation can categorize the occupancy state of the vehicle and determine whether the airbag should be suppressed due to an empty seat or the presence of a child of a size that corresponds to one weighing less than 60 pounds. Of course, a single camera can also easily do considerably more by providing a static out-of-position indication and, with the incorporation of a faster processor, dynamic out-of-position determination can also be provided. Thus, especially with the costs of microprocessors continuing to drop, a single camera system can easily provide considerably more functionality than a weight only system and yet stay in the same price range.

A principal drawback of a single camera system is that it can be blocked by the hand of an occupant or by a newspaper, for example. This is a rare event since the preferred mounting location for the camera is typically high in the vehicle such as on the headliner. Also, it is considerably less likely that the occupant will always be reading a newspaper, for example, and if he or she is not reading it when the system is first started up, or at any other time during the trip, the camera system will still get an opportunity to see the occupant when he or she is not being blocked and make the proper categorization. The ability of the system to track the occupant will be impaired but the system can assume that the occupant has not moved toward the airbag while reading the newspaper and thus the initial position of the occupant can be retained and used for suppression determination. Finally, the fact that the camera is blocked can be determined and the driver made aware of this fact in much the same manner that a seatbelt light notifies the driver that the passenger is not wearing his or her seatbelt.

The accuracy of a single camera system can be above 99% which significantly exceeds the accuracy of weight only systems. Nevertheless, some automobile manufacturers desire even greater accuracy and therefore opt for the addition of a second camera. Such a camera is usually placed on the opposite side of the occupant as the first camera. The first camera may be placed on or near the dome light, for example, and the second camera can be on the headliner above the side door. A dual camera system such as this can operate more accurately in bright daylight situations where the window area needs to be ignored in the view of the camera that is mounted near the dome.

Sometimes, in a dual camera system, only a single light source is used. This provides a known shadow pattern for the second camera and helps to accentuate the edges of the occupying item rendering classification easier. Any of the forms of structured light can also be used and through these and other techniques the corresponding points in the two images can more easily be determined thus providing a three-dimensional model of the occupant or occupying object in the case of other vehicle types such as a cargo container or truck trailer.

As a result, the current assignee has developed a low cost single camera system which has been extensively tested for the most difficult problem of automobile occupant sensing but is nevertheless also applicable for monitoring of other vehicles such as cargo containers and truck trailers. The automotive occupant position sensor system uses a CMOS camera in conjunction with pattern recognition algorithms for the discrimination of out-of-position occupants and rear facing child safety seats. A single imager, located strategically within the occupant compartment, is coupled with an infrared LED that emits unfocused, wide-beam pulses toward the passenger volume. These pulses, which reflect off of objects in the passenger seat and are captured by the camera, contain information for classification and location determination in approximately 10 msec. The decision algorithm processes the returned information using a uniquely trained neural network, which may not be necessary in the simpler cargo container or truck trailer monitoring cases. The logic of the neural network was developed through extensive in-vehicle training with thousands of realistic occupant size and position scenarios. Although the optical occupant position sensor can be used in conjunction with other technologies (such as weight sensing, seat belt sensing, crash severity sensing, etc.), it is a stand-alone system meeting the requirements of FMVSS-208. This device will be discussed in detail below.

3.2 Location of the Transducers

Any of the transducers discussed herein such as an active pixel or other camera can be arranged in various locations in the vehicle including in a headliner, roof, ceiling, rear view mirror assembly, an A-pillar, a B-pillar and a C-pillar or a side wall or even a door in the case of a cargo container or truck trailer. Images of the front seat area or the rear seat area can be obtained by proper placement and orientation of the transducers such as cameras. The rear view mirror assembly can be a good location for a camera, particularly if it is attached to the portion of the mirror support that does not move when the occupant is adjusting the mirror. Cameras at this location can get a good view of the driver, passenger as well as the environment surrounding the vehicle and particularly in the front of the vehicle. It is an ideal location for automatic dimming headlight cameras.

4. Weight Measurement and Biometrics

One way to determine motion of the occupant(s) is to monitor the weight distribution of the occupant whereby changes in weight distribution after an accident would be highly suggestive of movement of the occupant. A system for determining the weight distribution of the occupants can be integrated or otherwise arranged in the seats 3 and 4 of the vehicle and several patents and publications describe such systems.

More generally, any sensor that determines the presence and health state of an occupant can also be integrated into the vehicle interior monitoring system in accordance with the inventions herein. For example, a sensitive motion sensor can determine whether an occupant is breathing and a chemical sensor, such as accomplished using SAW technology, can determine the amount of carbon dioxide, or the concentration of carbon dioxide, in the air in the vehicle, which can be correlated to the health state of the occupant(s). The motion sensor and chemical sensor can be designed to have a fixed operational field situated near the occupant. In the alternative, the motion sensor and chemical sensor can be adjustable and adapted to adjust their operational field in conjunction with a determination by an occupant position and location sensor that would determine the location of specific parts of the occupant's body such as his or her chest or mouth. Furthermore, an occupant position and location sensor can be used to determine the location of the occupant's eyes and determine whether the occupant is conscious, that is, whether his or her eyes are open or closed or moving.

Chemical sensors can also be used to detect whether there is blood present in the vehicle such as after an accident. Additionally, microphones can detect whether there is noise in the vehicle caused by groaning, yelling, etc., and transmit any such noise through the cellular or similar connection to a remote listening facility using a telematics communication system such as operated by OnStar™.

FIG. 2A shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention including a system for determining the presence and health state of any occupants of the vehicle and a telecommunications link. This embodiment includes means 150 for determining the presence of any occupants 151, which may take the form of a heartbeat sensor, chemical sensor or motion sensor as described above and means for determining the health state of any occupants 151. The latter means may be integrated into the means for determining the presence of any occupants using the same or different component. The presence determining means 150 may encompass a dedicated presence determination device associated with each seating location in the vehicle, or at least sufficient presence determination devices having the ability to determine the presence of an occupant at each seating location in the vehicle. Further, means for determining the location, and optionally velocity, of the occupants or one or more parts thereof 152 are provided and may be any conventional occupant position sensor or preferably, one of the occupant position sensors as described herein such as those utilizing waves such as electromagnetic radiation or fields such as capacitance sensors or as described in the current assignee's patents and patent applications referenced above as well as herein.

A processor 153 is coupled to the presence determining means 150, the health state determining means 151 and the location determining means 152. A communications unit 154 is coupled to the processor 153. The processor 153 and/or communications unit 154 can also be coupled to microphones 158 that can be distributed throughout the vehicle passenger compartment and include voice-processing circuitry to enable the occupant(s) to effect vocal control of the processor 153, communications unit 154 or any coupled component or oral communications via the communications unit 154. The processor 153 is also coupled to another vehicular system, component or subsystem 155 and can issue control commands to effect adjustment of the operating conditions of the system, component or subsystem. Such a system, component or subsystem can be the heating or air-conditioning system, the entertainment system, an occupant restraint device such as an airbag, a glare prevention system, etc. Also, a positioning system 156, such as a GPS or differential GPS system, could be coupled to the processor 153 and provides an indication of the absolute position of the vehicle.

Pressure or weight sensors 7, 76 and 97 are also included in the system shown in FIGS. 6 and 6A. Although strain gage-type sensors are schematically illustrated mounted to the supporting structure of the seat portion 4, and a bladder pressure sensor mounted in the seat portion 4, any other type of pressure or weight sensor can be used including mat or butt spring sensors. Strain gage sensors are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701 as well as herein. Weight can be used to confirm the occupancy of the seat, i.e., the presence or absence of an occupant as well as whether the seat is occupied by a light or heavy object. In the latter case, a measured weight of less than 60 pounds is often determinative of the presence of a child seat whereas a measured weight of greater than 60 pounds is often indicative of the absence of a child seat. The weight sensors 7 can also be used to determine the weight distribution of the occupant of the seat and thereby ascertain whether the occupant is moving and the position of the occupant. As such, the weight sensors 7 could be used to confirm the position and motion of the occupant. The measured pressure or weight or distribution thereof can also be used in combination with the data from the transmitter/receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51, 52 and 54 of FIG. 8C to provide an identification of the occupants in the seat.

As discussed below, weight can be measured both statically and dynamically. Static weight measurements require that the pressure or strain gage system be accurately calibrated and care must be taken to compensate for the effects of seatbelt load, aging, unwanted stresses in the mounting structures, temperature etc. Dynamic measurements, on the other hand, can be used to measure the mass of an object on the seat, the presence of a seatbelt load and can be made insensitive to unwanted static stresses in the supporting members and to aging of the seat and its structure. In the simplest implementation, the natural frequency of seat is determined due to the random vibrations or accelerations that are input to the seat from the vehicle suspension system. In more sophisticated embodiments, an accelerometer and/or seatbelt tension sensor is also used to more accurately determine the forces acting on the occupant. In another embodiment, a vibrator can be used in conjunction with the seat to excite the seat occupying item either on a total basis or on a local basis using PVDF film as an exciter and a determination of the contact pattern of the occupant with the seat determined by the local response to the PVDF film. This latter method using the PVDF film or equivalent is closer to a pattern determination rather than a true weight measurement.

Although many weight sensing systems are described herein, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is, among other things, directed to the use of weight in any manner to determine the occupancy of a vehicle. Prior art mat sensors determined the occupancy through the butt print of the occupying item rather than actually measuring its weight. In an even more general sense, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is the use of any biometric measurement to determine vehicle occupancy.

As to the latter issue, when an occupant or object is strapped into the seat using a seatbelt, it can cause an artificial load on a bladder-type weight sensor and/or strain gage-type weight sensors when the seatbelt anchorage points are not on the seat. The effects of seatbelt load can be separated from the effects of object or occupant weight, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701, if the time-varying signals are considered rather than merely using averaging to obtain the static load. If a vehicle-mounted vertical accelerometer is present, then the forcing function on the seat caused by road roughness, steering maneuvers, and the vehicle suspension system can be compared with the response of the seat as measured by the bladder or strain gage pressure or weight sensors. Through mathematical analysis, the magnitude of the bladder pressure or strain caused by seat belt loads can be separated from pressure and strain caused by occupant or object mass. Also, since animated objects such as people cannot sit still indefinitely, such occupants can be distinguished from inanimate objects by similarly observing the change in pressure and strain distribution over time.

A serious problem that has plagued researchers attempting to adapt strain gage technology to seat weight sensing arises from fact that a typical automobile seat is an over-determined structure containing indeterminate stresses and strains in the supporting structure. This arises from a variety of causes such as the connection between the seat structure and the slide mechanisms below the seat or between the slide mechanisms and the floor which induces twisting and bending moments in the seat structural members. Similarly, since most seats have four attachment points and since only three points are necessary to determine a plane, there can be an unexpected distribution of compression and tensile stresses in the support structure. To complicate the situation, these indeterminable stresses and strains can vary as a function of seat position and temperature. The combination of all of these effects produces a significant error in the calculation of the weight of an occupying item and the distribution of this weight.

This problem can be solved by looking at changes in pressure and strain readings in addition to the absolute values. The dynamic response of an occupied seat is a function of the mass of the occupying item. As the car travels down the road, a forcing function is provided to the seat which can be measured by the vertical acceleration component and other acceleration components. This provides a method of measuring the response of the seat as well as the forcing function and thereby determining the mass of occupying item.

For example, when an occupant first enters the vehicle and sits on a seat, the change in pressure and/or strain measurements will provide an accurate measurement of the occupant's weight. This accuracy deteriorates as soon as the occupant attaches a seatbelt and/or moves the seat to a new position. Nevertheless, the change in occupancy of the seat is a significant event that can be easily detected and if the change in pressure and strain measurements are used as the measurement of the occupant weight, then the weight can be accurately determined. Similarly, the sequence of events for attaching a child seat to a vehicle is one that can be easily discerned since the seat is first placed into the vehicle and the seat belt cinched followed by placing the child in the seat or, alternately, the child and seat are placed in the vehicle followed by a cinching of the seatbelt. Either of these event sequences gives a high probability of the occupancy being a child in a child seat. This decision can be confirmed by dynamical measurements as described above.

A control system for controlling a component of the vehicle based on occupancy of the seat in accordance with the invention may comprise a plurality of strain gages, or bladder chambers, mounted in connection with the seat, each measuring strain or pressure of a respective location caused by occupancy of the seat, and a processor coupled to the strain or pressure gages and arranged to determine the weight of an occupying item based on the strain or pressure measurements from the strain or pressure gages over a period of time, i.e., dynamic measurements. The processor controls the vehicle component based at least in part on the determined weight of the occupying item of the seat. The processor can also determine motion of the occupying item of the seat based on the strain or pressure measurements from the strain or pressure gages over the period of time. One or more accelerometers may be mounted on the vehicle for measuring acceleration in which case, the processor may control the component based at least in part on the determined weight of the occupying item of the seat and the acceleration measured by the accelerometer(s). (See the discussion below in reference to FIG. 17.)

By comparing the output of various sensors in the vehicle, it is possible to determine activities that are affecting parts of the vehicle while not affecting other parts. For example, by monitoring the vertical accelerations of various parts of the vehicle and comparing these accelerations with the output of strain gage load cells placed on the seat support structure, or bladder sensors, a characterization can be made of the occupancy of the seat. Not only can the weight of an object occupying the seat be determined, but also the gross motion of such an object can be ascertained and thereby an assessment can be made as to whether the object is a life form such as a human being and whether the seatbelt is engaged. Strain gage weight sensors are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701. In particular, the inventors contemplate the combination of all of the ideas expressed in the '701 patent with those expressed in the current invention.

Thus, the combination of the outputs from these accelerometer sensors and the output of strain gage or bladder weight sensors in a vehicle seat, or in or on a support structure of the seat, can be used to make an accurate assessment of the occupancy of the seat and differentiate between animate and inanimate occupants as well as determining where in the seat the occupants are sitting and whether the seatbelt is engaged. This can be done by observing the acceleration signals from the sensors of FIG. 17 and simultaneously the dynamic strain gage measurements from seat-mounted strain or pressure gages or pressure measurements of bladder weight sensors. The accelerometers provide the input function to the seat and the strain gages measure the reaction of the occupying item to the vehicle acceleration and thereby provide a method of determining dynamically the mass of the occupying item and its location. This is particularly important during occupant position sensing during a crash event. By combining the outputs of the accelerometers and the strain gages and appropriately processing the same, the mass and weight of an object occupying the seat can be determined as well as the gross motion of such an object so that an assessment can be made as to whether the object is a life form such as a human being and whether a seatbelt is used and if so how tightly it is cinched.

Both strain gage and bladder weight sensors will be considered in detail below. There are of course several ways to process the acceleration signal and the stain or pressure signal or any other weight measuring apparatus. In general, the dynamic load applied to the seat is measured or a forcing function of the seat is measured, as a function of the acceleration signal. This represents the effect of the movement of the vehicle on the occupant which is reflected in the measurement of weight by the strain or pressure gages. Thus, the measurement obtained by the strain or pressure gages can be considered to have two components, one component resulting from the weight applied by the occupant in a stationary state of the vehicle and the other arising or resulting from the movement of the vehicle. The vehicle-movement component can be separated from the total strain or pressure gage measurement to provide a more accurate indication of the weight of the occupant.

To provide a feeling for the implementation of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, consider the following approximate analysis.

To begin with, the seatbelt can be represented as a one-way spring in that the force is high for upward motion and low for downward motion. This however introduces non-linearity into the analysis making an exact solution difficult. Therefore for the purposes of this simplified analysis, an assumption is made that the force from the seatbelt is the same in both directions. Although the stiffness of the seat will vary significantly from vehicle to vehicle, assume here that it is about 30 kg per cm. Also assume that the input from the road is 1 Hz with a magnitude of 10 cm for the vertical motion of the vehicle wheels (axle) on the road. The motion of the seat will be much less due to the vehicle suspension system.

The problem is to find is the weight of an occupant from the response of the seat (as measured by strain or pressure gages) to the road displacement acting through the vehicle suspension. The intent here is only to show that it is possible to determine the weight of the occupant and the use of a seatbelt by measuring the dynamic strain or pressure due to the seat motion as a function of the weight of the occupant and the seatbelt force. The functions and equations used below and the solution to them can be implemented in a processor.

Looking now at FIG. 6B, suppose that point A (the point where a seatbelt is fixed to the seat) and point B are subjected to harmonic displacements u(t)=U₀ cos ωt caused by a car's vertical movements on the road. As a result, springs modeling a seat and a seatbelt (their corresponding stiffness are k_(s) and k_(sb)) affect a passenger mass m with forces −k_(ab)(u−x) and k_(s)(u−x). (Minus in the first force is taken because the seatbelt spring contracts when the seat spring stretches and vice versa). Under the action forces, the mass gets accelerated d²x/dt², so the initial equation to be solved will be $\begin{matrix} {{m\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}}} = {{- {k_{sb}\left( {u - x} \right)}} + {{k_{s}\left( {u - x} \right)}.}}} & (1) \end{matrix}$

This equation can be rewritten in the form $\begin{matrix} {{{m\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}}} + {\left( {k_{s} - k_{sb}} \right)x}} = {{u(t)}{\left( {k_{s} - k_{sb}} \right).{or}}}} & (2) \\ {{{m\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}}} + {\left( {k_{s} - k_{sb}} \right)x}} = {{U_{0}\left( {k_{s} - k_{sb}} \right)}\cos\quad\omega\quad t}} & (3) \end{matrix}$

This is a differential equation of a harmonic oscillator under action of a harmonic external force f(t)=U₀(t)(k_(s)−k_(sb))cos ωt. If there is no seatbelt (k_(sb)=0), the solution of this equation in the case of a harmonic external force f(t)=F₀ cos ωt is well known [Strelkov S. P. Introduction in the theory of oscillations, Moscow, “Nauka”, 1964, p. 56]: $\begin{matrix} {{{x(t)} = {{\frac{U_{0}}{\left( {1 - \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}} \right)}\cos\quad\omega\quad t} + {C_{1}\cos\quad\omega_{0}t} + {C_{2}\sin\quad\omega_{0}t}}},} & (4) \end{matrix}$

where the oscillator natural frequency. $\begin{matrix} {\omega_{0}{\sqrt{\frac{k_{s}}{m}}.}} & (5) \end{matrix}$

The second and third terms in equation (4) describe natural oscillations of the oscillator, which decay if there is any, even very small, friction in the system. Having assumed such small friction to be present, for steady forced oscillation, the equation is thus: $\begin{matrix} {{x(t)} = {\frac{U_{0}}{1 - \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}}\cos\quad\omega\quad{t.}}} & (6) \end{matrix}$

Thus, in steady mode the system oscillates with the external force frequency ω. Now, it is possible to calculate acceleration of the mass: $\begin{matrix} {{\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}} = {{- \frac{\omega^{2}U_{0}}{1 - \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}}}\cos\quad\omega\quad t}},} & (7) \end{matrix}$

and the amplitude of the force acting in the system $\begin{matrix} {F_{m} = {{{m\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}}}} = {{{- \frac{m\quad\omega^{2}U_{0}}{1 - \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}}}}.}}} & (8) \end{matrix}$

In the situation where a seatbelt is present, it is not possible to use the same formulae because the seatbelt stiffness is always greater than stiffness of a seat, and (k_(s)−k_(sb))<0. Therefore, instead of equation (3) we should consider the equation $\begin{matrix} {{{\frac{\mathbb{d}^{2}x}{\mathbb{d}t^{2}} - {\omega_{0}^{2}x}} = {{- \omega_{0}^{2}}U_{0}\cos\quad\omega\quad t}},} & (9) \end{matrix}$

where ω₀ ²=|k_(s)−k_(sb)|/m>0. Following the same procedure (Strelkov S. P. ibid.), one can find a particular solution of inhomogeneous equation (9): $\begin{matrix} {{x(t)} = {\frac{U_{0}}{1 + \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega^{2}}}\cos\quad\omega\quad{t.}}} & (10) \end{matrix}$

Then its general solution will be [as per Korn G. A., Korn T. M. Mathematical handbook for scientists and engineers. Russian translation: Moscow, “Nauka”, 1970, pp. 268-270]: $\begin{matrix} {{x(t)} = {{\frac{U_{0}}{\left( {1 + \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}} \right)}\cos\quad\omega\quad t} + {C_{1}\quad\cos\quad\omega_{0}t} + {C_{2}\quad\sin\quad\omega_{0}{t.}}}} & (11) \end{matrix}$

Thus, in a steady mode, the amplitude of the acting force is: $\begin{matrix} {{F_{m} = {{- \frac{m\quad\omega^{2}U_{0}}{1 + \frac{\omega^{2}}{\omega_{0}^{2}}}}}},} & (12) \end{matrix}$

and the natural frequency of the system is: $\begin{matrix} {\omega_{0} = {\sqrt{\frac{{k_{s} - k_{sb}}}{m}}.}} & (13) \end{matrix}$

Using the formulae (5), (8) (the “no seatbelt case”), (12) and (13) (the “seatbelt present case”), a table can be created as shown below. In the table, p_(m) denotes amplitude of pressure acting on the seat surface. The initial data used in calculations are as follows:

k_(s)=30 Kg/cm=3×10⁴ N/m (the seat stiffness);

k_(sb)=600 N/0.3 cm=2×10⁵ N/m (the seatbelt stiffness);

U₀=0.1 m (the acting displacement amplitude);

f=1 Hz (the acting frequency).

S=0.05 m² (the seat surface square that the passenger acting upon).

Naturally, where the frequency f=ω/2π, f₀ is natural frequency of the system. Columns “No seatbelt” is calculated when k_(sb)=0. The passenger No seatbelt There is a seatbelt mass, kg f₀, Hz F_(m), N p_(m), Pa f₀, Hz F_(m), N p_(m), Pa 20 6.2 81.1 1.62 × 10³ 14.7 78.6 1.57 × 10³ 40 4.4 166.7 3.33 × 10³ 10.4 156.5 3.13 × 10³ 60 3.6 257.2 5.14 × 10³ 8.5 233.6 4.67 × 10³ 100 2.8 454.6 9.09 × 10³ 6.6 385.8 7.72 × 10³

From the above table, it can be seen that there is a different combination of seat structure force (as can be measured by strain gages), or pressure (as can be measured by a bladder and pressure sensor) and natural frequency for each combination of occupant weight and seatbelt use. Indeed, it can easily be seen that use of a seatbelt significantly affects the weight measurement of the weight sensors. By using the acceleration data, e.g., a forcing function, it is possible to eliminate the effect of the seatbelt and the road on the weight measurement. Thus, by observing the response of the seat plus occupant and knowing the input from the road, an estimate of the occupant weight and seatbelt use can be made without even knowing the static forces or pressures in the strain or pressure gages. By considering the dynamic response of the seat to road-induced input vibrations, the occupant weight and seatbelt use can be determined.

In an actual implementation, the above problem can be solved more accurately by using a pattern recognition system that compares the pattern of the seat plus occupant response (pressure or strain gage readings) to the pattern of input accelerations. This can be done through the training of a neural network, modular neural network or other trainable pattern recognition system. Many other mathematical techniques can be used to solve this problem including various simulation methods where the coefficients of dynamical equations are estimated from the response of the seat and occupant to the input acceleration. Thus, although the preferred implementation of the present invention is to use neural networks to solve this problem, the invention is not limited thereby.

4.1 Strain Gage Weight Sensors

Referring now to FIG. 18A, which is a view of the apparatus of FIG. 18 taken along line 18A-18A, seat 160 is constructed from a cushion or foam layer 161 which is supported by a spring system 162 which is in contact and/or association with the displacement sensor 163. As shown, displacement sensor 163 is underneath the spring system 162 but this relative positioning is not a required feature of the invention. The displacement sensor 163 comprises an elongate cable 164 retained at one end by support 165 and a displacement sensor 166 situated at an opposite end. This displacement sensor 166 can be any of a variety of such devices including, but not limited to, a linear rheostat, a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT), a linear variable capacitor, or any other length measuring device. Alternately, as shown in FIG. 18C, the cable can be replaced with one or more springs 167 retained between supports 165 and the tension in the spring(s) 167 measured using a strain gage (conventional wire, foil, silicon or a SAW strain gage) or other force measuring device 168 or the strain in the seat support structure can be measured by appropriately placing strain gages on one or more of the seat supports as described in more detail below. The strain gage or other force measuring device could be arranged in association with the spring system 162 and could measure the deflection of the bottom surface of the cushion or foam layer 161.

When a SAW strain gage 168 is used as part of weight sensor 163, an interrogator 169 could be placed on the vehicle to enable wireless communication and/or power transfer to the SAW strain gage 168. As such, when it is desired to obtain the force being applied by the occupying item on the seat, the interrogator 169 sends a radio signal to the SAW strain gage causing it to transmit a return signal with the measured strain of the spring 170. Interrogator 169 is coupled to the processor used to determine the control of the vehicle component.

As shown in FIG. 18D, one or more SAW strain gages 171 could also be placed on the bottom surface or support pan 178 of the cushion or foam layer 161 in order to measure the deflection of the bottom surface which is representative of the weight of the occupying item on the seat or the pressure applied by the occupying item to the seat. An interrogator 169 could also be used in this embodiment.

One seat design is illustrated in FIG. 18. Similar weight measurement systems can be designed for other seat designs. Also, some products are available which can approximately measure weight based on pressure measurements made at or near the upper seat surface 172. It should be noted that the weight measured here will not be the entire weight of the occupant since some of the occupant's weight will be supported by his or her feet which are resting on the floor or pedals. As noted above, the weight may also be measured by the weight sensor(s) 7, 76 and 97 described above in the seated-state detecting unit.

As weight is placed on (pressure applied to) the seat surface 172, it is supported by spring system 162 which deflects downward causing cable 164 of the sensor 163 to begin to stretch axially. Using a LVDT as an example of length measuring device 166, the cable 164 pulls on rod 173 tending to remove rod 173 from cylinder 174 (FIG. 18B). The movement of rod 173 out of cylinder 174 is resisted by a spring 175 which returns the rod 173 into the cylinder 174 when the weight is removed from the seat surface 172. The amount which the rod 173 is removed from the cylinder 174 is measured by the amount of coupling between the windings 176 and 177 of the transformer as is well understood by those skilled in the art. LVDT's are commercially available devices. In this matter, the deflection of the seat can be measured which is a measurement of the weight on the seat, i.e., the pressure applied by an occupying item to the seat surface. The exact relationship between weight and LVDT output is generally determined experimentally for this application.

SAW strain gages could also be used to determine the downward deflection of the spring system 162 and the deflection of the cable 164.

By use of a combination of weight and height, the driver of the vehicle can in general be positively identified among the class of drivers who operate the vehicle. Thus, when a particular driver first uses the vehicle, the seat will be automatically adjusted to the proper position. If the driver changes that position within a prescribed time period, the new seat position can be stored in the second table for the particular driver's height and weight. When the driver reenters the vehicle and his or her height and weight are again measured, the seat will go to the location specified in the second table if one exists. Otherwise, the location specified in the first table will be used. Naturally other methods having similar end results can be used.

In a first embodiment of a weight measuring apparatus shown in FIG. 19, four strain gage weight sensors or transducers are used, two being illustrated at 180 and 181 on one side of a bracket of the support structure of the seat and the other two being at the same locations on another bracket of the support (i.e., hidden on the corresponding locations on the other side of the support). The support structure of the seat supports the seat on a substrate such as a floor pan of the vehicle. Each of the strain gage transducers 180,181 also can contain electronic signal conditioning apparatus, e.g., amplifiers, analog to digital converters, filters etc., which is associated such that output from the transducers is a digital signal. Such signal conditioning apparatus can also eliminate residual stresses in the transducer readings that may be present from the manufacturing, assembly or mounting processes or due to seat motion or temperature. The electronic signal travels from transducer 180 to transducer 181 through a wire 184. Similarly, wire 185 transmits the output from transducers 180 and 181 to the next transducer in the sequence (one of the hidden transducers). Additionally, wire 186 carries the output from these three transducers toward the fourth transducer (the other hidden transducer) and wire 187 finally carries all four digital signals to an electronic control system or module 188. These signals from the transducers 180, 181 are time, code or frequency division multiplexed as is well known in the art. The seat position is controlled by motors 189 as described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,179,576. Finally, the seat is bolted onto the support structure through bolts not shown which attach the seat through holes 190 in the brackets.

By placing the signal conditioning electronics, analog to digital converters, and other appropriate electronic circuitry adjacent the strain gage element, the four transducers can be daisy chained or otherwise attach together and only a single wire is required to connect all of the transducers to the control module 188 as well as provide the power to run the transducers and their associated electronics.

The control system 188, e.g., a microprocessor, is arranged to receive the digital signals from the transducers 180,181 and determine the weight of the occupying item of the seat based thereon. In other words, the signals from the transducers 180,181 are processed by the control system 188 to provide an indication of the weight of the occupying item of the seat, i.e., the pressure or force exerted by the occupying item on the seat support structure.

A typical manually controlled seat structure is illustrated in FIG. 20 and described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 4,285,545. The seat 191 (only the frame of which is shown) is attached to a pair of slide mechanisms 192 in the rear thereof through support members such as rectangular tubular structures 193 angled between the seat 191 and the slide mechanisms 192. The front of the seat 191 is attached to the vehicle (more particularly to the floor pan) through another support member such as a slide member 194, which is engaged with a housing 195. Slide mechanisms 192, support members 193, slide member 194 and housing 195 constitute the support structure for mounting the seat on a substrate, i.e., the floor pan. Strain gage transducers are located for this implementation at 180 and 182, strain gage transducer 180 being mounted on each tubular structure 193 (only one of such strain gage is shown) and strain gage transducer 182 being mounted on slide member 194.

When an occupying item is situated on the seat cushion (not shown), each of the support members 193 and 194 are deformed or strained. This strain is measured by transducers 180 and 182, respectively, to enable a determination of the weight of the item occupying the seat, as can be understood by those skilled in the strain gage art. More specifically, a control system or module or other compatible processing unit (not shown) is coupled to the strain gage transducers 180, 182, e.g., via electrical wires (not shown), to receive the measured strain and utilize the measured strain to determine the weight of the occupying item of the seat or the pressure applied by the occupying item to the seat. The determined weight, or the raw measured strain, may be used to control a vehicular component such as the airbag.

Support members 193 are substantially vertically oriented and are preferably made of a sufficiently rigid, non-bending component.

FIG. 20A illustrates an alternate arrangement for the seat support structures wherein a gusset 196 has been added to bridge the angle on the support member 193. Strain gage transducer 180 is placed on this gusset 196. Since the gusset 196 is not a supporting member, it can be made considerably thinner than the seat support member 193. As the seat is loaded by an occupying item, the seat support member 193 will bend. Since the gusset 196 is relatively weak, greater strain will occur in the gusset 196 than in the support member 193. The existence of this greater strain permits more efficient use of the strain gage dynamic range thus improving the accuracy of the weight measurement.

FIG. 20B illustrates a seat transverse support member 197 of the seat shown in FIG. 20, which is situated below the base cushion and extends between opposed lateral sides of the seat. This support member 197 will be directly loaded by the vehicle seat and thus will provide an average measurement of the force exerted or weight of the occupying item. The deflection or strain in support member 197 is measured by a strain gage transducer 180 mounted on the support member 197 for this purpose. In some applications, the support member 197 will occupy the entire space fore and aft below the seat cushion. Here it is shown as a relatively narrow member. The strain gage transducer 180 is coupled, e.g., via an electrical wire (not shown), to a control module or other processing unit (not shown) which utilizes the measured strain to determine the weight of the occupying item of the seat.

In FIG. 20, the support members 193 are shown as rectangular tubes having an end connected to the seat 191 and an opposite end connected to the slide mechanisms 192. In the constructions shown in FIGS. 21A-21C, the rectangular tubular structure has been replaced by a circular tube where only the lower portion of the support is illustrated. FIGS. 21A-21C show three alternate ways of improving the accuracy of the strain gage system, i.e., the accuracy of the measurements of strain by the strain gage transducers. Generally, a reduction in the stiffness of the support member to which the strain gage transducer is mounted will concentrate the force and thereby improve the strain measurement. There are several means disclosed below to reduce the stiffness of the support member. These means are not exclusive and other ways to reduce the stiffness of the support member are included in the invention and the interpretation of the claims.

In each illustrated embodiment, the transducer is represented by 180 and the substantially vertically oriented support member corresponding to support member 193 in FIG. 20 has been labeled 193A. In FIG. 21A, the tube support member 193A has been cut to thereby form two separate tubes having longitudinally opposed ends and an additional tube section 198 is connected, e.g., by welding, to end portions of the two tubes. In this manner, a more accurate tube section 198 can be used to permit a more accurate measurement of the strain by transducer 180, which is mounted on tube section 198.

In FIG. 21B, a small circumferential cut has been made in tube support member 193A so that a region having a smaller circumference than a remaining portion of the tube support member 193A is formed. This cut is used to control the diameter of the tube support member 193A at the location where strain gage transducer 180 is measuring the strain. In other words, the strain gage transducer 180 is placed at a portion wherein the diameter thereof is less than the diameter of remaining portions of the tube support member 193A. The purpose of this cut is to correct for manufacturing variations in the diameter of the tube support member 193A. The magnitude of the cut is selected so as to not significantly weaken the structural member but instead to control the diameter tolerance on the tube so that the strain from one vehicle to another will be the same for a particular loading of the seat.

In FIG. 21C, a small hole 200 is made in the tube support member 193A adjacent the transducer 180 to compensate for manufacturing tolerances on the tube support member 193A.

From this discussion, it can be seen that all three techniques have as their primary purpose to increase the accuracy of the strain in the support member corresponding to weight on the vehicle seat. The preferred approach would be to control the manufacturing tolerances on the support structure tubing so that the variation from vehicle to vehicle is minimized. For some applications where accurate measurements of weight are desired, the seat structure will be designed to optimize the ability to measure the strain in the support members and thereby to optimize the measurement of the weight of the occupying item. The inventions disclosed herein, therefore, are intended to cover the entire seat when the design of the seat is such as to be optimized for the purpose of strain gage weight sensing and alternately for the seat structure when it is so optimized.

Although strain measurement devices have been discussed above, pressure measurement systems can also be used in the seat support structure to measure the weight on the seat. Such a system is illustrated in FIG. 22. A general description of the operation of this apparatus is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,785,291. In that patent, the vehicle seat is attached to the slide mechanism by means of bolts 201. Between the seat and the slide mechanism, a shock-absorbing washer has been used for each bolt. In the present invention, this shock-absorbing washer has been replaced by a sandwich construction consisting of two washers of shock absorbing material 202 with a pressure sensitive material 203 sandwiched in between.

A variety of materials can be used for the pressure sensitive material 203, which generally work on either the capacitance or resistive change of the material as it is compressed. The wires from this material 203 leading to the electronic control system are not shown in this view. The pressure sensitive material 203 is coupled to the control system, e.g., a microprocessor, and provides the control system with an indication of the pressure applied by the seat on the slide mechanism which is related to the weight of the occupying item of the seat. Generally, material 203 is constructed with electrodes on the opposing faces such that as the material 202 is compressed, the spacing between the electrodes is decreased. This spacing change thereby changes both the resistive and the capacitance of the sandwich which can be measured and which is a function of the compressive force on the material 202. Measurement of the change in capacitance of the sandwich, i.e., two spaced apart conductive members, is obtained by any method known to those skilled in the art, e.g., connecting the electrodes in a circuit with a source of alternating or direct current. The conductive members may be made of a metal. The use of such a pressure sensor is not limited to the illustrated embodiment wherein the shock absorbing material 202 and pressure sensitive material 203 are placed around bolt 201. It is also not limited to the use or incorporation of shock absorbing material in the implementation.

FIG. 22A shows a substitute construction for the bolt 201 in FIG. 22 and which construction is preferably arranged in connection with the seat and the adjustment slide mechanism. A bolt-like member, hereinafter referred to as a stud 204, is threaded 205 on both ends with a portion remaining unthreaded between the ends. A SAW strain measuring device including a SAW strain gage 206 and antenna 207 is arranged on the center unthreaded section of the stud 400 and the stud 400 is attached at its ends to the seat and the slide mechanism using appropriate threaded nuts. Based on the particular geometry of the SAW device used, the stud 400 can result in as little as a 3 mm upward displacement of the seat compared to a normal bolt mounting system. No wires are required to attach the SAW device to the stud 204. The total length of stud 204 may be as little as 1 inch. Antennas larger than one inch may be required depending on the frequency and antenna technology used and other considerations.

In operation, an interrogator 208 transmits a radio frequency pulse at for example, 925 MHz, which excites the antenna 207 associated with the SAW strain gage 206. After a delay caused by the time required for the wave to travel the length of the SAW device, a modified wave is re-transmitted to the interrogator 208 providing an indication of the strain and thus a representative value of the weight of an object occupying the seat. For a seat which is normally bolted to the slide mechanism with four bolts, at least four SAW strain measuring devices or sensors would be used. Each conventional bolt could thus be replaced by a stud as described above. Since the individual SAW devices are very small, multiple such SAW devices can be placed on the stud to provide multiple redundant measurements or to permit the stud to be arbitrarily located with at least one SAW device always within direct view of the interrogator antenna. Note that if quarter wave dipole antennas are used, they may be larger than the strain gage and may in that case need to be mounted to the seat bottom, for example, or some other convenient place. This, however, will also make it easier to align the antennas with the interrogator antenna.

To avoid potential problems with electromagnetic interference, the stud 204 may be made of a non-metallic, possibly composite, material which would not likely cause or contribute to any possible electromagnetic wave interference. The stud 204 could also be modified for use as an antenna.

If the seat is unoccupied, then the interrogation frequency can be substantially reduced in comparison to when the seat is occupied. For an occupied seat, information as to the identity and/or category and position of an occupying item of the seat can be obtained through the use of multiple weight sensors. For this reason, and due to the fact that during pre-crash event the position of an occupying item of the seat may be changing rapidly, interrogations as frequently as once every 10 milliseconds or even faster can be desirable. This would also enable a distribution of the weight being applied to the seat being obtained which provides an estimation of the position of the object occupying the seat. Using pattern recognition technology, e.g., a trained neural network, sensor fusion, fuzzy logic, etc., the identification of the object can be ascertained based on the determined weight and/or determined weight distribution.

Although each of the SAW devices can be interrogated and/or powered using wireless means, in some cases, it may be desirable to supply power to and or obtained information from such devices using wires. Also, strain gage coupled to circuits employing RFID type technology (no on-board power) can also result in a wireless interrogation system. Additionally, energy harvesting techniques can be used to generate the power required. Conventional strain gages can also be used.

In FIG. 23, which is a view of a seat attachment structure described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,531,503, a more conventional strain gage load cell design designated 209 is utilized. One such load cell design 209 is illustrated in detail in FIG. 23A.

A cantilevered beam load cell design using a half bridge strain gage system 209 is shown in FIG. 23A. Fixed resistors mounted within the electronic package, which are not shown in this drawing, provide the remainder of the whetstone bridge system. The half bridge system is frequently used for economic reasons and where some sacrifice in accuracy is permissible. The load cell 209 includes a member 211 on which the strain gage 210 is situated. The strain gage assembly 209 includes strain-measuring elements 212 and 213 arranged on the load cell. The longitudinal element 212 measures the tensile strain in the beam when it is loaded by the seat and its contents, not shown, which is attached to end 215 of bolt 214. The load cell is mounted to the vehicle or other substrate using bolt 217. Temperature compensation is achieved in this system since the resistance change in strain elements 212 and 213 will vary the same amount with temperature and thus the voltage across the portions of the half bridge will remain the same. The strain gage 209 is coupled to a control system (e.g., a microprocessor—not shown) via wires 216 and receives the measured tensile strain and determines the weight of an occupying item of the seat based thereon.

One problem with using a cantilevered load cell is that it imparts a torque to the member on which it is mounted. One preferred mounting member on an automobile is the floor-pan which will support significant vertical loads but is poor at resisting torques since floor-pans are typically about 1 mm (0.04 inches) thick. This problem can be overcome through the use of a simply supported load cell design designated 220 as shown in FIG. 23B.

In FIGS. 23B and 23C, a full bridge strain gage system 221 is used with all four elements 222, 223 mounted on the top of a beam 240. Elements 222 are mounted parallel to the beam 240 and elements 223 are mounted perpendicular to it. Since the maximum strain is in the middle of the beam 240, strain gage 221 is mounted close to that location. The load cell, shown generally as 220, is supported by the floor pan, not shown, at supports 234 that are formed by bending the beam 240 downward at its ends. Fasteners 228 fit through holes 229 in the beam 240 and serve to hold the load cell 220 to the floor pan without putting significant forces on the load cell 220. Holes are provided in the floor-pan for a bolt 231 and for fasteners 228. Bolt 231 is attached to the load cell 220 through hole 230 of the beam 240 which serves to transfer the force from the seat to the load cell 220 Although this design would place the load cell 220 between the slide mechanism and the floor, in many applications it would be placed between the seat and the slide mechanism. In the first case, the evaluation algorithm may also require a seat position input if the weight distribution is to be determined.

The electronics package can be potted within hole 235 using urethane potting compound 232 and can include signal conditioning circuits, a microprocessor with integral ADCs 226 and a flex circuit 225 (FIG. 23C). The flex circuit 225 terminates at an electrical connector 233 for connection to other vehicle electronics, e.g., a control system. The beam 240 is slightly tapered at location 227 so that the strain is constant in the strain gage.

Although thus far only beam-type load cells have been described, other geometries can also be used. One such geometry is a tubular type load cell. Such a tubular load cell is shown generally at 241 in FIG. 23D and instead of an elongate beam, it includes a tube. It also comprises a plurality of strain sensing elements 242 for measuring tensile and compressive strains in the tube as well as other elements, not shown, which are placed perpendicular to the elements 242 to provide for temperature compensation. Temperature compensation is achieved in this manner, as is well known to those skilled in the art of the use of strain gages in conjunction with a whetstone bridge circuit, since temperature changes will affect each of the strain gage elements identically and the total effect thus cancels out in the circuit. The same bolt 243 can be used in this case for mounting the load cell to the floor-pan and for attaching the seat to the load cell.

Another alternate load cell design shown generally in FIG. 23E as 242 makes use of a torsion bar 243 and appropriately placed torsional strain sensing elements 244. A torque is imparted to the bar 243 by means of lever 245 and bolt 246 which attaches to the seat structure not shown. Bolts 247 attach the mounting blocks 248 at ends of the torsion bar 243 to the vehicle floor-pan.

The load cells illustrated above are all preferably of the foil strain gage-type. Other types of strain gages exist which would work equally well which include wire strain gages and strain gages made from silicon. Silicon strain gages have the advantage of having a much larger gage factor and the disadvantage of greater temperature effects. For the high-volume implementation of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, silicon strain gages have an advantage in that the electronic circuitry (signal conditioning, ADCs, etc.) can be integrated with the strain gage for a low cost package.

Other strain gage materials and load cell designs may, of course, be incorporated within the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. In particular, a surface acoustical wave (SAW) strain gage can be used in place of conventional wire, foil or silicon strain gages and the strain measured either wirelessly or by a wire connection. For SAW strain gages, the electronic signal conditioning can be associated directly with the gage or remotely in an electronic control module as desired. For SAW strain gages, the problems discussed above with low signal levels requiring bridge structures and the methods for temperature compensation may not apply. Generally, SAW strain gages are more accurate that other technologies but may require a separate sensor to measure the temperature for temperature compensation depending on the material used. Materials that can be considered for SAW strain gages are quartz, lithium niobate, lead zirconate, lead titanate, zinc oxide, polyvinylidene fluoride and other piezoelectric materials.

Many seat designs have four attachment points for the seat structure to attach to the vehicle. Since the plane of attachment is determined by three points, the potential exists for a significant uncertainty or error to be introduced. This problem can be compounded by the method of attachment of the seat to the vehicle. Some attachment methods using bolts, for example, can introduce significant strain in the seat supporting structure. Some compliance therefore should be introduced into the seat structure to reduce these attachment-induced stresses to a minimum. Too much compliance, on the other hand, can significantly weaken the seat structure and thereby potentially cause a safety issue. This problem can be solved by rendering the compliance section of the seat structure highly nonlinear or significantly limiting the range of the compliance. One of the support members, for example, can be attached to the top of the seat structure through the use of the pinned joint wherein the angular rotation of the joint is severely limited. Methods will now be obvious to those skilled in the art to eliminate the attachment-induced stress and strain in the structure which can cause inaccuracies in the strain measuring system.

In the examples illustrated above, strain measuring elements have been shown at each of the support members. This of course is necessary if an accurate measurement of the weight of the occupying item of the seat is to be determined. For this case, typically a single value is inputted into the neural network representing weight. Experiments have shown, however, for the four strain gage transducer system, that most of the weight and thus most of the strain occurs in the strain elements mounted on the rear seat support structural members. In fact, about 85 percent of the load is typically carried by the rear supports. Little accuracy is lost therefore if the forward strain measuring elements are eliminated. Similarly, for most cases, the two rear-mounted support strain elements measure approximately the same strain. Thus, the information represented by the strain in one rear seat support is sufficient to provide a reasonably accurate measurement of the weight of the occupying item of the seat. Thus, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein can be implemented using one or more load cells or strain gages. As disclosed elsewhere herein, other sensors, such as occupant position sensors based on spatial monitoring technologies, can be used in conjunction with one or more load cells or other pressure or weight sensors to augment and improve the accuracy of the system. A simple position sensor mounted in the seat back or headrest, for example, as illustrated at 354-365 in FIGS. 18, 24 and 25 can be used.

If a system consisting of eight transducers is considered, four ultrasonic transducers and four weight transducers, and if cost considerations require the choice of a smaller total number of transducers, it is a question of which of the eight transducers should be eliminated. Fortunately, the neural network technology provides a technique for determining which of the eight transducers is most important, which is next most important, etc. If the six most critical transducers are chosen, that is the six transducers which contain the most useful information as determined by the neural network, a neural network can be trained using data from those six transducers and the overall accuracy of the system can be determined. Experience has determined, for example, that typically there is almost no loss in accuracy by eliminating two of the eight transducers, that is two of the strain gage weight sensors. A slight loss of accuracy occurs when one of the ultrasonic transducers is then eliminated.

This same technique can be used with the additional transducers described above. A transducer space can be determined with perhaps twenty different transducers comprised of ultrasonic, optical, electromagnetic, motion, heartbeat, weight, seat track, seatbelt payout, seatback angle etc. transducers. The neural network can then be used in conjunction with a cost function to determine the cost of system accuracy. In this manner, the optimum combination of any system cost and accuracy level can be determined.

In many situations where the four strain measuring weight sensors are applied to the vehicle seat structure, the distribution of the weight among the four strain gage sensors, for example, will vary significantly depending on the position of the seat in the vehicle, and particularly the fore and aft location, and secondarily, the seatback angle position. A significant improvement to the accuracy of the strain gage weight sensors, particularly if less than four such sensors are used, can result by using information from a seat track position and/or a seatback angle sensor. In many vehicles, such sensors already exist and therefore the incorporation of this information results in little additional cost to the system and results in significant improvements in the accuracy of the weight sensors.

There have been attempts to use seat weight sensors to determine the load distribution of the occupying item and thereby reach a conclusion about the state of seat occupancy. For example, if a forward facing human is out of position, the weight distribution on the seat will be different than if the occupant is in position. Similarly, a rear facing child seat will have a different weight distribution than a forward facing child seat. This information is useful for determining the seated state of the occupying item under static or slowly changing conditions. For example, even when the vehicle is traveling on moderately rough roads, a long term averaging or filtering technique can be used to determine the total weight and weight distribution of the occupying item. Thus, this information can be useful in differentiating between a forward facing and rear facing child seat.

It is much less useful however for the case of a forward facing human or forward facing child seat that becomes out of position during a crash. Panic braking prior to a crash, particularly on a rough road surface, will cause dramatic fluctuations in the output of the strain sensing elements. Filtering algorithms, which require a significant time slice of data, will also not be particularly useful. A neural network or other pattern recognition system, however, can be trained to recognize such situations and provide useful information to improve system accuracy.

Other dynamical techniques can also provide useful information especially if combined with data from the vehicle crash accelerometer. By studying the average weight over a few cycles, as measured by each transducer independently, a determination can be made that the weight distribution is changing. Depending on the magnitude of the change, a determination can be made as to whether the occupant is being restrained by a seatbelt. If a seatbelt restraint is not being used, the output from the crash accelerometer can be used to accurately project the position of the occupant during pre-crash braking and eventually the impact itself providing his or her initial position is known.

In this manner, a weight sensor with provides weight distribution information can provide useful information to improve the accuracy of the occupant position sensing system for dynamic out of position determination. Even without the weight sensor information, the use of the vehicle crash sensor data in conjunction with any means of determining the belted state of the occupant will dramatically improve the dynamic determination of the position of a vehicle occupant. The use of the dynamics of the occupant to measure weight dynamically is disclosed in the current assignee's U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/174,803 filed Jun. 19, 2002.

Strain gage weight sensors can also be mounted in other locations such as within a cavity within a seat cushion as shown as 97 in FIG. 6A and described above. The strain gage can be mounted on a flexible diaphragm that flexes and thereby strains the strain gage as the seat is loaded. In the example of FIG. 6A, a single chamber 98, diaphragm and strain gage 97 is illustrated. A plurality of such chambers can be used to provide a distribution of the load on the occupying item onto the seat.

There are several applications for weight or load measuring devices in a vehicle including the vehicle suspension system and seat weight sensors for use with automobile safety systems. As reported in U.S. Pat. No. 4,096,740, U.S. Pat. No. 4,623,813, U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,571, U.S. Pat. No. 5,663,531, U.S. Pat. No. 5,821,425 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,910,647 and International Publication No. WO 00/65320(A1), SAW devices are appropriate candidates for such weight measurement systems. In this case, the surface acoustic wave on the lithium niobate, or other piezoelectric material, is modified in delay time, resonant frequency, amplitude and/or phase based on strain of the member upon which the SAW device is mounted. For example, the conventional bolt that is typically used to connect the passenger seat to the seat adjustment slide mechanism can be replaced with a stud which is threaded on both ends. A SAW strain device is mounted to the center unthreaded section of the stud and the stud is attached to both the seat and the slide mechanism using appropriate threaded nuts. Based on the particular geometry of the SAW device used, the stud can result in as little as a 3 mm upward displacement of the seat compared to a normal bolt mounting system. No wires are required to attach the SAW device to the stud. The interrogator transmits a radio frequency pulse at, for example, 925 MHz, that excites antenna on the SAW strain measuring system. After a delay caused by the time required for the wave to travel the length of the SAW device, a modified wave is re-transmitted to the interrogator providing an indication of the strain of the stud with the weight of an object occupying the seat corresponding to the strain. For a seat that is normally bolted to the slide mechanism with four bolts, at least four SAW strain sensors would be used. Since the individual SAW devices can be small, multiple devices can be placed on a stud to provide multiple redundant measurements, or permit bending strains to be determined, and/or to permit the stud to be arbitrarily located with at least one SAW device always within direct view of the interrogator antenna. In some cases, the bolt or stud will be made on non-conductive material to limit the blockage of the RF signal. In other cases, it will be insulated from the slide (mechanism) and used as an antenna.

If two longitudinally spaced apart antennas are used to receive the SAW transmissions from the seat weight sensors, one antenna in front of the seat and the other behind the seat, then the position of the seat can be determined eliminating the need for current seat position sensors. A similar system can be used for other seat and seatback position measurements.

For strain gage weight sensing, the frequency of interrogation would be considerably higher than that of the tire monitor, for example. However, if the seat is unoccupied, then the frequency of interrogation can be substantially reduced. For an occupied seat, information as to the identity and/or category and position of an occupying item of the seat can be obtained through the multiple weight sensors described. For this reason, and due to the fact that during the pre-crash event, the position of an occupying item of the seat may be changing rapidly, interrogations as frequently as once every 10 milliseconds or faster can be desirable. This would also enable a distribution of the weight being applied to the seat to be obtained which provides an estimation of the position of the object occupying the seat. Using pattern recognition technology, e.g., a trained neural network, sensor fusion, fuzzy logic, etc., the identification of the object can be ascertained based on the determined weight and/or determined weight distribution.

There are many other methods by which SAW devices can be used to determine the weight and/or weight distribution of an occupying item other than the methods described above and all such uses of SAW strain sensors for determining the weight and weight distribution of an occupant are contemplated. For example, SAW devices with appropriate straps can be used to measure the deflection of the seat cushion top or bottom caused by an occupying item, or if placed on the seat belts, the load on the belts can determined wirelessly and powerlessly. Geometries similar to those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,242,701 (which discloses multiple strain gage geometries) using SAW strain-measuring devices can also be constructed, e.g., any of the multiple strain gage geometries shown therein.

Although a preferred method for using the invention is to interrogate each of the SAW devices using wireless means, in some cases it may be desirable to supply power to and/or obtain information from one or more of the devices using wires. As such, the wires would be an optional feature.

One advantage of the weight sensors of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein along with the geometries disclosed in the '701 patent and herein below, is that in addition to the axial stress in the seat support, the bending moments in the structure can be readily determined. For example, if a seat is supported by four “legs”, it is possible to determine the state of stress, assuming that axial twisting can be ignored, using four strain gages on each leg support for a total of sixteen such gages. If the seat is supported by three legs, then this can be reduced to twelve. Naturally, a three-legged support is preferable than four since with four, the seat support is over-determined severely complicating the determination of the stress caused by an object on the seat. Even with three supports, stresses can be introduced depending on the nature of the support at the seat rails or other floor-mounted supporting structure. If simple supports are used that do not introduce bending moments into the structure, then the number of gages per seat can be reduced to three providing a good model of the seat structure is available. Unfortunately, this is usually not the case and most seats have four supports and the attachments to the vehicle not only introduce bending moments into the structure but these moments vary from one position to another and with temperature. The SAW strain gages of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein lend themselves to the placement of multiple gages onto each support as needed to approximately determine the state of stress and thus the weight of the occupant depending on the particular vehicle application. Furthermore, the wireless nature of these gages greatly simplifies the placement of such gages at those locations that are most appropriate.

One additional point should be mentioned. In many cases, the determination of the weight of an occupant from the static strain gage readings yields inaccurate results due to the indeterminate stress state in the support structure. However, the dynamic stresses to a first order are independent of the residual stress state. Thus, the change in stress that occurs as a vehicle travels down a roadway caused by dips in the roadway can provide an accurate measurement of the weight of an object in a seat. This is especially true if an accelerometer is used to measure the vertical excitation provided to the seat.

4.2 Bladder Weight Sensors

One embodiment of a weight sensor and method for determining the weight of an occupant of a seat, which may be used in the methods and apparatus for adjusting a vehicle component and identifying an occupant of a seat, comprises a bladder having at least one chamber adapted to be arranged in a seat portion of the seat, and at least one transducer for measuring the pressure in a respective chamber. The bladder may comprise a plurality of chambers, each adapted to be arranged at a different location in the seat portion of the seat. Thus, it is possible to determine the weight distribution of the occupant using this weight sensor with several transducers whereby each transducer is associated with one chamber and the weight distribution of the occupant is obtained from the pressure measurements of the transducers. The position of the occupant and the center of gravity of the occupant can also be determined by one skilled in the art based on the weight distribution.

With knowledge of the weight of an occupant, additional improvements can be made to automobile and truck seat designs. In particular, the stiffness of the seat can be adjusted so as to provide the same level of comfort for light and for heavy occupants. The damping of occupant motions, which previously has been largely neglected, can also be readily adjusted as shown on FIG. 25 which is a view of the seat of FIG. 24 showing one of several possible arrangements for changing the stiffness and the damping of the seat. In the seat bottom 250, there is a container 251, the conventional foam and spring design has been replaced by an inflated rectangular container very much like an air mattress which contains a cylindrical inner container 252 which is filled with an open cell urethane foam, for example, or other means which constrain the flow of air therein. An adjustable orifice 253 connects the two containers both of which can be bladders 251, 252 so that air, or other fluid, can flow in a controlled manner therebetween. The amount of opening of orifice 253 is controlled by control circuit 254. A small air compressor, or fluid pump, 255 controls the pressure in container 251 under control of the control circuit 254. A pressure transducer 256 monitors the pressure within container 251 and inputs this information into control circuit 254.

The operation of the system is as follows. When an occupant sits on the seat, pressure initially builds up in the seat container or bladder 251 which gives an accurate measurement of the weight of the occupant. Control circuit 254, using an algorithm and a microprocessor, then determines an appropriate stiffness for the seat and adds pressure to achieve that stiffness. The pressure equalizes between the two containers 251 and 252 through the flow of fluid through orifice 253. Control circuit 254 also determines an appropriate damping for the occupant and adjusts the orifice 253 to achieve that damping. As the vehicle travels down the road and the road roughness causes the seat to move up and down, the inertial force on the seat by the occupant causes the fluid pressure to rise and fall in container 252 and also, but, much less so, in container 251 since the occupant sits mainly above container 252 and container 251 is much larger than container 252. The major deflection in the seat takes place first in container 252 which pressurizes and transfers fluid to container 251 through orifice 253. The size of the orifice opening determines the flow rate between the two containers 251, 252 and therefore the damping of the motion of the occupant. Since this opening is controlled by control circuit 254, the amount of damping can thereby also be controlled. Thus, in this simple structure, both the stiffness and damping can be controlled to optimize the seat for a particular driver. Naturally, if the driver does not like the settings made by control circuit 254, he or she can change them to provide a stiffer or softer ride. When fluid is used above, it can mean a gas, liquid, gel or other flowable medium.

The stiffness of a seat is the change in force divided by the change in deflection. This is important for many reasons, one of which is that it controls the natural vibration frequency of the seat occupant combination. It is important that this be different from the frequency of vibrations which are transmitted to the seat from the vehicle in order to minimize the up and down motions of the occupant. The damping is a force which opposes the motion of the occupant and which is dependent on the velocity of relative motion between the occupant and the seat bottom. It thus removes energy and minimizes the oscillatory motion of the occupant. These factors are especially important in trucks where the vibratory motions of the driver's seat, and thus the driver, have caused many serious back injuries among truck drivers.

In FIG. 25, the airbag or bladder 241 which interacts with the occupant is shown with a single chamber. Naturally, bladder 241 can be composed of multiple chambers 241 a, 241 b, 241 c, and 241 d as shown in FIG. 25A. The use of multiple chambers permits the weight distribution of the occupant to be determined if a separate pressure transducer is used in each cell of the bladder, or if a single gage is switched from chamber to chamber. Such a scheme gives the opportunity of determining to some extent the position of the occupant on the seat or at least the position of the center of gravity of the occupant. Naturally, more than four chambers can be used.

Any one of a number of known pressure measuring sensors can be used with the bladder weight sensor disclosed herein. One particular technology that has been developed for measuring the pressure in a rotating tire uses surface acoustic wave (SAW) technology and has the advantage that the sensor is wireless and powerless. Thus, the sensor does not need a battery nor is it required to run wires from the sensor to control circuitry. An interrogator is provided that transmits an RF signal to the sensor and receives a return signal that contains the temperature and pressure of the fluid within the bladder. The interrogator can be the same one that is used for tire pressure monitoring thus making this SAW system very inexpensive to implement and easily expandable to several seats within the vehicle. The switches that control the seat can also now be made wireless using SAW technology and thus they can be placed at any convenient location such as the vehicle door-mounted armrest without requiring wires to connect the switch to the seat motors. Other uses of SAW technology are discussed in the current assignee's U.S. Pat. No. 6,662,642. Although a SAW device has been described above, an equivalent system can be constructed using RFID type technology where the interrogator transmits sufficient RF energy to power the RFID circuit. This generally requires that the interrogator antenna be closer to the device antenna than in the case of SAW devices but the interrogator circuitry is generally simpler and thus less expensive. Also energy harvesting can also be used to provide energy to run the RFID circuit or to boost the SAW circuit.

In the description above, the air is the preferred use as the fluid to fill the bladder 241. In some cases, especially where damping and natural frequency control is not needed, another fluid such as a liquid or jell could be used to fill the bladder 241. In addition to silicone, candidate liquids include ethylene glycol or other low freezing point liquids.

In an apparatus for adjusting the stiffness of a seat in a vehicle, at least two containers are arranged in or near a bottom portion of the seat, the first container substantially supports the load of a seat occupant and the second container is relatively unaffected by this load. The two containers are in flow communication with each other through a variable flow passage. Insertion means, e.g., an air compressor or fluid pump, are provided for directing a medium into one of the container and monitoring means, e.g., a pressure transducer, measuring the pressure in one or both containers. A control circuit is coupled to the medium insertion means and the monitoring means for regulating flow of medium into the first container via the medium insertion means until the pressure in the first container as measured by the monitoring means is indicative of a desired stiffness for the seat. The control circuit may also be arranged to adjust the flow passage to thereby control flow of medium between the two containers and thus damping the motion of on object on the seat. The flow passage may be an orifice in a peripheral wall of the inner container.

A method for adjusting the stiffness of a seat in a vehicle comprises the steps of arranging a first container in a bottom portion of the seat and subjected to the load on the seat, arranging a second container in a position where it is relatively unaffected by the load on the seat, coupling interior volumes of the two containers through a variable flow passage, measuring the pressure in the first container, and introducing medium into the first container until the measured pressure in the first container is indicative of a desired stiffness for the seat.

4.3 Dynamic Weight Sensing

The combination of the outputs from these accelerometer sensors and the output of strain gage weight sensors in a vehicle seat, or in or on a support structure of the seat, can be used to make an accurate assessment of the occupancy of the seat and differentiate between animate and inanimate occupants as well as determining where in the seat the occupants are sitting and the state of the use of the seatbelt. This can be done by observing the acceleration signals from the sensors of FIG. 141 of the '881 application and simultaneously the dynamic strain gage measurements from seat-mounted strain gages. The accelerometers provide the input function to the seat and the strain gages measure the reaction of the occupying item to the vehicle acceleration and thereby provide a method of determining dynamically the mass of the occupying item and its location. This is particularly important during occupant position sensing during a crash event. By combining the outputs of the accelerometers and the strain gages and appropriately processing the same, the mass and weight of an object occupying the seat can be determined as well as the gross motion of such an object so that an assessment can be made as to whether the object is a life form such as a human being.

Several ways to process the acceleration signal and the stain or pressure signal are discussed with reference to FIG. 167 in the '881 application. In general, the dynamic load applied to the seat is measured or a forcing function of the seat is measured, as a function of the acceleration signal. This represents the effect of the movement of the vehicle on the occupant which is reflected in the measurement of weight by the strain or pressure gages. Thus, the measurement obtained by the strain or pressure gages can be considered to have two components, one component resulting from the weight applied by the occupant in a stationary state of the vehicle and the other arising or resulting from the movement of the vehicle. The vehicle-movement component can be separated from the total strain or pressure gage measurement to provide a more accurate indication of the weight of the occupant.

4.4 Combined Spatial and Weight

A novel occupant position sensor for a vehicle, for determining the position of the occupant, comprises a weight sensor for determining the weight of an occupant of a seat as described immediately above and processor means for receiving the determined weight of the occupant from the weight sensor and determining the position of the occupant based at least in part on the determined weight of the occupant. The position of the occupant could also be determined based in part on waves received from the space above the seat, data from seat position sensors, reclining angle sensors, etc.

Although spatial sensors such as ultrasonic, electric field and optical occupant sensors can accurately identify and determine the location of an occupying item in the vehicle, a determination of the mass of the item is less accurate as it can be fooled in some cases by a thick but light winter coat, for example. Therefore, it is desirable, when the economics permit, to provide a combined system that includes both weight and spatial sensors. Such a system permits a fine tuning of the deployment time and the amount of gas in the airbag to match the position and the mass of the occupant. If this is coupled with a smart crash severity sensor, then a true smart airbag system can result, as disclosed in the current assignee's U.S. Pat. No. 6,532,408.

As disclosed in several of the current assignee's patents, referenced herein and others, the combination of a reduced number of transducers including weight and spatial can result from a pruning process starting from a larger number of sensors. For example, such a process can begin with four load cells and four ultrasonic sensors and after a pruning process, a system containing two ultrasonic sensors and one load cell can result. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein is therefore not limited to any particular number or combination of sensors and the optimum choice for a particular vehicle will depend on many factors including the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer, cost, accuracy desired, availability of mounting locations and the chosen technologies.

4.5 Face Recognition

A neural network, or other pattern recognition system, can be trained to recognize certain people as permitted operators of a vehicle or for granting access to a cargo container or truck trailer. In this case, if a non-recognized person attempts to operate the vehicle or to gain access, the system can disable the vehicle and/or sound an alarm or send a message to a remote site via telematics. Since it is unlikely that an unauthorized operator will resemble the authorized operator, the neural network system can be quite tolerant of differences in appearance of the operator. The system defaults to where a key or other identification system must be used in the case that the system doesn't recognize the operator or the owner wishes to allow another person to operate the vehicle or have access to the container. The transducers used to identify the operator can be any of the types described in detail above. A preferred method is to use optical imager-based transducers perhaps in conjunction with a weight sensor for automotive applications. This is necessary due to the small size of the features that need to be recognized for a high accuracy of recognition. An alternate system uses an infrared laser, which can be modulated to provide three-dimensional measurements, to irradiate or illuminate the operator and a CCD or CMOS device to receive the reflected image. In this case, the recognition of the operator is accomplished using a pattern recognition system such as described in Popesco, V. and Vincent, J. M. “Location of Facial Features Using a Boltzmann Machine to Implement Geometric Constraints”, Chapter 14 of Lisboa, P. J. G. and Taylor, M. J. Editors, Techniques and Applications of Neural Networks, Ellis Horwood Publishers, New York, 1993. In the present case, a larger CCD element array containing 50,000 or more elements would typically be used instead of the 16 by 16 or 256 element CCD array used by Popesco and Vincent.

FIG. 16 shows a schematic illustration of a system for controlling operation of a vehicle based on recognition of an authorized individual in accordance with the invention. A similar system can be designed for allowing access to a truck trailer, cargo container or railroad car, for example. One or more images of the passenger compartment 260 are received at 261 and data derived therefrom at 262. Multiple image receivers may be provided at different locations. The data derivation may entail any one or more of numerous types of image processing techniques such as those described in the current assignee's U.S. Pat. No. 6,397,136 including those designed to improve the clarity of the image. A pattern recognition algorithm, e.g., a neural network, is trained in a training phase 263 to recognize authorized individuals. The training phase can be conducted upon purchase of the vehicle by the dealer or by the owner after performing certain procedures provided to the owner, e.g., entry of a security code or key or at another appropriate time and place. In the training phase for a theft prevention system, the authorized operator(s) would sit themselves in the passenger seat and optical images would be taken and processed to obtain the pattern recognition algorithm. Alternately, the training can be done away from the vehicle which would be more appropriate for cargo containers and the like.

A processor 264 is embodied with the pattern recognition algorithm thus trained to identify whether a person is the authorized individual by analysis of subsequently obtained data derived from optical images 262. The pattern recognition algorithm in processor 264 outputs an indication of whether the person in the image is an authorized individual for which the system is trained to identify. A security system 265 enables operations of the vehicle when the pattern recognition algorithm provides an indication that the person is an individual authorized to operate the vehicle and prevents operation of the vehicle when the pattern recognition algorithm does not provide an indication that the person is an individual authorized to operate the vehicle.

In some cases, the recognition system can be substantially improved if different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used. As taught in the book Alien Vision referenced above, distinctive facial markings are evident when viewed under near UV or MWIR illumination that can be used to positively identify a person. Other biometric measures can be used with, or in place of, a facial or iris image to further improve the recognition accuracy such as voice recognition (voice-print), finger or hand prints, weight, height, arm length, hand size etc.

Instead of a security system, another component in the vehicle can be affected or controlled based on the recognition of a particular individual. For example, the rear view mirror, seat, seat belt anchorage point, headrest, pedals, steering wheel, entertainment system, air-conditioning/ventilation system can be adjusted. Additionally, the door can be unlocked upon approach of an authorized person.

FIG. 17 is a schematic illustration of a method for controlling operation of a vehicle based on recognition of a person as one of a set of authorized individuals. Although the method is described and shown for permitting or preventing ignition of the vehicle based on recognition of an authorized driver, it can be used to control for any vehicle component, system or subsystem based on recognition of an individual.

Initially, the system is set in a training phase 266 in which images, and other biometric measures, including the authorized individuals are obtained by means of at least one optical receiving unit 267 and a pattern recognition algorithm is trained based thereon 268, usually after application of one or more image processing techniques to the images. The authorized individual(s) occupy the passenger compartment, or some other appropriate location, and have their picture taken by the optical receiving unit to enable the formation of a database on which the pattern recognition algorithm is trained. Training can be performed by any known method in the art, although combination neural networks are preferred.

The system is then set in an operational phase 269 wherein an image is operatively obtained 270, including the driver when the system is used for a security system. If the system is used for component adjustment, then the image would include any passengers or other occupying items in the vehicle. The obtained image, or images if multiple optical receiving units are used, plus other biometric information, are input into the pattern recognition algorithm 271, preferably after some image processing, and a determination is made whether the pattern recognition algorithm indicates that the image includes an authorized driver 272. If so, ignition, or some other system, of the vehicle is enabled 273, or the vehicle may actually be started automatically. If not, an alarm is sounded and/or the police or other remote site may be contacted 274.

Once an optic-based system is present in a vehicle, other options can be enabled such as eye-tracking as a data input device or to detect drowsiness, as discussed above, and even lip reading as a data input device or to augment voice input. This is discussed, for example, Eisenberg, Anne, “Beyond Voice Recognition to a Computer That Reads Lips”, New York Times, Sep. 11, 2003. Lip reading can be implemented in a vehicle through the use of IR illumination and training of a pattern recognition algorithm, such as a neural network or a combination network. This is one example of where an adaptive neural or combination network can be employed that learns as it gains experience with a particular driver. The word “radio”, for example, can be associated with lip motions when the vehicle is stopped or moving slowly and then at a later time when the vehicle is traveling at high speed with considerable wind noise, the voice might be difficult for the system to understand. When augmented with lip reading, the word “radio” can be more accurately recognized. Thus, the combination of lip reading and voice recognition can work together to significantly improve accuracy.

Face recognition can of course be done in two or three dimensions and can involve the creation of a model of the person's head that can aid when illumination is poor, for example. Three dimensions are available if multiple two dimensional images are acquired as the occupant moves his or her head or through the use of a three-dimensional camera. A three-dimensional camera generally has two spaced-apart lenses plus software to combine the two views. Normally, the lenses are relatively close together but this may not need to be the case and significantly more information can be acquired if the lenses are spaced further apart and in some cases, even such that one camera has a frontal view and the other a side view, for example. Naturally, the software is complicated for such cases but the system becomes more robust and less likely to be blocked by a newspaper, for example. A scanning laser radar, PMD or similar system with a modulated beam or with range gating as described above can also be used to obtain three-dimensional information or a 3D image.

Eye tracking as disclosed in Jacob, “Eye Tracking in Advanced Interface Design”, Robert J. K. Jacob, Human-Computer Interaction Lab, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C, can be used by vehicle operator to control various vehicle components such as the turn signal, lights, radio, air conditioning, telephone, Internet interactive commands, etc. much as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/645,709. The display used for the eye tracker can be a heads-up display reflected from the windshield or it can be a plastic electronics display located either in the visor or the windshield.

The eye tracker works most effectively in dim light where the driver's eyes are sufficiently open that the cornea and retina are clearly distinguishable. The direction of operator's gaze is determined by calculation of the center of pupil and the center of the iris that are found by illuminating the eye with infrared radiation. FIG. 8E illustrates a suitable arrangement for illuminating eye along the same axis as the pupil camera. The location of occupant's eyes must be first determined as described elsewhere herein before eye tracking can be implemented. In FIG. 8E, imager system 52, 54, or 56 are candidate locations for eye tracker hardware.

The technique is to shine a collimated beam of infrared light on to be operator's eyeball producing a bright corneal reflection can be bright pupil reflection. Imaging software analyzes the image to identify the large bright circle that is the pupil and a still brighter dot which is the corneal reflection and computes the center of each of these objects. The line of the gaze is determined by connecting the centers of these two reflections.

It is usually necessary only to track a single eye as both eyes tend to look at the same object. In fact, by checking that both eyes are looking at the same object, many errors caused by the occupant looking through the display onto the road or surrounding environment can be eliminated

Object selection with a mouse or mouse pad, as disclosed in the '709 application cross-referenced above is accomplished by pointing at the object and depressing a button. Using eye tracking, an additional technique is available based on the length of time the operator gazes at the object. In the implementations herein, both techniques are available. In the simulated mouse case, the operator gazes at an object, such as the air conditioning control, and depresses a button on the steering wheel, for example, to select the object. Alternately, the operator merely gazes at the object for perhaps one-half second and the object is automatically selected. Both techniques can be implemented simultaneously allowing the operator to freely choose between them. The dwell time can be selectable by the operator as an additional option. Typically, the dwell times will range from about 0.1 seconds to about 1 second.

The problem of finding the eyes and tracking the head of the driver, for example, is handled in Smeraldi, F., Carmona, J. B., “Saccadic search with Garbor features applied to eye detection and real-time head tracking”, Image and Vision Computing 18 (2000) 323-329, Elsevier Science B.V. The Saccadic system described is a very efficient method of locating the most distinctive part of a persons face, the eyes, and in addition to finding the eyes, a modification of the system can be used to recognize the driver. The system makes use of the motion of the subject's head to locate the head prior to doing a search for the eyes using a modified Garbor decomposition method. By comparing two consecutive frames, the head can usually be located if it is in the field of view of the camera. Although this is the preferred method, other eye location and tracking methods can also be used as reported in the literature and familiar to those skilled in the art.

4.6 Heartbeat and Health State

In addition to the use of transducers to determine the presence and location of occupants in a vehicle, other sensors can also be used. For example, as discussed above, a heartbeat sensor, which determines the number and presence of heartbeats, can also be arranged in the vehicle. Heartbeat sensors can be adapted to differentiate between a heartbeat of an adult, a heartbeat of a child and a heartbeat of an animal. As its name implies, a heartbeat sensor detects a heartbeat, and the magnitude thereof, of a human occupant of the seat or other position, if such a human occupant is present. The output of the heartbeat sensor is input to the processor of the interior monitoring system. One heartbeat sensor for use in the invention may be of the types as disclosed in McEwan in U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,012 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,766,208. The heartbeat sensor can be positioned at any convenient position relative to the seats or other appropriate location where occupancy is being monitored. A preferred automotive location is within the vehicle seatback.

This type of micropower impulse radar (MIR) sensor is not believed to have been used in an interior monitoring system in the past. It can be used to determine the motion of an occupant and thus can determine his or her heartbeat (as evidenced by motion of the chest), for example. Such an MIR sensor can also be arranged to detect motion in a particular area in which the occupant's chest would most likely be situated or could be coupled to an arrangement which determines the location of the occupant's chest and then adjusts the operational field of the MIR sensor based on the determined location of the occupant's chest. A motion sensor utilizing a micro-power impulse radar (MIR) system as disclosed, for example, in McEwan U.S. Pat. No. 5,361,070, as well as many other patents by the same inventor. Motion sensing is accomplished by monitoring a particular range from the sensor as disclosed in that patent. MIR is one form of radar that has applicability to occupant sensing and can be mounted at various locations in the vehicle. Other forms include, among others, ultra wideband (UWB) by the Time Domain Corporation and noise radar (NR) by Professor Konstantin Lukin of the National Academy of Sciences of Ukraine Institute of Radiophysics and Electronics. Radar has an advantage over ultrasonic sensors in that data can be acquired at a higher speed and thus the motion of an occupant can be more easily tracked. The ability to obtain returns over the entire occupancy range is somewhat more difficult than with ultrasound resulting in a more expensive system overall. MIR, UWB or NR have additional advantages in their lack of sensitivity to temperature variation and have a comparable resolution to about 40 kHz ultrasound. Resolution comparable to higher frequency is of course possible using millimeter waves, for example. Additionally, multiple MIR, UWB or NR sensors can be used when high-speed tracking of the motion of an occupant during a crash is required since they can be individually pulsed without interfering with each other through frequency, time or code division multiplexing or other multiplexing schemes.

Other methods have been reported for measuring heartbeat including vibrations introduced into a vehicle and variations in the electric field in the vicinity of where an occupant might reside. All such methods are considered encompassed by the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. The detection of a heartbeat regardless of how it is accomplished is indicative of the presence of a living being within the vehicle and such a detection as part of an occupant presence detection system is novel to at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. Similarly, any motion of an object that is not induced by the motion of the vehicle itself is indicative of the presence of a living being and thus part of the teachings herein. The sensing of occupant motion regardless of how it is accomplished when used in a system to affect another vehicle system is contemplated herein.

5. Telematics

Some of the inventions herein relate generally to telematics and the transmission of information from a vehicle to one or more remote sites which can react to the position or status of the vehicle and/or occupant(s) therein.

Initially, sensing of the occupancy of the vehicle and the optional transmission of this information, which may include images, to remote locations will be discussed. This entails obtaining information from various sensors about the occupants in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, e.g., the number of occupants, their type and their motion, if any. Then, the concept of a low cost automatic crash notification system will be discussed. Next, a diversion into improvements in cell phones will be discussed followed by a discussion of trapped children and how telematics can help save their lives. Finally, the use of telematics with non-automotive vehicles will round out this section.

Elsewhere in section 13, the use of telematics is included with a discussion of general vehicle diagnostic methods with the diagnosis being transmittable via a communications device to the remote locations. The diagnostics section includes an extensive discussion of various sensors for use on the vehicle to sense different operating parameters and conditions of the vehicle is provided. All of the sensors discussed herein can be coupled to a communications device enabling transmission of data, signals and/or images to the remote locations, and reception of the same from the remote locations.

5.1 Transmission of Occupancy Information

The cellular phone system, or other telematics communication device, is shown schematically in FIG. 2 by box 32 and outputs to an antenna 34. The phone system or telematics communication device 34 can be coupled to the vehicle interior monitoring system in accordance with any of the embodiments disclosed herein and serves to establish a communications channel with one or more remote assistance facilities, such as an EMS facility or dispatch facility from which emergency response personnel are dispatched. The telematics system can also be a satellite-based system such as provided by Skybitz.

In the event of an accident, the electronic system associated with the telematics system interrogates the various interior monitoring system memories in processor 20 and can arrive at a count of the number of occupants in the vehicle, if each seat is monitored, and, in more sophisticated systems, even makes a determination as to whether each occupant was wearing a seatbelt and if he or she is moving after the accident, and/or the health state of one or more of the occupants as described above, for example. The telematics communication system then automatically notifies an EMS operator (such as 911, OnStar® or equivalent) and the information obtained from the interior monitoring systems is forwarded so that a determination can be made as to the number of ambulances and other equipment to send to the accident site. Vehicles having the capability of notifying EMS in the event one or more airbags deployed are now in service but are not believed to use any of the innovative interior monitoring systems described herein. Such vehicles will also have a system, such as the global positioning system, which permits the vehicle to determine its location and to forward this information to the EMS operator.

FIG. 38 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the invention including a system for determining the presence and health state of any occupants of the vehicle and a telecommunications link. This embodiment includes means for determining the presence of any occupants 150 which may take the form of a heartbeat sensor, chemical sensor and/or motion sensor as described above and means for determining the health state of any occupants 151 as discussed above. The latter means may be integrated into the means for determining the presence of any occupants, i.e., one and the same component, or separate therefrom. Further, means for determining the location, and optionally velocity, of the occupants and/or one or more parts thereof 152 are provided and may be any conventional occupant position sensor or preferably, one of the occupant position sensors as described herein (e.g., those utilizing waves, electromagnetic radiation, electric fields, bladders, strain gages etc.) or as described in the current assignee's patents and patent applications referenced above.

A processor 153 is coupled to the presence determining means 150, the health state determining means 151 and the location determining means 152. A communications unit 154 is coupled to the processor 153. The processor 153 and/or communications unit 154 can also be coupled to microphones 158 that can be distributed throughout the vehicle and include voice-processing circuitry to enable the occupant(s) to effect vocal control of the processor 153, communications unit 154 or any coupled component or oral communications via the communications unit 154. The processor 153 is also coupled to another vehicular system, component or subsystem 155 and can issue control commands to effect adjustment of the operating conditions of the system, component or subsystem. Such a system, component or subsystem can be the heating or air-conditioning system, the entertainment system, an occupant restraint device such as an airbag, a glare prevention system, etc. Also, a positioning system 156 could be coupled to the processor 153 and provides an indication of the absolute position of the vehicle, preferably using satellite-based positioning technology (e.g., a GPS receiver).

In normal use (other then after a crash), the presence determining means 150 determine whether any human occupants are present, i.e., adults or children, and the location determining means 152 determine the occupant's location. The processor 153 receives signals representative of the presence of occupants and their location and determines whether the vehicular system, component or subsystem 155 can be modified to optimize its operation for the specific arrangement of occupants. For example, if the processor 153 determines that only the front seats in the vehicle are occupied, it could control the heating system to provide heat only through vents situated to provide heat for the front-seated occupants.

The communications unit 154 performs the function of enabling establishment of a communications channel to a remote facility to receive information about the occupancy of the vehicle as determined by the presence determining means 150, occupant health state determining means 151 and/or occupant location determining means 152. The communications unit 154 thus can be designed to transmit over a sufficiently large range and at an established frequency monitored by the remote facility, which may be an EMS facility, sheriff department, or fire department. Alternately, it can communicate with a satellite system such as the Skybitz system and the information can be forwarded to the appropriate facility via the Internet or other appropriate link.

Another vehicular telematics system, component or subsystem is a navigational aid, such as a route guidance display or map. In this case, the position of the vehicle as determined by the positioning system 156 is conveyed through processor 153 to the communications unit 154 to a remote facility and a map is transmitted from this facility to the vehicle to be displayed on the route display. If directions are needed, a request for such directions can be entered into an input unit 157 associated with the processor 153 and transmitted to the facility. Data for the display map and/or vocal instructions can then be transmitted from this facility to the vehicle.

Moreover, using this embodiment, it is possible to remotely monitor the health state of the occupants in the vehicle and most importantly, the driver. The health state determining means 151 may be used to detect whether the driver's breathing is erratic or indicative of a state in which the driver is dozing off. The health state determining means 151 can also include a breath-analyzer to determine whether the driver's breath contains alcohol. In this case, the health state of the driver is relayed through the processor 153 and the communications unit 154 to the remote facility and appropriate action can be taken. For example, it would be possible to transmit a command, e.g., in the form of a signal, to the vehicle to activate an alarm or illuminate a warning light or if the vehicle is equipped with an automatic guidance system and ignition shut-off, to cause the vehicle to come to a stop on the shoulder of the roadway or elsewhere out of the traffic stream. The alarm, warning light, automatic guidance system and ignition shut-off are thus particular vehicular components or subsystems represented by 155. The vehicular component or subsystem could be activated directly by the signal from the remote facility, if they include a signal receiver, or indirectly via the communications unit 154 and processor 153.

In use after a crash, the presence determining means 150, health state determining means 151 and location determining means 152 obtain readings from the passenger compartment and direct such readings to the processor 153. The processor 153 analyzes the information and directs or controls the transmission of the information about the occupant(s) to a remote, manned facility. Such information could include the number and type of occupants, i.e., adults, children, infants, whether any of the occupants have stopped breathing or are breathing erratically, whether the occupants are conscious (as evidenced by, e.g., eye motion), whether blood is present (as detected by a chemical sensor) and whether the occupants are making sounds (as detected by a microphone). The determination of the number of occupants is obtained from the presence determining mechanism 150, i.e., the number of occupants whose presence is detected is the number of occupants in the passenger compartment. The determination of the status of the occupants, i.e., whether they are moving is performed by the health state determining mechanism 151, such as the motion sensors, heartbeat sensors, chemical sensors, etc. Moreover, the communications link through the communications unit 154 can be activated immediately after the crash to enable personnel at the remote facility to initiate communications with the vehicle.

Once an occupying item has been located in a vehicle, or any object outside of the vehicle, the identification or categorization information along with an image, including an IR or multispectral image, or icon of the object can be sent via a telematics channel to a remote location. A passing vehicle, for example, can send a picture of an accident or a system in a vehicle that has had an accident can send an image of the occupant(s) of the vehicle to aid in injury assessment by the EMS team.

Although in most if not all of the embodiments described above, it has been assumed that the transmission of images or other data from the vehicle to the EMS or other off-vehicle (remote) site is initiated by the vehicle, this may not always be the case and in some embodiments, provision is made for the off-vehicle site to initiate the acquisition and/or transmission of data including images from the vehicle. Thus, for example, once an EMS operator knows that there has been an accident, he or she can send a command to the vehicle to control components in the vehicle to cause the components send images and other data so that the situation can be monitored by the operator or other person. The capability to receive and initiate such transmissions can also be provided in an emergency vehicle such as a police car or ambulance. In this manner, for a stolen vehicle situation, the police officer, for example, can continue to monitor the interior of the stolen vehicle.

FIG. 39 shows a schematic of the integration of the occupant sensing with a telematics link and the vehicle diagnosis with a telematics link. As envisioned, the occupant sensing system 600 includes those components which determine the presence, position, health state, and other information relating to the occupants, for example the transducers discussed above with reference to FIGS. 1, 2 and 38 and the SAW device discussed above with reference to FIG. 135 of the '881 application. Information relating to the occupants includes information as to what the driver is doing, talking on the phone, communicating with OnStar® or other route guidance, listening to the radio, sleeping, drunk, drugged, having a heart attack The occupant sensing system may also be any of those systems and apparatus described in any of the current assignee's above-referenced patents and patent applications or any other comparable occupant sensing system which performs any or all of the same functions as they relate to occupant sensing. Examples of sensors which might be installed on a vehicle and constitute the occupant sensing system include heartbeat sensors, motion sensors, weight sensors, microphones and optical sensors.

A crash sensor system 591 is provided and determines when the vehicle experiences a crash. This crash sensor may be part of the occupant restraint system or independent from it. Crash sensor system 591 may include any type of crash sensors, including one or more crash sensors of the same or different types.

Vehicle sensors 592 include sensors which detect the operating conditions of the vehicle such as those sensors discussed with reference to FIGS. 135-138 of the '881 application and tire sensors such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,662,642. Other examples include velocity and acceleration sensors, and angle and angular rate pitch, roll and yaw sensors. Of particular importance are sensors that tell what the car is doing: speed, skidding, sliding, location, communicating with other cars or the infrastructure, etc.

Environment sensors 593 includes sensors which provide data to the operating environment of the vehicle, e.g., the inside and outside temperatures, the time of day, the location of the sun and lights, the locations of other vehicles, rain, snow, sleet, visibility (fog), general road condition information, pot holes, ice, snow cover, road visibility, assessment of traffic, video pictures of an accident, etc. Possible sensors include optical sensors which obtain images of the environment surrounding the vehicle, blind spot detectors which provides data on the blind spot of the driver, automatic cruise control sensors that can provide images of vehicles in front of the host vehicle, various radar devices which provide the position of other vehicles and objects relative to the subject vehicle.

The occupant sensing system 600, crash sensors 591, vehicle sensors 592, environment sensors 593 and all other sensors listed above can be coupled to a communications device 594 which may contain a memory unit and appropriate electrical hardware to communicate with the sensors, process data from the sensors, and transmit data from the sensors. The memory unit would be useful to store data from the sensors, updated periodically, so that such information could be transmitted at set time intervals.

The communications device 594 can be designed to transmit information to any number of different types of facilities. For example, the communications device 594 would be designed to transmit information to an emergency response facility 595 in the event of an accident involving the vehicle. The transmission of the information could be triggered by a signal from a crash sensor 591 that the vehicle was experiencing a crash or experienced a crash. The information transmitted could come from the occupant sensing system 600 so that the emergency response could be tailored to the status of the occupants. For example, if the vehicle was determined to have ten occupants, multiple ambulances might be sent. Also, if the occupants are determined not be breathing, then a higher priority call with living survivors might receive assistance first. As such, the information from the occupant sensing system 600 would be used to prioritize the duties of the emergency response personnel.

Information from the vehicle sensors 592 and environment sensors 593 can also be transmitted to law enforcement authorities 597 in the event of an accident so that the cause(s) of the accident could be determined. Such information can also include information from the occupant sensing system 600, which might reveal that the driver was talking on the phone, putting on make-up, or another distracting activity, information from the vehicle sensors 592 which might reveal a problem with the vehicle, and information from the environment sensors 593 which might reveal the existence of slippery roads, dense fog and the like.

Information from the occupant sensing system 600, vehicle sensors 592 and environment sensors 593 can also be transmitted to the vehicle manufacturer 598 in the event of an accident so that a determination can be made as to whether failure of a component of the vehicle caused or contributed to the cause of the accident. For example, the vehicle sensors might determine that the tire pressure was too low so that advice can be disseminated to avoid maintaining the tire pressure too low in order to avoid an accident. Information from the vehicle sensors 592 relating to component failure could be transmitted to a dealer/repair facility 596 which could schedule maintenance to correct the problem.

The communications device 594 can be designed to transmit particular information to each site, i.e., only information important to be considered by the personnel at that site. For example, the emergency response personnel have no need for the fact that the tire pressure was too low but such information is important to the law enforcement authorities 597 (for the possible purpose of issuing a recall of the tire and/or vehicle) and the vehicle manufacturer 598.

In one exemplifying use of the system shown in FIG. 39, the operator at the remote facility 595 could be notified when the vehicle experiences a crash, as detected by the crash sensor system 591 and transmitted to the remote facility 595 via the communications device 594. In this case, if the vehicle occupants are unable to, or do not, initiate communications with the remote facility 595, the operator would be able to receive information from the occupant sensing system 600, as well as the vehicle sensors 592 and environmental sensors 593. The operator could then direct the appropriate emergency response personnel to the vehicle. The communications device 594 could thus be designed to automatically establish the communications channel with the remote facility when the crash sensor system 591 determines that the vehicle has experienced a crash.

The communications device 594 can be a cellular phone, OnStar® or other subscriber-based telematics system, a peer-to-peer vehicle communication system that eventually communicates to the infrastructure and then, perhaps, to the Internet with e-mail to the dealer, manufacturer, vehicle owner, law enforcement authorities or others. It can also be a vehicle to LEO or Geostationary satellite system such as Skybitz which can then forward the information to the appropriate facility either directly or through the Internet.

The communication may need to be secret so as not to violate the privacy of the occupants and thus encrypted communication may in many cases be required. Other innovations described herein include the transmission of any video data from a vehicle to another vehicle or to a facility remote from the vehicle by any means such as a telematics communication system such as OnStar®, a cellular phone system, a communication via GEO, geocentric or other satellite system and any communication that communicates the results of a pattern recognition system analysis. Also, any communication from a vehicle that combines sensor information with location information is anticipated by at least one of the inventions disclosed herein.

When optical sensors are provided as part of the occupant sensing system 600, video conferencing becomes a possibility, whether or not the vehicle experiences a crash. That is, the occupants of the vehicle can engage in a video conference with people at another location 599 via establishment of a communications channel by the communications device 594.

The vehicle diagnostic system described above using a telematics link can transmit information from any type of sensors on the vehicle.

5.2 Telematics with Non-Automotive Vehicles

The transmission of data obtained from imagers, or other transducers, to another location, requiring the processing of the information, using neural networks for example, to a remote location is an important feature of the inventions disclosed herein. This capability can permit an owner of a cargo container or truck trailer to obtain a picture of the interior of the vehicle at any time via telematics. When coupled with occupant sensing, the driver of a vehicle can be recognized and the result sent by telematics for authorization to minimize the theft or unauthorized operation of a vehicle. The recognition of the driver can either be performed on the vehicle or an image of the driver can be sent to a remote location for recognition at that location.

Generally monitoring of containers, trailers, chassis etc. is accomplished through telecommunications primarily with LEO or geostationary satellites or through terrestrial-based communication systems. These systems are commercially available and will not be discussed here. Expected future systems include communication between the container and the infrastructure to indicate to the monitoring authorities that a container with a particular identification number is passing a particular terrestrial point. If this is expected, then no action would be taken. The container identification number can be part of a national database that contains information as to the contents of the container. Thus, for example, if a container containing hazardous materials approaches a bridge or tunnel that forbids such hazardous materials from passing over the bridge or through the tunnel, then an emergency situation can be signaled and preventive action taken.

It is expected that monitoring of the transportation of cargo containers will dramatically increase as the efforts to reduce terrorist activities also increase. If every container that passes within the borders of the United States has an identification number and that number is in a database that provides the contents of that container, then the use of shipping containers by terrorists or criminals should gradually be eliminated. If these containers are carefully monitored by satellite or another communication system that indicates any unusual activity of a container, an immediate investigation can result and then the cargo transportation system will gradually approach perfection where terrorists or criminals are denied this means of transporting material into and within the United States. If any container is found containing contraband material, then the entire history of how that container entered the United States can be checked to determine the source of the failure. If the failure is found to have occurred at a loading port outside of the United States, then sanctions can be imposed on the host country that could have serious effects on that country's ability to trade worldwide. Just the threat of such an action would be a significant deterrent. Thus, the use of containers to transport hazardous materials or weapons of mass destruction as well as people, narcotics, or other contraband and can be effectively eliminated through the use of the container monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein.

Prior to the entry of a container ship into a harbor, a Coast Guard boat from the U.S. Customs Service can approach the container vessel and scan all of the containers thereon to be sure that all such containers are registered and tracked including their contents. Where containers contain dangerous material legally, the seals on those containers can be carefully investigated prior to the ship entering U.S. waters. Obviously, many other security precautions can now be conceived once the ability to track all containers and their contents has been achieved according to the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein.

Containers that enter the United States through land ports of entry can also be interrogated in a similar fashion. As long as the shipper is known and reputable and the container contents are in the database, which would probably be accessible over the Internet, is properly updated, then all containers will be effectively monitored that enter the United States with the penalty of an error resulting in the disenfranchisement of the shipper, and perhaps sanctions against the country, which for most reputable shippers or shipping companies would be a severe penalty sufficient to cause such shippers or shipping companies to take appropriate action to assure the integrity of the shipping containers. Naturally, intelligent selected random inspections guided by the container history would still take place.

Although satellite communication is preferred, communication using cell phones and infrastructure devices placed at appropriate locations along roadways are also possible. Eventually there will be a network linking all vehicles on the highways in a peer-to-peer arrangement (perhaps using Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 (WI-FI), Wi-Mobile or other local, mesh or ad-hoc network) at which time information relative to container contents etc. can be communicated to the Internet or elsewhere through this peer-to-peer network. It is expected that a pseudo-noise-based or similar communication system such as a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wherein the identifying code of a vehicle is derived from the vehicle's GPS determined location, will be the technology of choice for this peer-to-peer vehicle network. It is expected that this network will be able to communicate such information to the Internet (with proper security precautions including encryption where necessary or desired) and that all of the important information relative to the contents of moving containers throughout the United States will be available on the Internet on a need-to-know basis. Thus, law enforcement agencies can maintain computer programs that will monitor the contents of containers using information available from the Internet. Similarly, shippers and receivers can monitor the status of their shipments through a connection onto the Internet. Thus, the existence of the Internet or equivalent can be important to the monitoring system described herein.

An alternate method of implementing the invention is to make use of a cell phone or PDA. Cell phones that are now sold contain a GPS-based location system as do many PDAs. Such a system along with minimal additional apparatus can be used to practice the teachings disclosed herein. In this case, the cell phone, PDA or similar portable device could be mounted through a snap-in attachment system, for example, wherein the portable device is firmly attached to the vehicle. The device can at that point, for example, obtain an ID number from the container through a variety of methods such as a RFID, SAW or hardwired based system. It can also connect to a satellite antenna that would permit the device to communicate to a LEO or GEO satellite system, such as Skybitz as described above. Since the portable device would only operate on a low duty cycle, the battery should last for many days or perhaps longer. Of course, if it is connected to the vehicle power system, its life could be indefinite. Naturally, when power is waning, this fact can be sent to the satellite or cell phone system to alert the appropriate personnel. Since a cell phone contains a microphone, it could be trained, using an appropriate pattern recognition system, to recognize the sound of an accident or the deployment of an airbag or similar event. It thus becomes a very low cost OnStar® type telematics system.

As an alternative to using a satellite network, the cell phone network can be used in essentially the same manner when a cell phone signal is available. Naturally, all of the sensors disclosed herein can either be incorporated into the portable device or placed on the vehicle and connected to the portable device when the device is attached to the vehicle. This system has a key advantage of avoiding obsolescence. With technology rapidly changing, the portable device can be exchanged for a later model or upgraded as needed or desired, keeping the overall system at the highest technical state. Existing telematics systems such as OnStar® can of course also be used with this system.

Importantly, an automatic emergency notification system can now be made available to all owners of appropriately configured cell phones, PDAs, or other similar portable devices that can operate on a very low cost basis without the need for a monthly subscription since they can be designed to operate only on an exception basis. Owners would pay only as they use the service. Stolen vehicle location, automatic notification in the event of a crash even with the transmission of a picture for camera-equipped devices is now possible. Automatic door unlocking can also be done by the device since it could transmit a signal to the vehicle, in a similar fashion as a keyless entry system, from either inside or outside the vehicle. The phone can be equipped with a biometric identification system such as fingerprint, voice print, facial or iris recognition etc. thereby giving that capability to vehicles. The device can thus become the general key to the vehicle or house, and can even open the garage door etc. If the cell phone is lost, its whereabouts can be instantly found since it has a GPS receiver and knows where it is. If it is stolen, it will become inoperable without the biometric identification from the owner.

Other communication systems will also frequently be used to connect the container with the chassis and/or the tractor and perhaps the identification of the driver or operator. Thus, information can be available on the Internet showing what tractor, what trailer, what container and what driver is operating at a particular time, at a particular GPS location, on a particular roadway, with what particular container contents. Suitable security will be provided to ensure that this information is not freely available to the general public. Naturally, redundancy can be provided to prevent the destruction or any failure of a particular site from failing the system.

This communication between the various elements of the shipping system which are co-located (truck, trailer, container, container contents, driver etc.) can be connected through a wired or wireless bus such as the CAN bus. Also, an electrical system such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,809,437, U.S. Pat. No. 6,175,787 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,326,704 can also be used in the invention.

6. Pattern Recognition

In basic embodiments of the inventions, wave or energy-receiving transducers are arranged in the vehicle at appropriate locations, associated algorithms are trained, if necessary depending on the particular embodiment, and function to determine whether a life form, or other object, is present in the vehicle and if so, how many life forms or objects are present. A determination can also be made using the transducers as to whether the life forms are humans, or more specifically, adults, child in child seats, etc. As noted above and below, this is possible using pattern recognition techniques. Moreover, the processor or processors associated with the transducers can be trained (loaded with a trained pattern recognition algorithm) to determine the location of the life forms or objects, either periodically or continuously or possibly only immediately before, during and after a crash. The location of the life forms or objects can be as general or as specific as necessary depending on the system requirements, i.e., a determination can be made that a human is situated on the driver's seat in a normal position (general) or a determination can be made that a human is situated on the driver's seat and is leaning forward and/or to the side at a specific angle as well as determining the position of his or her extremities and head and chest (specific). Or, a determination can be made as to the size or type of objects such as boxes are in a truck trailer or cargo container. The degree of detail is limited by several factors, including, e.g., the number, position and type of transducers and the training of the pattern recognition algorithm.

When different objects are placed on the front passenger seat, the images (here “image” is used to represent any form of signal) from transducers 6, 8, 10 (FIG. 1) are different for different objects but there are also similarities between all images of rear facing child seats, for example, regardless of where on the vehicle seat it is placed and regardless of what company manufactured the child seat. Alternately, there will be similarities between all images of people sitting on the seat regardless of what they are wearing, their age or size. The problem is to find the set of “rules” or an algorithm that differentiates the images of one type of object from the images of other types of objects, for example which differentiate the adult occupant images from the rear facing child seat images or boxes. The similarities of these images for various child seats are frequently not obvious to a person looking at plots of the time series from ultrasonic sensors, for example, and thus computer algorithms are developed to sort out the various patterns. For a more detailed discussion of pattern recognition see U.S. RE37260 to Varga et. and discussions elsewhere herein.

The determination of these rules is important to the pattern recognition techniques used in at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. In general, three approaches have been useful, artificial intelligence, fuzzy logic and artificial neural networks including modular or combination neural networks. Other types of pattern recognition techniques may also be used, such as sensor fusion as disclosed in Corrado U.S. Pat. No. 5,482,314, U.S. Pat. No. 5,890,085, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,729. In some of the inventions disclosed herein, such as the determination that there is an object in the path of a closing window or door using acoustics or optics as described herein, the rules are sufficiently obvious that a trained researcher can look at the returned signals and devise an algorithm to make the required determinations. In others, such as the determination of the presence of a rear facing child seat or of an occupant, artificial neural networks are used to determine the rules. Neural network software for determining the pattern recognition rules is available from various sources such as International Scientific Research, Inc., Panama City, Panama.

The human mind has little problem recognizing faces even when they are partially occluded such as with a hat, sunglasses or a scarf, for example. With the increase in low cost computing power, it is now becoming possible to train a rather large neural network, perhaps a combination neural network, to recognize most of those cases where a human mind will also be successful.

Other techniques which may or may not be part of the process of designing a system for a particular application include the following:

1. Fuzzy logic. Neural networks frequently exhibit the property that when presented with a situation that is totally different from any previously encountered, an irrational decision can result. Frequently, when the trained observer looks at input data, certain boundaries to the data become evident and cases that fall outside of those boundaries are indicative of either corrupted data or data from a totally unexpected situation. It is sometimes desirable for the system designer to add rules to handle these cases. These can be fuzzy logic-based rules or rules based on human intelligence. One example would be that when certain parts of the data vector fall outside of expected bounds that the system defaults to an airbag-enable state or the previously determined state.

2. Genetic algorithms. When developing a neural network algorithm for a particular vehicle, there is no guarantee that the best of all possible algorithms has been selected. One method of improving the probability that the best algorithm has been selected is to incorporate some of the principles of genetic algorithms. In one application of this theory, the network architecture and/or the node weights are varied pseudo-randomly to attempt to find other combinations which have higher success rates. The discussion of such genetic algorithms systems appears in the book Computational Intelligence referenced above.

Although neural networks are preferred other classifiers such as Bayesian classifiers can be used as well as any other pattern recognition system. A key feature of most of the inventions disclosed herein is the recognition that the technology of pattern recognition rather than deterministic mathematics should be applied to solving the occupant sensing problem.

6.1 Neural Networks

An occupant can move from a position safely displaced from the airbag to a position where he or she can be seriously injured by the deployment of an airbag within a fraction of a second during pre-crash braking, for example. On the other hand, it takes a substantially longer time period to change the seat occupancy state from a forward facing person to a rear facing child seat, or even from a forward facing child seat to a rear facing child seat. This fact can be used in the discrimination process through post-processing algorithms. One method, which also prepares for DOOP, is to use a two-layered neural network or two separate neural networks. The first one categorizes the seat occupancy into, for example, (1) empty seat, (2) rear facing child seat, (3) forward facing child seat and (4) forward facing human (not in a child seat). The second is used for occupant position determination. In the implementation, the same input layer can be used for both neural networks but separate hidden and output layers are used. This is illustrated in FIG. 53 which is similar to FIG. 19 b with the addition of a post processing operation for both the categorization and position networks and the separate hidden layer nodes for each network.

If the categorization network determines that either a category (3) or (4) exists, then the second network is run, which determines the location of the occupant. Significant averaging of the vectors is used for the first network and substantial evidence is required before the occupancy class is changed. For example, if data is acquired every 10 milliseconds, the first network might be designed to require 600 out of 1000 changed vectors before a change of state is determined. In this case, at least 6 seconds of confirming data would be required. Such a system would therefore not be fooled by a momentary placement of a newspaper by a forward facing human, for example, that might look like a rear-facing child seat.

If, on the other hand, a forward facing human were chosen, his or her position could be determined every 10 milliseconds. A decision that the occupant had moved out of position would not necessarily be made from one 10 millisecond reading unless that reading was consistent with previous readings. Nevertheless, a series of consistent readings would lead to a decision within 10 milliseconds of when the occupant crossed over into the danger zone proximate to the airbag module. This method of using history is used to eliminate the effects of temperature gradients, for example, or other events that could temporarily distort one or more vectors. The algorithms which perform this analysis are part of the post-processor.

More particularly, in one embodiment of the method in accordance with at least one of the inventions herein in which two neural networks are used in the control of the deployment of an occupant restraint device based on the position of an object in a passenger compartment of a vehicle, several wave-emitting and receiving transducers are mounted on the vehicle. In one preferred embodiment, the transducers are ultrasonic transducers which simultaneously transmit and receive waves at different frequencies from one another. A determination is made by a first neural network whether the object is of a type requiring deployment of the occupant restraint device in the event of a crash involving the vehicle based on the waves received by at least some of the transducers after being modified by passing through the passenger compartment. If so, another determination is made by a second neural network whether the position of the object relative to the occupant restraint device would cause injury to the object upon deployment of the occupant restraint device based on the waves received by at least some of the transducers. The first neural network is trained on signals from at least some of the transducers representative of waves received by the transducers when different objects are situated in the passenger compartment. The second neural network is trained on signals from at least some of the transducers when different objects in different positions are situated in the passenger compartment.

The transducers used in the training of the first and second neural networks and operational use of method are not necessary the same transducers and different sets of transducers can be used for the typing or categorizing of the object via the first neural network and the position determination of the object via the second neural network.

The modifications described above with respect to the use of ultrasonic transducers can also be used in conjunction with a dual neural network system. For example, motion of a respective vibrating element or cone of one or more of the transducers may be electronically or mechanically diminished or suppressed to reduce ringing of the transducer and/or one or more of the transducers may be arranged in a respective tube having an opening through which the waves are transmitted and received.

In another embodiment of the invention, a method for categorizing and determining the position of an object in a passenger compartment of a vehicle entails mounting a plurality of wave-receiving transducers on the vehicle, training a first neural network on signals from at least some of the transducers representative of waves received by the transducers when different objects in different positions are situated in the passenger compartment, and training a second neural network on signals from at least some of the transducers representative of waves received by the transducers when different objects in different positions are situated in the passenger compartment. As such, the first neural network provides an output signal indicative of the categorization of the object while the second neural network provides an output signal indicative of the position of the object. The transducers may be controlled to transmit and receive waves each at a different frequency, as discussed elsewhere herein, and one or more of the transducers may be arranged in a respective tube having an opening through which the waves are transmitted and received.

Although this system is described with particular advantageous use for ultrasonic and optical transducers, it is conceivable that other transducers other than the ultrasonics or optics can also be used in accordance with the invention. A dual neural network is a form of a modular neural network and both are subsets of combination neural networks.

The system used in a preferred implementation of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein for the determination of the presence of a rear facing child seat, of an occupant or of an empty seat, for example, is the artificial neural network, which is also commonly referred to as a trained neural network. In one case, illustrated in FIG. 1, the network operates on the returned signals as sensed by transducers 6, 8, 9 and 10, for example. Through a training session, the system is taught to differentiate between the different cases. This is done by conducting a large number of experiments where a selection of the possible child seats is placed in a large number of possible orientations on the front passenger seat. Similarly, a sufficiently large number of experiments are run with human occupants and with boxes, bags of groceries and other objects (both inanimate and animate). For each experiment with different objects and the same object in different positions, the returned signals from the transducers 6, 8, 9 and 10, for example, are associated with the identification of the occupant in the seat or the empty seat and information about the occupant such as its orientation if it is a child seat and/or position. Data sets are formed from the returned signals and the identification and information about the occupant or the absence of an occupant. The data sets are input into a neural network-generating program that creates a trained neural network that can, upon receiving input of returned signals from the transducers 6, 8, 9 and 10, provide an output of the identification and information about the occupant most likely situated in the seat or ascertained the existence of an empty seat. Sometimes as many as 1,000,000 such experiments are run before the neural network is sufficiently trained and tested so that it can differentiate among the several cases and output the correct decision with a very high probability. The data from each trial is combined to form a one-dimensional array of data called a vector. Of course, it must be realized that a neural network can also be trained to differentiate among additional cases, for example, a forward facing child seat. It can also be trained to recognize the existence of one or more boxes or other cargo within a truck trailer, cargo container, automobile trunk or railroad car, for example.

Considering now FIG. 9, the normalized data from the ultrasonic transducers 6, 8, 9 and 10, the seat track position detecting sensor 74, the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, from the weight sensor(s) 7, 76 and 97, from the heartbeat sensor 71, the capacitive sensor 78 and the motion sensor 73 are input to the neural network 65, and the neural network 65 is then trained on this data. More specifically, the neural network 65 adds up the normalized data from the ultrasonic transducers, from the seat track position detecting sensor 74, from the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, from the weight sensor(s) 7, 76 and 97, from the heartbeat sensor 71, from the capacitive sensor 78 and from the motion sensor 73 with each data point multiplied by an associated weight according to the conventional neural network process to determine correlation function (step S6 in FIG. 12).

Looking now at FIG. 19B, in this embodiment, 144 data points are appropriately interconnected at 25 connecting points of layer 1, and each data point is mutually correlated through the neural network training and weight determination process. The 144 data points consist of 138 measured data points from the ultrasonic transducers, the data (139th) from the seat track position detecting sensor 74, the data (140th) from the reclining angle detecting sensor 57, the data (141st) from the weight sensor(s) 7 or 76, the data (142^(nd)) from the heartbeat sensor 71, the data (143^(rd)) from the capacitive sensor and the data (144^(th)) from the motion sensor (the last three inputs are not shown on FIG. 19B. Each of the connecting points of the layer 1 has an appropriate threshold value, and if the sum of measured data exceeds the threshold value, each of the connecting points will output a signal to the connecting points of layer 2. Although the weight sensor input is shown as a single input, in general there will be a separate input from each weight sensor used. For example, if the seat has four seat supports and a strain measuring element is used on each support, what will be four data inputs to the neural network.

The connecting points of the layer 2 comprises 20 points, and the 25 connecting points of the layer 1 are appropriately interconnected as the connecting points of the layer 2. Similarly, each data is mutually correlated through the training process and weight determination as described above and in the above-referenced neural network texts. Each of the 20 connecting points of the layer 2 has an appropriate threshold value, and if the sum of measured data exceeds the threshold value, each of the connecting points will output a signal to the connecting points of layer 3.

The connecting points of the layer 3 comprises 3 points, and the connecting points of the layer 2 are interconnected at the connecting points of the layer 3 so that each data is mutually correlated as described above. If the sum of the outputs of the connecting points of layer 2 exceeds a threshold value, the connecting points of the latter 3 will output Logic values (100), (010), and (001) respectively, for example.

The neural network 65 recognizes the seated-state of a passenger A by training as described in several books on Neural Networks mentioned in the above referenced patents and patent applications. Then, after training the seated-state of the passenger A and developing the neural network weights, the system is tested. The training procedure and the test procedure of the neural network 65 will hereafter be described with a flowchart shown in FIG. 12.

The threshold value of each connecting point is determined by multiplying weight coefficients and summing up the results in sequence, and the aforementioned training process is to determine a weight coefficient Wj so that the threshold value (ai) is a previously determined output. ai=ΣWj·Xj(j=1 to N)

wherein

-   -   Wj is the weight coefficient,     -   Xj is the data and     -   N is the number of samples.

Based on this result of the training, the neural network 65 generates the weights for the coefficients of the correlation function or the algorithm (step S7).

At the time the neural network 65 has learned a suitable number of patterns of the training data, the result of the training is tested by the test data. In the case where the rate of correct answers of the seated-state detecting unit based on this test data is unsatisfactory, the neural network is further trained and the test is repeated. In this embodiment, the test was performed based on about 600,000 test patterns. When the rate of correct test result answers was at about 98%, the training was ended. Further improvements to the ultrasonic occupant sensor system has now resulted in accuracies exceeding 98% and for the optical system exceeding 99%.

The neural network software operates as follows. The training data is used to determine the weights which multiply the values at the various nodes at the lower level when they are combined at nodes at a higher level. Once a sufficient number of iterations have been accomplished, the independent data is used to check the network. If the accuracy of the network using the independent data is lower than the last time that it was checked using the independent data, then the previous weights are substituted for the new weights and training of the network continues on a different path. Thus, although the independent data is not used to train the network, it does strongly affect the weights. It is therefore not really independent. Also, both the training data and the independent data are created so that all occupancy states are roughly equally represented. As a result, a third set of data is used which is structured to more closely represent the real world of vehicle occupancy. This third data set, the “real world” data, is then used to arrive at a figure as to the real accuracy of the system.

The neural network 65 has outputs 65 a, 65 b and 65 c (FIG. 9). Each of the outputs 65 a, 65 b and 65 c outputs a signal of logic 0 or 1 to a gate circuit or algorithm 77. Based on the signals from the outputs 65 a, 65 b and 65 c, any one of these combination (100), (010) and (001) is obtained. In another preferred embodiment, all data for the empty seat was removed from the training set and the empty seat case was determined based on the output of the weight sensor alone. This simplifies the neural network and improves its accuracy.

In this embodiment, the output (001) correspond to a vacant seat, a seat occupied by an inanimate object or a seat occupied by a pet (VACANT), the output (010) corresponds to a rear facing child seat (RFCS) or an abnormally seated passenger (ASP or OOPA), and the output (100) corresponds to a normally seated passenger (NSP or FFA) or a forward facing child seat (FFCS).

The gate circuit (seated-state evaluation circuit) 77 can be implemented by an electronic circuit or by a computer algorithm by those skilled in the art and the details will not be presented here. The function of the gate circuit 77 is to remove the ambiguity that sometimes results when ultrasonic sensors and seat position sensors alone are used. This ambiguity is that it is sometimes difficult to differentiate between a rear facing child seat (RFCS) and an abnormally seated passenger (ASP), or between a normally seated passenger (NSP) and a forward facing child seat (FFCS). By the addition of one or more weight sensors in the function of acting as a switch when the weight is above or below 60 lbs., it has been found that this ambiguity can be eliminated. The gate circuit therefore takes into account the output of the neural network and also the weight from the weight sensor(s) as being above or below 60 lbs. and thereby separates the two cases just described and results in five discrete outputs.

The use of weight data must be heavily filtered since during driving conditions, especially on rough roads or during an accident, the weight sensors will give highly varying output. The weight sensors, therefore, are of little value during the period of time leading up to and including a crash and their influence must be minimized during this time period. One way of doing this is to average the data over a long period of time such as from 5 seconds to a minute or more.

Thus, the gate circuit 77 fulfills a role of outputting five kinds of seated-state evaluation signals, based on a combination of three kinds of evaluation signals from the neural network 65 and superimposed information from the weight sensor(s). The five seated-state evaluation signals are input to an airbag deployment determining circuit that is part of the airbag system and will not be described here. As disclosed in the above-referenced patents and patent applications, the output of this system can also be used to activate a variety of lights or alarms to indicate to the operator of the vehicle the seated state of the passenger. The system that has been here described for the passenger side is also applicable for the most part for the driver side.

An alternate and preferred method of accomplishing the function performed by the gate circuit is to use a modular neural network. In this case, the first level neural network is trained on determining whether the seat is occupied or vacant. The input to this neural network consists of all of the data points described above. Since the only function of this neural network is to ascertain occupancy, the accuracy of this neural network is very high. If this neural network determines that the seat is not vacant, then the second level neural network determines the occupancy state of the seat.

In this embodiment, although the neural network 65 has been employed as an evaluation circuit, the mapping data of the coefficients of a correlation function may also be implemented or transferred to a microcomputer to constitute the evaluation circuit (see Step S8 in FIG. 12).

According to the seated-state detecting unit of the present invention, the identification of a vacant seat (VACANT), a rear facing child seat (RFCS), a forward facing child seat (FFCS), a normally seated adult passenger (NSP), an abnormally seated adult passenger (ASP), can be reliably performed. Based on this identification, it is possible to control a component, system or subsystem in the vehicle. For example, a regulation valve which controls the inflation or deflation of an airbag may be controlled based on the evaluated identification of the occupant of the seat. This regulation valve may be of the digital or analog type. A digital regulation valve is one that is in either of two states, open or closed. The control of the flow is then accomplished by varying the time that the valve is open and closed, i.e., the duty cycle.

The neural network has been previously trained on a significant number of occupants of the passenger compartment. The number of such occupants depends strongly on whether the driver or the passenger seat is being analyzed. The variety of seating states or occupancies of the passenger seat is vastly greater than that of the driver seat. For the driver seat, a typical training set will consist of approximately 100 different vehicle occupancies. For the passenger seat, this number can exceed 1000. These numbers are used for illustration purposes only and will differ significantly from vehicle model to vehicle model. Of course many vectors of data will be taken for each occupancy as the occupant assumes different positions and postures.

The neural network is now used to determine which of the stored occupancies most closely corresponds to the measured data. The output of the neural network can be an index of the setup that was used during training that most closely matches the current measured state. This index can be used to locate stored information from the matched trained occupancy. Information that has been stored for the trained occupancy typically includes the locus of the centers of the chest and head of the driver, as well as the approximate radius of pixels which is associated with this center to define the head area, for example. For the case of FIG. 8A, it is now known from this exercise where the head, chest, and perhaps the eyes and ears, of the driver are most likely to be located and also which pixels should be tracked in order to know the precise position of the driver's head and chest. What has been described above is the identification process for automobile occupancy and is only representative of the general process. A similar procedure, although usually simpler with fewer steps, is applicable to other vehicle monitoring cases.

The use of trainable pattern recognition technologies such as neural networks is an important part of the some of the inventions discloses herein particularly for the automobile occupancy case, although other non-trained pattern recognition systems such as fuzzy logic, correlation, Kalman filters, and sensor fusion can also be used. These technologies are implemented using computer programs to analyze the patterns of examples to determine the differences between different categories of objects. These computer programs are derived using a set of representative data collected during the training phase, called the training set. After training, the computer programs output a computer algorithm containing the rules permitting classification of the objects of interest based on the data obtained after installation in the vehicle. These rules, in the form of an algorithm, are implemented in the system that is mounted onto the vehicle. The determination of these rules is important to the pattern recognition techniques used in at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. Artificial neural networks using back propagation are thus far the most successful of the rule determination approaches, however, research is underway to develop systems with many of the advantages of back propagation neural networks, such as learning by training, without the disadvantages, such as the inability to understand the network and the possibility of not converging to the best solution. In particular, back propagation neural networks will frequently give an unreasonable response when presented with data than is not within the training data. It is well known that neural networks are good at interpolation but poor at extrapolation. A combined neural network fuzzy logic system, on the other hand, can substantially solve this problem. Additionally, there are many other neural network systems in addition to back propagation. In fact, one type of neural network may be optimum for identifying the contents of the passenger compartment and another for determining the location of the object dynamically.

Numerous books and articles, including more that 500 U.S. patents, describe neural networks in great detail and thus the theory and application of this technology is well known and will not be repeated here. Except in a few isolated situations where neural networks have been used to solve particular problems limited to engine control, for example, they have not previously been applied to automobiles, trucks or other vehicle monitoring situations.

The system generally used in the instant invention, therefore, for the determination of the presence of a rear facing child seat, an occupant, or an empty seat is the artificial neural network or a neural-fuzzy system. In this case, the network operates on the returned signals from a CCD or CMOS array as sensed by transducers 49, 50, 51 and 54 in FIG. 8D, for example. For the case of the front passenger seat, for example, through a training session, the system is taught to differentiate between the three cases. This is done by conducting a large number of experiments where available child seats are placed in numerous positions and orientations on the front passenger seat of the vehicle.

Once the network is determined, it is possible to examine the result to determine, from the algorithm created by the neural network software, the rules that were finally arrived at by the trial and error training technique. In that case, the rules can then be programmed into a microprocessor. Alternately, a neural computer can be used to implement the neural network directly. In either case, the implementation can be carried out by those skilled in the art of pattern recognition using neural networks. If a microprocessor is used, a memory device is also required to store the data from the analog to digital converters which digitize the data from the receiving transducers. On the other hand, if a neural network computer is used, the analog signal can be fed directly from the transducers to the neural network input nodes and an intermediate memory is not required. Memory of some type is needed to store the computer programs in the case of the microprocessor system and if the neural computer is used for more than one task, a memory is needed to store the network specific values associated with each task.

A review of the literature on neural networks yields the conclusion that the use of such a large training set is unique in the neural network field. The rule of thumb for neural networks is that there must be at least three training cases for each network weight. Thus, for example, if a neural network has 156 input nodes, 10 first hidden layer nodes, 5 second hidden layer nodes, and one output node this results in a total of 1,622 weights. According to conventional theory 5000 training examples should be sufficient. It is highly unexpected, therefore, that greater accuracy would be achieved through 100 times that many cases. It is thus not obvious and cannot be deduced from the neural network literature that the accuracy of the system will improve substantially as the size of the training database increases even to tens of thousands of cases. It is also not obvious looking at the plots of the vectors obtained using ultrasonic transducers that increasing the number of tests or the database size will have such a significant effect on the system accuracy. Each of the vectors is typically a rather course plot with a few significant peaks and valleys. Since the spatial resolution of an ultrasonic system is typically about 2 to 4 inches, it is once again surprising that such a large database is required to achieve significant accuracy improvements.

The back propagation neural network is a very successful general-purpose network. However, for some applications, there are other neural network architectures that can perform better. If it has been found, for example, that a parallel network as described above results in a significant improvement in the system, then, it is likely that the particular neural network architecture chosen has not been successful in retrieving all of the information that is present in the data. In such a case, an RCE, Stochastic, Logicon Projection, cellular, support vector machine or one of the other approximately 30 types of neural network architectures can be tried to see if the results improve. This parallel network test, therefore, is a valuable tool for determining the degree to which the current neural network is capable of using efficiently the available data.

One of the salient features of neural networks is their ability of find patterns in data regardless of its source. Neural networks work well with data from ultrasonic sensors, optical imagers, strain gage and bladder weight sensors, temperature sensors, chemical sensors, radiation sensors, pressure sensors, electric field sensors, capacitance based sensors, any other wave sensors including the entire electromagnetic spectrum, etc. If data from any sensors can be digitized and fed into a neural network generating program and if there is information in the pattern of the data then neural networks can be a viable method of identifying those patterns and correlating them with a desired output function. Note that although the inventions disclosed herein preferably use neural networks and combination neural networks to be described next, these inventions are not limited to this form or method of pattern recognition. The major breakthrough in occupant sensing came with the recognition by the current assignee that ordinary analysis using mathematical equations where the researcher looks at the data and attempts, based on the principles of statistics, engineering or physics, to derive the relevant relationships between the data and the category and location of an occupying item, is not the proper approach and that pattern recognition technologies should be used. This is believed to be the first use of such pattern recognition technologies in the automobile safety and monitoring fields with the exception that neural networks have been used by the current assignee and others as the basis of a crash sensor algorithm and by certain automobile manufacturers for engine control. Note for many monitoring situations in truck trailers, cargo containers and railroad cars where questions such as “is there anything in the vehicle?” are asked, neural networks may not always be required.

7. Other Products, Outputs, Features

Once the occupancy state of the seat (or seats) in the vehicle or of the vehicle itself, as in a cargo container, truck trailer or railroad car, is known, this information can be used to control or affect the operation of a significant number of vehicular systems, components and devices. That is, the systems, components and devices in the vehicle can be controlled and perhaps their operation optimized in consideration of the occupancy of the seat(s) in the vehicle or of the vehicle itself. Thus, the vehicle includes control means coupled to the processor means for controlling a component or device in the vehicle in consideration of the output indicative of the current occupancy state of the seat obtained from the processor means. The component or device can be an airbag system including at least one deployable airbag whereby the deployment of the airbag is suppressed, for example, if the seat is occupied by a rear-facing child seat, or otherwise the parameters of the deployment are controlled. Thus, the seated-state detecting unit described above may be used in a component adjustment system and method described below when the presence of a human being occupying the seat is detected. The component can also be a telematics system such as the Skybitz or OnStar systems where information about the occupancy state of the vehicle, or changes in that state, can be sent to a remote site.

The component adjustment system and methods in accordance with the invention can automatically and passively adjust the component based on the morphology of the occupant of the seat. As noted above, the adjustment system may include the seated-state detecting unit described above so that it will be activated if the seated-state detecting unit detects that an adult or child occupant is seated on the seat, that is, the adjustment system will not operate if the seat is occupied by a child seat, pet or inanimate objects. Obviously, the same system can be used for any seat in the vehicle including the driver seat and the passenger seat(s). This adjustment system may incorporate the same components as the seated-state detecting unit described above, that is, the same components may constitute a part of both the seated-state detecting unit and the adjustment system, for example, the weight measuring system.

The adjustment system described herein, although improved over the prior art, will at best be approximate since two people, even if they are identical in all other respects, may have a different preferred driving position or other preferred adjusted component location or orientation. A system that automatically adjusts the component, therefore, should learn from its errors. Thus, when a new occupant sits in the vehicle, for example, the system automatically estimates the best location of the component for that occupant and moves the component to that location, assuming it is not already at the best location. If the occupant changes the location, the system should remember that change and incorporate it into the adjustment the next time that person enters the vehicle and is seated in the same seat. Therefore, the system need not make a perfect selection the first time but it should remember the person and the position the component was in for that person. The system, therefore, makes one, two or three measurements of morphological characteristics of the occupant and then adjusts the component based on an algorithm. The occupant will correct the adjustment and the next time that the system measures the same measurements for those measurement characteristics, it will set the component to the corrected position. As such, preferred components for which the system in accordance with the invention is most useful are those which affect a driver of the vehicle and relate to the sensory abilities of the driver, i.e., the mirrors, the seat, the steering wheel and steering column and accelerator, clutch and brake pedals.

Thus, although the above description mentions that the airbag system can be controlled by the control circuitry 20 (FIG. 1), any vehicular system, component or subsystem can be controlled based on the information or data obtained by transmitter and/or receiver assemblies 6, 8, 9 and 10. Control circuitry 20 can be programmed or trained, if for example a neural network is used, to control heating an air-conditioning systems based on the presence of occupants in certain positions so as to optimize the climate control in the vehicle. The entertainment system can also be controlled to provide sound only to locations at which occupants are situated. There is no limit to the number and type of vehicular systems, components and subsystems that can be controlled using the analysis techniques described herein.

Furthermore, if multiple vehicular systems are to be controlled by control circuitry 20, then these systems can be controlled by the control circuitry 20 based on the status of particular components of the vehicle. For example, an indication of whether a key is in the ignition can be used to direct the control circuitry 20 to either control an airbag system (when the key is present in the ignition) or an antitheft system (when the key is not present in the ignition). Control circuitry 20 would thus be responsive to the status of the ignition of the motor vehicle to perform one of a plurality of different functions. More particularly, the pattern recognition algorithm, such as the neural network described herein, could itself be designed to perform in a different way depending on the status of a vehicular component such as the detected presence of a key in the ignition. It could provide one output to control an antitheft system when a key is not present and another output when a key is present using the same inputs from the transmitter and/or receiver assemblies 6, 8, 9 and 10.

The algorithm in control circuitry 20 can also be designed to determine the location of the occupant's eyes either directly or indirectly through a determination of the location of the occupant and an estimation of the position of the eyes therefrom. As such, the position of the rear view mirror 55 can be adjusted to optimize the driver's use thereof.

7.1 Control of Passive Restraints

The use of the vehicle interior monitoring system to control the deployment of an airbag is discussed in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,653,462 referenced above. In that case, the control is based on the use of a pattern recognition system, such as a neural network, to differentiate between the occupant and his extremities in order to provide an accurate determination of the position of the occupant relative to the airbag. If the occupant is sufficiently close to the airbag module that he is more likely to be injured by the deployment itself than by the accident, the deployment of the airbag is suppressed. This process is carried further by the interior monitoring system described herein in that the nature or identity of the object occupying the vehicle seat is used to contribute to the airbag deployment decision. FIG. 4 shows a side view illustrating schematically the interface between the vehicle interior monitoring system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein and the vehicle airbag system 44. A similar system can be provided for the passenger as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/151,615 filed May 20, 2002.

In this embodiment, ultrasonic transducers 8 and 9 transmit bursts of ultrasonic waves that travel to the occupant where they are reflected back to transducers or receptors/receivers 8 and 9. The time period required for the waves to travel from the generator and return is used to determine the distance from the occupant to the airbag as described in the aforementioned U.S. Pat. No. 5,653,462, i.e., and thus may also be used to determine the position or location of the occupant. An optical imager based system would also be appropriate. In the invention, however, the portion of the return signal that represents the occupants' head or chest, has been determined based on pattern recognition techniques such as a neural network. The relative velocity of the occupant toward the airbag can then be determined, by Doppler principles or from successive position measurements, which permits a sufficiently accurate prediction of the time when the occupant would become proximate to the airbag. By comparing the occupant relative velocity to the integral of the crash deceleration pulse, a determination as to whether the occupant is being restrained by a seatbelt can also be made which then can affect the airbag deployment initiation decision. Alternately, the mere knowledge that the occupant has moved a distance that would not be possible if he were wearing a seatbelt gives information that he is not wearing one.

Another method of providing a significant improvement to the problem of determining the position of the occupant during vehicle deceleration is to input the vehicle deceleration directly into the occupant sensing system. This can be done through the use of the airbag crash sensor accelerometer or a dedicated accelerometer can be used. This deceleration or its integral can be entered directly into the neural network or can be integrated through an additional post-processing algorithm. Post processing in general is discussed in section 11.7. One significant advantage of neural networks is their ability to efficiently use information from any source. It is the ultimate “sensor fusion” system.

A more detailed discussion of this process and of the advantages of the various technologies, such as acoustic or electromagnetic, can be found in SAE paper 940527, “Vehicle Occupant Position Sensing” by Breed et al,. In this paper, it is demonstrated that the time delay required for acoustic waves to travel to the occupant and return does not prevent the use of acoustics for position measurement of occupants during the crash event. For position measurement and for many pattern recognition applications, ultrasonics is the preferred technology due to the lack of adverse health effects and the low cost of ultrasonic systems compared with either camera, laser or radar based systems. This situation has changed, however, as the cost of imagers has come down. The main limiting feature of ultrasonics is the wavelength, which places a limitation on the size of features that can be discerned. Optical systems, for example, are required when the identification of particular individuals is desired.

FIG. 26 is a schematic drawing of one embodiment of an occupant restraint device control system in accordance with the invention. The first step is to obtain information about the contents of the seat at step 338, when such contents are present on the seat. To this end, a presence sensor can be employed to activate the system only when the presence of an object, or living being, is detected. Next, at step 339, a signal is generated based on the contents of the seat, with different signals being generated for different contents of the seat. Thus, while a signal for a dog will be different than the signal for a child set, the signals for different child seats will not be that different. Next, at step 340, the signal is analyzed to determine whether a child seat is present, whether a child seat in a particular orientation is present and/or whether a child seat in a particular position is present. Deployment control 341 provides a deployment control signal or command based on the analysis of the signal generated based on the contents of the seat. This signal or command is directed to the occupant protection or restraint device 342 to provide for deployment for that particular content of the seat. The system continually obtains information about the contents of the seat until such time as a deployment signal is received from, e.g., a crash sensor, to initiate deployment of the occupant restraint device.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the operation of one embodiment of an occupant restraint device control method in accordance with the invention. The first step is to determine whether contents are present on the seat at step 910. If so, information is obtained about the contents of the seat at step 344. At step 345, a signal is generated based on the contents of the seat, with different signals being generated for different contents of the seat. The signal is analyzed to determine whether a child seat is present at step 346, whether a child seat in a particular orientation is present at step 347 and/or whether a child seat in a particular position is present at step 348. Deployment control 349 provides a deployment control signal or command based on the analysis of the signal generated based on the contents of the seat. This signal or command is directed to the occupant protection or restraint device 350 to provide for deployment for those particular contents of the seat. The system continually obtains information about the contents of the seat until such time as a deployment signal is received from, e.g., a crash sensor 351, to initiate deployment of the occupant restraint device.

In another implementation, the sensor algorithm may determine the rate that gas is generated to affect the rate that the airbag is inflated. In all of these cases, the position of the occupant is used to affect the deployment of the airbag either as to whether or not it should be deployed at all, the time of deployment and/or the rate of inflation and/or deflation.

Such a system can also be used to positively identify or confirm the presence of a rear facing child seat in the vehicle, if the child seat is equipped with a resonator. In this case, a resonator 18 is placed on the forward most portion of the child seat, or in some other convenient position, as shown in FIG. 1. The resonator 18, or other type of signal generating device, such as an RFID tag, which generates a signal upon excitation, e.g., by a transmitted energy signal, can be used not only to determine the orientation of the child seat but also to determine the position of the child seat (in essentially the same manner as described above with respect to determining the position of the seat and the position of the seatbelt).

The determination of the presence of a child seat can be used to affect another system in the vehicle. Most importantly, deployment of an occupant restraint device can be controlled depending on whether a child seat is present. Control of the occupant restraint device may entail suppression of deployment of the device. If the occupant restraint device is an airbag, e.g., a frontal airbag or a side airbag, control of the airbag deployment may entail not only suppression of the deployment but also depowered deployment, adjustment of the orientation of the airbag, adjustment of the inflation rate or inflation time and/or adjustment of the deflation rate or time.

Several systems are in development for determining the location of an occupant and modifying the deployment of the airbag based of his or her position. These systems are called “smart airbags”. The passive seat control system in accordance with at least one of the inventions disclosed herein can also be used for this purpose as illustrated in FIG. 28. This figure shows an inflated airbag 352 and an arrangement for controlling both the flow of gas into and out of the airbag during a crash. The determination is made based on height sensors 353, 354 and 355 (FIG. 49) located in the headrest, a weight sensor 252 in the seat and the location of the seat which is known by control circuit 254. Other smart airbags systems rely only on the position of the occupant determined from various position sensors using ultrasonics or optical sensors, or equivalent.

The weight sensor coupled with the height sensor and the occupant's velocity relative to the vehicle, as determined by the occupant position sensors, provides information as to the amount of energy that the airbag will need to absorb during the impact of the occupant with the airbag. This, along with the location of the occupant relative to the airbag, is then used to determine the amount of gas that is to be injected into the airbag during deployment and the size of the exit orifices that control the rate of energy dissipation as the occupant is interacting with the airbag during the crash. For example, if an occupant is particularly heavy then it is desirable to increase the amount of gas, and thus the initial pressure, in the airbag to accommodate the larger force which will be required to arrest the relative motion of the occupant. Also, the size of the exit orifices should be reduced, since there will be a larger pressure tending to force the gas out of the orifices, in order to prevent the bag from bottoming out before the occupant's relative velocity is arrested. Similarly, for a small occupant the initial pressure would be reduced and the size of the exit orifices increased. If, on the other hand, the occupant is already close to the airbag then the amount of gas injected into the airbag will need to be reduced.

Another and preferred approach is to incorporate an accelerometer into the seatbelt or the airbag surface and to measure the deceleration of the occupant and to control the outflow of gas from the airbag to maintain the occupant's chest acceleration below some maximum value such as 40 Gs. This maximum value can be set based on the forecasted severity of the crash. If the occupant is wearing a seatbelt the outflow from the airbag can be significantly reduced since the seatbelt is taking up most of the load and the airbag then should be used to help spread the load over more of the occupant's chest. Although the pressure in the airbag is one indication of the deceleration being imparted to the occupant it is a relatively crude measure since it does not take into account the mass of the occupant. Since it is acceleration that should be controlled it is better to measure acceleration rather than pressure in the airbag.

There are many ways of varying the amount of gas injected into the airbag some of which are covered in the patent literature and include, for example, inflators where the amount of gas generated and the rate of generation is controllable. For example, in a particular hybrid inflator once manufactured by the Allied Signal Corporation, two pyrotechnic charges are available to heat the stored gas in the inflator. Either or both of the pyrotechnic charges can be ignited and the timing between the ignitions can be controlled to significantly vary the rate of gas flow to the airbag.

The flow of gas out of the airbag is traditionally done through fixed diameter orifices placed in the bag fabric. Some attempts have been made to provide a measure of control through such measures as blowout patches applied to the exterior of the airbag. Other systems were disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/541,464 filed Feb. 9, 1989, now abandoned.

FIG. 28A illustrates schematically an inflator 357 generating gas to fill airbag 352 through control valve 358. If the control valve 358 is closed while a pyrotechnic generator is operating, provision must be made to store or dump the gas being generated so to prevent the inflator from failing from excess pressure. The flow of gas out of airbag 352 is controlled by exit control valve 359. The exit valve 359 can be implemented in many different ways including, for example, a motor operated valve located adjacent the inflator and in fluid communication with the airbag or a digital flow control valve as discussed elsewhere herein. When control circuit 254 (FIG. 49) determines the size and weight of the occupant, the seat position and the relative velocity of the occupant, it then determines the appropriate opening for the exit valve 359, which is coupled to the control circuit 254. A signal is then sent from control circuit 254 to the motor controlling this valve which provides the proper opening.

Consider, for example, the case of a vehicle that impacts with a pole or brush in front of a barrier. The crash sensor system may deduce that this is a low velocity crash and only initiate the first inflator charge. Then as the occupant is moving close to the airbag the barrier is struck but it may now be too late to get the benefit of the second charge. For this case, a better solution might be to always generate the maximum amount of gas but to store the excess in a supplemental chamber until it is needed.

In a like manner, other parameters can also be adjusted, such as the direction of the airbag, by properly positioning the angle and location of the steering wheel relative to the driver. If seatbelt pretensioners are used, the amount of tension in the seatbelt or the force at which the seatbelt spools out, for the case of force limiters, could also be adjusted based on the occupant morphological characteristics determined by the system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. The force measured on the seatbelt, if the vehicle deceleration is known, gives a confirmation of the mass of the occupant. This force measurement can also be used to control the chest acceleration given to the occupant to minimize injuries caused by the seatbelt. Naturally, as discussed above, it is better to measure the acceleration of the chest directly.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, transmitter/receiver assemblies 49, 50, 51 and 54 emit infrared waves that reflect off of the head and chest of the driver and return thereto. Periodically, the device, as commanded by control circuitry 20, transmits a pulse of infrared waves and the reflected signal is detected by the same (i.e. the LEDs and imager are in the same housing) or a different device. The transmitters can either transmit simultaneously or sequentially. An associated electronic circuit and algorithm in control circuitry 20 processes the returned signals as discussed above and determines the location of the occupant in the passenger compartment. This information is then sent to the crash sensor and diagnostic circuitry, which may also be resident in control circuitry 20 (programmed within a control module), which determines if the occupant is close enough to the airbag that a deployment might, by itself, cause injury which exceeds that which might be caused by the accident itself. In such a case, the circuit disables the airbag system and thereby prevents its deployment.

In an alternate case, the sensor algorithm assesses the probability that a crash requiring an airbag is in process and waits until that probability exceeds an amount that is dependent on the position of the occupant. Thus, for example, the sensor might decide to deploy the airbag based on a need probability assessment of 50%, if the decision must be made immediately for an occupant approaching the airbag, but might wait until the probability rises above 95% for a more distant occupant. In the alternative, the crash sensor and diagnostic circuitry optionally resident in control circuitry 20 may tailor the parameters of the deployment (time to initiation of deployment, rate of inflation, rate of deflation, deployment time, etc.) based on the current position and possibly velocity of the occupant, for example a depowered deployment.

In another implementation, the sensor algorithm may determine the rate that gas is generated to affect the rate that the airbag is inflated. One method of controlling the gas generation rate is to control the pressure in the inflator combustion chamber. The higher the internal pressure the faster gas is generated. Once a method of controlling the gas combustion pressure is implemented, the capability exists to significantly reduce the variation in inflator properties with temperature. At lower temperatures the pressure control system would increase the pressure in the combustion chamber and at higher ambient temperatures it would reduce the pressure. In all of these cases, the position of the occupant can be used to affect the deployment of the airbag as to whether or not it should be deployed at all, the time of deployment and/or the rate of inflation.

The applications described herein have been illustrated using the driver and sometimes the passenger of the vehicle. The same systems of determining the position of the occupant relative to the airbag apply to a driver, front and rear seated passengers, sometimes requiring minor modifications. It is likely that the sensor required triggering time based on the position of the occupant will be different for the driver than for the passenger. Current systems are based primarily on the driver with the result that the probability of injury to the passenger is necessarily increased either by deploying the airbag too late or by failing to deploy the airbag when the position of the driver would not warrant it but the passenger's position would. With the use of occupant position sensors for the passenger and driver, the airbag system can be individually optimized for each occupant and result in further significant injury reduction. In particular, either the driver or passenger system can be disabled if either the driver or passenger is out-of-position or if the passenger seat is unoccupied.

There is almost always a driver present in vehicles that are involved in accidents where an airbag is needed. Only about 30% of these vehicles, however, have a passenger. If the passenger is not present, there is usually no need to deploy the passenger side airbag. The occupant monitoring system, when used for the passenger side with proper pattern recognition circuitry, can also ascertain whether or not the seat is occupied, and if not, can disable the deployment of the passenger side airbag and thereby save the cost of its replacement. The same strategy applies also for monitoring the rear seat of the vehicle. Also, a trainable pattern recognition system, as used herein, can distinguish between an occupant and a bag of groceries, for example. Finally, there has been much written about the out-of-position child who is standing or otherwise positioned adjacent to the airbag, perhaps due to pre-crash braking. The occupant position sensor described herein can prevent the deployment of the airbag in this situation as well as in the situation of a rear facing child seat as described above.

Naturally as discussed elsewhere herein, occupant sensors can also be used for monitoring the rear seats of the vehicle for the purpose, among others, of controlling airbag or other restraint deployment.

7.2 Seat, Seatbelt, Steering Wheel and Pedal Adjustment

Let us now consider the adjustment of a seat to adapt to an occupant. First some measurements of the morphological properties of the occupant are necessary. The first characteristic considered is a measurement of the height of the occupant from the vehicle seat. This can be done by a sensor in the ceiling of the vehicle but this becomes difficult since, even for the same seat location, the head of the occupant will not be at the same angle with respect to the seat and therefore the angle to a ceiling mounted sensor is in general unknown at least as long as only one ceiling mounted sensor is used. This problem can be solved if two or three sensors are used as described in more detail below. The simplest implementation is to place the sensor in the seat. In U.S. Pat. No. 5,694,320, a rear impact occupant protection apparatus is disclosed which uses sensors mounted within the headrest. This same system can also be used to measure the height of the occupant from the seat and thus, for no additional cost assuming the rear impact occupant protection system described in the '320 patent is provided, the first measure of the occupant's morphology can be achieved. See also FIGS. 24 and 25. For some applications, this may be sufficient since it is unlikely that two operators will use the vehicle that both have the same height. For other implementations, one or more additional measurements are used. Naturally, a face, fingerprint, voiceprint or iris recognition system will have the least problem identifying a previous occupant.

Referring now to FIG. 24, an automatic adjustment system for adjusting a seat (which is being used only as an example of a vehicle component) is shown generally at 371 with a movable headrest 356 and ultrasonic sensors 353, 354 and 355 for measuring the height of the occupant of the seat. Other types of wave, energy or radiation receiving sensors may also be used in the invention instead of the ultrasonic transmitter/receiver set 353, 354, 355. Power means such as motors 371, 372, and 373 connected to the seat for moving the base of the seat, control means such as a control circuit, system or module 254 connected to the motors and a headrest actuation mechanism using servomotors 374 and 375, which may be servomotors, are also illustrated. The seat 4 and headrest 356 are shown in phantom. Vertical motion of the headrest 356 is accomplished when a signal is sent from control module 254 to servomotor 374 through a wire 376. Servomotor 374 rotates lead screw 377 which engages with a threaded hole in member 378 causing it to move up or down depending on the direction of rotation of the lead screw 377. Headrest support rods 379 and 380 are attached to member 378 and cause the headrest 356 to translate up or down with member 378. In this manner, the vertical position of the headrest can be controlled as depicted by arrow A-A. Ultrasonic transmitters and receivers 353, 354, 355 may be replaced by other appropriate wave-generating and receiving devices, such as electromagnetic, active infrared transmitters and receivers, and capacitance sensors and electric field sensors.

Wire 381 leads from control module 254 to servomotor 375 which rotates lead screw 382. Lead screw 382 engages with a threaded hole in shaft 383 which is attached to supporting structures within the seat shown in phantom. The rotation of lead screw 382 rotates servo motor support 384, upon which servomotor 374 is situated, which in turn rotates headrest support rods 379 and 380 in slots 385 and 386 in the seat 4. Rotation of the servomotor support 384 is facilitated by a rod 387 upon which the servo motor support 384 is positioned. In this manner, the headrest 356 is caused to move in the fore and aft direction as depicted by arrow B-B. Naturally there are other designs which accomplish the same effect in moving the headrest up and down and fore and aft.

The operation of the system is as follows. When an adult or child occupant is seated on a seat containing the headrest and control system described above as determined by the neural network 65, the ultrasonic transmitters 353, 354 and 355 emit ultrasonic energy which reflects off of the head of the occupant and is received by the same transducers. An electronic circuit in control module 254 contains a microprocessor which determines the distance from the head of the occupant based on the time between the transmission and reception of the ultrasonic pulses. In the embodiment wherein capacitance or electric field sensors are used instead of ultrasonic transducers, the manner in which the distance can be determined using such sensors is known to those skilled in the art.

Control module 254 may be within the same microprocessor as neural network 65 or separate therefrom. The headrest 356 moves up and down until it finds the top of the head and then the vertical position closest to the head of the occupant and then remains at that position. Based on the time delay between transmission and reception of an ultrasonic pulse, the system can also determine the longitudinal distance from the headrest to the occupant's head. Since the head may not be located precisely in line with the ultrasonic sensors, or the occupant may be wearing a hat, coat with a high collar, or may have a large hairdo, there may be some error in this longitudinal measurement.

When an occupant sits on seat 4, the headrest 356 moves to find the top of the occupant's head as discussed above. This is accomplished using an algorithm and a microprocessor which is part of control circuit 254. The headrest 356 then moves to the optimum location for rear impact protection as described in the above referenced '320 patent. Once the height of the occupant has been measured, another algorithm in the microprocessor in control circuit 254 compares the occupant's measured height with a table representing the population as a whole and from this table, the appropriate positions for the seat corresponding to the occupant's height is selected. For example, if the occupant measured 33 inches from the top of the seat bottom, this might correspond to an 85% human, depending on the particular seat and statistical table of human measurements.

Careful study of each particular vehicle model provides the data for the table of the location of the seat to properly position the eyes of the occupant within the “eye-ellipse”, the steering wheel within a comfortable reach of the occupant's hands and the pedals within a comfortable reach of the occupant's feet, based on his or her size, etc. Of course one or more pedals can be manually adjusted providing they are provided with an actuator such as an electric motor and any such adjustment, either manual or automatic, is contemplated by the inventions disclosed herein.

Once the proper position has been determined by control circuit 254, signals are sent to motors 371, 372, and 373 to move the seat to that position, if such movement is necessary. That is, it is possible that the seat will be in the proper position so that movement of the seat is not required. As such, the position of the motors 371,372,373 and/or the position of the seat prior to occupancy by the occupant may be stored in memory so that after occupancy by the occupant and determination of the desired position of the seat, a comparison is made to determine whether the desired position of the seat deviates from the current position of the seat. If not, movement of the seat is not required. Otherwise, the signals are sent by the control circuit 254 to the motors. In this case, control circuit 254 would encompass a seat controller.

Instead of adjusting the seat to position the driver in an optimum driving position, or for use when adjusting the seat of a passenger, it is possible to perform the adjustment with a view toward optimizing the actuation or deployment of an occupant protection or restraint device. For example, after obtaining one or more morphological characteristics of the occupant, the processor can analyze them and determine one or more preferred positions of the seat, with the position of the seat being related to the position of the occupant, so that if the occupant protection device is deployed, the occupant will be in an advantageous position to be protected against injury by such deployment. In this case then, the seat is adjusted based on the morphology of the occupant view a view toward optimizing deployment of the occupant protection device. The processor is provided in a training or programming stage with the preferred seat positions for different morphologies of occupants.

Movement of the seat can take place either immediately upon the occupant sitting in the seat or immediately prior to a crash requiring deployment of the occupant protection device. In the latter case, if an anticipatory sensing arrangement is used, the seat can be positioned immediately prior to the impact, much in a similar manner as the headrest is adjusted for a rear impact as disclosed in the '320 patent referenced above.

If during some set time period after the seat has been positioned, the operator changes these adjustments, the new positions of the seat are stored in association with an occupant height class in a second table within control circuit 254. When the occupant again occupies the seat and his or her height has once again been determined, the control circuit 254 will find an entry in the second table which takes precedence over the basic, original table and the seat returns to the adjusted position. When the occupant leaves the vehicle, or even when the engine is shut off and the door opened, the seat can be returned to a neutral position which provides for easy entry and exit from the vehicle.

The seat 4 also contains two control switch assemblies 388 and 389 for manually controlling the position of the seat 4 and headrest 356. The seat control switches 388 permits the occupant to adjust the position of the seat if he or she is dissatisfied with the position selected by the algorithm. The headrest control switches 389 permit the occupant to adjust the position of the headrest in the event that the calculated position is uncomfortably close to or far from the occupant's head. A woman with a large hairdo might find that the headrest automatically adjusts so as to contact her hairdo. This adjustment she might find annoying and could then position the headrest further from her head. For those vehicles which have a seat memory system for associating the seat position with a particular occupant, which has been assumed above, the position of the headrest relative to the occupant's head could also be recorded. Later, when the occupant enters the vehicle, and the seat automatically adjusts to the recorded preference, the headrest will similarly automatically adjust as diagrammed in FIGS. 29A and 29B.

The height of the occupant, although probably the best initial morphological characteristic, may not be sufficient especially for distinguishing one driver from another when they are approximately the same height. A second characteristic, the occupant's weight, can also be readily determined from sensors mounted within the seat in a variety of ways as shown in FIG. 18 which is a perspective view of the seat shown in FIG. 24 with a displacement or weight sensor 159 shown mounted onto the seat.

Displacement sensor 159 is supported from supports 165. In general, displacement sensor 164, or another non-displacement sensor, measures a physical state of a component affected by the occupancy of the seat. An occupying item of the seat will cause a force to be exerted downward and the magnitude of this force is representative of the weight of the occupying item. Thus, by measuring this force, information about the weight of the occupying item can be obtained. A physical state may be any force changed by the occupancy of the seat and which is reflected in the component, e.g., strain of a component, compression of a component, tension of a component. Naturally other weight measuring systems as described herein and elsewhere including bladders and strain gages can be used.

An alternative approach is to measure the load on the vehicle suspension system while the vehicle is at rest (static) or when it is in motion (dynamic). The normal empty state of the vehicle can be determined when the vehicle is at rest for a prolonged time period. After then the number and location of occupying items can be determined by measuring the increased load on the suspension devices that attach the vehicle body to its frame. SAW strain measuring elements can be placed on each suspension spring, for example, and used to measure the increased load on the vehicle as an object or occupant is placed in the vehicle. This approach has the advantage that it is not affected by seatbelt loadings, for example. If the vehicle is monitored as each item is paced in the vehicle a characterization of that item can be made. The taking on of fuel, for example, will correspond to a particular loading pattern over time that will permit the identification of the amount of the weight on the suspension that can be attributed to fuel. Dynamic measuring systems are similar to those used in section 6.3 and thus will not be repeated here.

The system described above is based on the assumption that the occupant will be satisfied with one seat position throughout an extended driving trip. Studies have shown that for extended travel periods that the comfort of the driver can be improved through variations in the seat position. This variability can be handled in several ways. For example, the amount and type of variation preferred by an occupant of the particular morphology can be determined through case studies and focus groups. If it is found, for example, that the 50 percentile male driver prefers the seat back angle to vary by 5 degrees sinusodially with a one-hour period, this can be programmed to the system. Since the system knows the morphology of the driver it can decide from a lookup table what is the best variability for the average driver of that morphology. The driver then can select from several preferred possibilities if, for example, he or she wishes to have the seat back not move at all or follow an excursion of 10 degrees over two hours.

This system provides an identification of the driver based on two morphological characteristics which is adequate for most cases. As additional features of the vehicle interior identification and monitoring system described in the above referenced patent applications are implemented, it will be possible to obtain additional morphological measurements of the driver which will provide even greater accuracy in driver identification. Such additional measurements include iris scans, voice prints, face recognition, fingerprints, voiceprints hand or palm prints etc. Two characteristics may not be sufficient to rely on for theft and security purposes, however, many other driver preferences can still be added to seat position with this level of occupant recognition accuracy. These include the automatic selection of a preferred radio station, pedal position, vehicle temperature, steering wheel and steering column position, etc.

One advantage of using only the height and weight is that it avoids the necessity of the seat manufacturer from having to interact with the headliner manufacturer, or other component suppliers, since all of the measuring transducers are in the seat. This two characteristic system is generally sufficient to distinguish drivers that normally drive a particular vehicle. This system costs little more than the memory systems now in use and is passive, i.e., it does not require action on the part of the occupant after his initial adjustment has been made.

Instead of measuring the height and weight of the occupant, it is also possible to measure a combination of any two morphological characteristics and during a training phase, derive a relationship between the occupancy of the seat, e.g., adult occupant, child occupant, etc., and the data of the two morphological characteristic. This relationship may be embodied within a neural network so that during use, by measuring the two morphological characteristics, the occupancy of the seat can be determined.

Naturally, there are other methods of measuring the height of the driver such as placing the transducers at other locations in the vehicle. Some alternatives are shown in other figures herein and include partial side images of the occupant and ultrasonic transducers positioned on or near the vehicle headliner. These transducers may already be present because of other implementations of the vehicle interior identification and monitoring system described in the above referenced patent applications. The use of several transducers provides a more accurate determination of location of the head of the driver. When using a headliner mounted sensor alone, the exact position of the head is ambiguous since the transducer measures the distance to the head regardless of what direction the head is. By knowing the distance from the head to another headliner mounted transducer the ambiguity is substantially reduced. This argument is of course dependent on the use of ultrasonic transducers. Optical transducers using CCD, CMOS or equivalent arrays are now becoming price competitive and, as pointed out in the above referenced patent applications, will be the technology of choice for interior vehicle monitoring. A single CMOS array of 160 by 160 pixels, for example, coupled with the appropriate pattern recognition software, can be used to form an image of the head of an occupant and accurately locate the head for the purposes of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. It can also be used with a face recognition algorithm to positively identify the occupant.

FIG. 31 also illustrates a system where the seatbelt 27 has an adjustable upper anchorage point 390 which is automatically adjusted by a motor 391 to a location optimized based on the height of the occupant. In this system, infrared transmitter and CCD array receivers 6 and 9 are positioned in a convenient location proximate the occupant's shoulder, such as in connection with the headliner, above and usually to the outside of the occupant's shoulder. An appropriate pattern recognition system, as may be resident in control circuitry 20 to which the receivers 6 and 9 are coupled, as described above is then used to determine the location and position of the shoulder. This information is provided by control circuitry 20 to the seatbelt anchorage height adjustment system 391 (through a conventional coupling arrangement), shown schematically, which moves the attachment point 390 of the seatbelt 27 to the optimum vertical location for the proper placement of the seatbelt 27.

The calculations for this feature and the appropriate control circuitry can also be located in control module 20 or elsewhere if appropriate. Seatbelts are most effective when the upper attachment point to the vehicle is positioned vertically close to the shoulder of the occupant being restrained. If the attachment point is too low, the occupant experiences discomfort from the rubbing of the belt on his or her shoulder. If it is too high, the occupant may experience discomfort due to the rubbing of the belt against his or her neck and the occupant will move forward by a greater amount during a crash which may result in his or her head striking the steering wheel. For these reasons, it is desirable to have the upper seatbelt attachment point located slightly above the occupant's shoulder. To accomplish this for various sized occupants, the location of the occupant's shoulder should be known, which can be accomplished by the vehicle interior monitoring system described herein.

Many luxury automobiles today have the ability to control the angle of the seat back as well as a lumbar support. These additional motions of the seat can also be controlled by the seat adjustment system in accordance with the invention. FIG. 32 is a view of the seat of FIG. 24 showing motors 392 and 393 for changing the tilt of the seat back and the lumbar support. Three motors 393 are used to adjust the lumbar support in this implementation. The same procedure is used for these additional motions as described for FIG. 24 above.

An initial table is provided based on the optimum positions for various segments of the population. For example, for some applications the table may contain a setting value for each five percentile of the population for each of the 6 possible seat motions, fore and aft, up and down, total seat tilt, seat back angle, lumbar position, and headrest position for a total of 120 table entries. The second table similarly would contain the personal preference modified values of the 6 positions desired by a particular driver.

The angular resolution of a transducer is proportional to the ratio of the wavelength to the diameter of the transmitter. Once three transmitters and receivers are used, the approximate equivalent single transmitter and receiver is one which has a diameter approximately equal to the shortest distance between any pair of transducers. In this case, the equivalent diameter is equal to the distance between transmitter 354 or 355 and 353. This provides far greater resolution and, by controlling the phase between signals sent by the transmitters, the direction of the equivalent ultrasonic beam can be controlled. Thus, the head of the driver can be scanned with great accuracy and a map made of the occupant's head. Using this technology plus an appropriate pattern recognition algorithm, such as a neural network, an accurate location of the driver's head can be found even when the driver's head is partially obscured by a hat, coat, or hairdo. This also provides at least one other identification morphological characteristic which can be used to further identify the occupant, namely the diameter of the driver's head.

In an automobile, there is an approximately fixed vertical distance between the optimum location of the occupant's eyes and the location of the pedals. The distant from a driver's eyes to his or her feet, on the other hand, is not the same for all people. An individual driver now compensates for this discrepancy by moving the seat and by changing the angle between his or hers legs and body. For both small and large drivers, this discrepancy cannot be fully compensated for and as a result, their eyes are not appropriately placed. A similar problem exists with the steering wheel. To help correct these problems, the pedals and steering column should be movable as illustrated in FIG. 33 which is a plan view similar to that of FIG. 31 showing a driver and driver seat with an automatically adjustable steering column and pedal system which is adjusted based on the morphology of the driver.

In FIG. 33, a motor 394 is connected to and controls the position of the steering column and another motor 395 is connected to and controls the position of the pedals. Both motors 394 and 395 are coupled to and controlled by control circuit 254 wherein now the basic table of settings includes values for both the pedals and steering column locations.

The settings may be determined through experimentation or empirically by determining an optimum position of the pedals and steering wheel for drivers having different morphologies, i.e., different heights, different leg lengths, etc.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, the morphology determination system 430 determines one or more physical properties or characteristics of the driver 30 which would affect the position of the steering column, e.g., leg length, height, and arm length. The determination of these properties may be obtained in any of the manners disclosed herein. For example, height may be determined using the system shown in FIG. 24. Leg length and arm length may be determined by measuring the weight, height, etc of the driver and then using a table to obtain an estimated or average leg length or arm length based on the measured properties. In the latter case, the control circuit 431 could obtain the measurements and include data for the leg length and arm length, or would include data on the position of the steering wheel for the measured driver, i.e., the table of settings.

In either case, the control system 431 is provided with the setting for the steering wheel and if necessary, directs the motor 394 to move the steering wheel to the desired position. Movement of the steering wheel is thus provided in a totally automatic manner without manual intervention by the driver, either, by adjusting a knob on the steering wheel or by depressing a button.

Although movement of the steering wheel is shown here as being controlled by a motor 394 that moves the steering column fore and aft, other methods are sometimes used in various vehicles such as changing the tilt angle of the steering column or the tilt angle of the steering wheel. Naturally, motors can be provided that cause these other motions and are contemplated by at least one of the inventions disclosed herein as is any other method that controls the position of the steering wheel. For example, FIG. 33B shows a schematic of a motor 429 which may be used to control the tilt angle of the steering wheel relative to the steering column.

Regardless of which motor or motors are used, the invention contemplates the adjustment or movement of the steering wheel relative to the front console of the vehicle and thus relative to the driver of the vehicle. This movement may be directly effective on the steering wheel (via motor 429) or effective on the steering column and thus indirectly effective on the steering wheel since movement of the steering column will cause movement of the steering wheel. Additionally when the ignition is turned off the steering wheel and column and any other adjustable device or component can be automatically moved to a more out of the way position to permit easier ingress and egress from the vehicle, for example.

The steering wheel adjustment feature may be designed to be activated upon detection of the presence of an object on the driver's seat. Thus, when a driver's first sits on the seat, the sensors could be designed to initiate measurement of the driver's morphology and then control the motor or motors to adjust the steering wheel, if such adjustment is deemed necessary. This is because an adjustment in the position of the steering wheel is usually not required during the course of driving but is generally only required when a driver first sits in the seat. The detection of the presence of the driver may be achieved using the weight sensors and/or other presence detection means, such as using the wave-based sensors, capacitance sensors, electric field sensors, etc.

The eye ellipse discussed above is illustrated at 358 in FIG. 34, which is a view showing the occupant's eyes and the seat adjusted to place the eyes at a particular vertical position for proper viewing through the windshield and rear view mirror. Many systems are now under development to improve vehicle safety and driving ease. For example, night vision systems are being sold which project an enhanced image of the road ahead of the vehicle onto the windshield in a “heads-up display”. The main problem with the systems now being sold is that the projected image does not precisely overlap the image as seen through the windshield. This parallax causes confusion in the driver and can only be corrected if the location of the driver's eyes is accurately known. One method of solving this problem is to use the passive seat adjustment system described herein to place the occupant's eyes at the optimum location as described above. Once this has been accomplished, in addition to solving the parallax problem, the eyes are properly located with respect to the rear view mirror 55 and little if any adjustment is required in order for the driver to have the proper view of what is behind the vehicle. Currently the problem is solved by projecting the heads-up display onto a different portion of the windshield, the bottom.

Although it has been described herein that the seat can be automatically adjusted to place the driver's eyes in the “eye-ellipse”, there are many manual methods that can be implemented with feedback to the driver telling him or her when his or her eyes are properly position. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein is not limited by the use of automatic methods.

Once the morphology of the driver and the seat position is known, many other objects in the vehicle can be automatically adjusted to conform to the occupant. An automatically adjustable seat armrest, a cup holder, the cellular phone, or any other objects with which the driver interacts can be now moved to accommodate the driver. This is in addition to the personal preference items such as the radio station, temperature, etc. discussed above.

Once the system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is implemented, additional features become possible such as a seat which automatically makes slight adjustments to help alleviate fatigue or to account for a change of position of the driver in the seat, or a seat which automatically changes position slightly based on the time of day. Many people prefer to sit more upright when driving at night, for example. Other similar improvements based on knowledge of the occupant morphology will now become obvious to those skilled in the art.

FIG. 30 shows a flow chart of one manner in the arrangement and method for controlling a vehicle component in accordance with the invention functions. A measurement of the morphology of the occupant 30 is performed at 396, i.e., one or more morphological characteristics are measured in any of the ways described above. The position of the seat portion 4 is obtained at 397 and both the measured morphological characteristic of the occupant 30 and the position of the seat portion 4 are forwarded to the control system 400. The control system considers these parameters and determines the manner in which the component 401 should be controlled or adjusted, and even whether any adjustment is necessary.

Preferably, seat adjustment means 398 are provided to enable automatic adjustment of the seat portion 4. If so, the current position of the seat portion 4 is stored in memory means 399 (which may be a previously adjusted position) and additional seat adjustment, if any, is determined by the control system 400 to direct the seat adjustment means 398 to move the seat. The seat portion 4 may be moved alone, i.e., considered as the component, or adjusted together with another component, i.e., considered separate from the component (represented by way of the dotted line in FIG. 30).

Although several preferred embodiments are illustrated and described above, there are other possible combinations using different sensors which measure either the same or different morphological characteristics, such as knee position, of an occupant to accomplish the same or similar goals as those described herein.

It should be mentioned that the adjustment system may be used in conjunction with each vehicle seat. In this case, if a seat is determined to be unoccupied, then the processor means may be designed to adjust the seat for the benefit of other occupants, i.e., if a front passenger side seat is unoccupied but the rear passenger side seat is occupied, then adjustment system could adjust the front seat for the benefit of the rear-seated passenger, e.g., move the seat base forward.

In additional embodiments, the present invention involves the measurement of one or more morphological characteristics of a vehicle occupant and the use of these measurements to classify the occupant as to size and weight, and then to use this classification to position a vehicle component, such as the seat, to a near optimum position for that class of occupant. Additional information concerning occupant preferences can also be associated with the occupant class so that when a person belonging to that particular class occupies the vehicle, the preferences associated with that class are implemented. These preferences and associated component adjustments include the seat location after it has been manually adjusted away from the position chosen initially by the system, the mirror location, temperature, radio station, steering wheel and steering column positions, pedal positions etc. The preferred morphological characteristics used are the occupant height from the vehicle seat, weight of the occupant and facial features. The height is determined by sensors, usually ultrasonic or electromagnetic, located in the headrest, headliner or another convenient location. The weight is determined by one of a variety of technologies that measure either pressure on or displacement of the vehicle seat or the force in the seat supporting structure. The facial features are determined by image analysis comprising an imager such as a CCD or CMOS camera plus additional hardware and software.

The eye tracker systems discussed above are facilitated by at least one of the inventions disclosed herein since one of the main purposes of determining the location of the driver's eyes either by directly locating them with trained pattern recognition technology or by inferring their location from the location of the driver's head, is so that the seat can be automatically positioned to place the driver's eyes into the “eye-ellipse”. The eye-ellipse is the proper location for the driver's eyes to permit optimal operation of the vehicle and for the location of the mirrors etc. Thus, if the location of the driver's eyes are known, then the driver can be positioned so that his or her eyes are precisely situated in the eye ellipse and the reflection off of the eye can be monitored with a small eye tracker system. Also, by ascertaining the location of the driver's eyes, a rear view mirror positioning device can be controlled to adjust the mirror 55 to an optimal position. See section 6.5.

7.3 Rear Impacts

Rear impact protection is also discussed elsewhere herein. A rear-of-head detector is illustrated in FIG. 24. This detector, which can be one of the types described above, is used to determine the distance from the headrest to the rearmost position of the occupant's head and to therefore control the position of the headrest so that it is properly positioned behind the occupant's head to offer optimum support during a rear impact. Although the headrest of most vehicles is adjustable, it is rare for an occupant to position it properly if at all. Each year there are in excess of 400,000 whiplash injuries in vehicle impacts approximately 90,000 of which are from rear impacts (source: National Highway Traffic Safety Admin.). A properly positioned headrest could substantially reduce the frequency of such injuries, which can be accomplished by the head detector of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. The head detector is connected to the headrest control mechanism and circuitry. This mechanism is capable of moving the headrest up and down and, in some cases, rotating it fore and aft.

7.4 Monitoring of Other Vehicles Such as Cargo Containers, Truck Trailers and Railroad Cars

7.4.1 Monitoring the Interior Contents of a Shipping Container, Trailer, Boat, Shed, etc.

Commercial systems are now available from companies such as Skybitz Inc. 45365 Vintage Park Plaza, Suite 210, Dulles, Va. 20166-6700, which will monitor the location of an asset anywhere on the surface of the earth. Each monitored asset contains a low cost GPS receiver and a satellite communication system. The system can be installed onto a truck, trailer, container, or other asset and it well periodically communicate with a low earth orbit (LEO) or a geostationary satellite providing the satellite with its location as determined by the GPS receiver or a similar system such as the Skybitz Global Locating System (GLS). The entire system operates off of a battery, for example, and if the system transmits information to the satellite once per day, the battery can last many years before requiring replacement. Thus, the system can monitor the location of a trailer, for example, once per day, which is sufficient if trailer is stationary. The interrogation rate can be automatically increased if the trailer begins moving. Such a system can last for 2 to 10 years without requiring maintenance depending on design, usage and the environment. Even longer periods are possible if power is periodically or occasionally available to recharge the battery such as by vibration energy harvesting, solar cells, capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, RF or vehicle power. In some cases an ultracapacitor as discussed above can be used in place of a battery.

The Skybitz system by itself only provides information as to the location of a container and not information about its contents, environment, and/or other properties. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein disclosed here is intended to provide this additional information, which can be coded typically into a few bytes and sent to the satellite along with the container location information and identification. First consider monitoring of the interior contents of a container. From here on, the terms “shipping container” or “container” will be used as a generic cargo holder and will include all cargo holders including standard and non-standard containers, boats, trucks, trailers, sheds, warehouses, storage facilities, tanks, buildings or any other such object that has space and can hold cargo. Most of these “containers” are also vehicles as defined above.

One method of monitoring the space inside such a container is to use ultrasound such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,653,462, U.S. Pat. No. 5,829,782, U.S. RE37260 (a reissue of U.S. Pat. No. 5,943,295), U.S. Pat. No. 5,901,978, U.S. Pat. No. 6,116,639, U.S. Pat. No. 6,186,537, U.S. Pat. No. 6,234,520, U.S. Pat. No. 6,254,127, U.S. Pat. No. 6,270,117, U.S. Pat. No. 6,283,503, U.S. Pat. No. 6,341,798, U.S. Pat. No. 6,397,136 and RE 37,260 for monitoring the interior of a vehicle. Also, reference is made to U.S. Pat. No. 6,279,946, which discusses various ways to use an ultrasonic transducer while compensating for thermal gradients. Reference is also made to U.S. Pat. No. 5,653,462, U.S. Pat. No. 5,694,320, U.S. Pat. No. 5,822,707, U.S. Pat. No. 5,829,782, U.S. Pat. No. 5,835,613, U.S. Pat. No. 5,485,000, U.S. Pat. No. 5,488,802, U.S. Pat. No. 5,901,978, U.S. Pat. No. 6,309,139, U.S. Pat. No. 6,078,854, U.S. Pat. No. 6,081,757, U.S. Pat. No. 6,088,640, U.S. Pat. No. 6,116,639, U.S. Pat. No. 6,134,492, U.S. Pat. No. 6,141,432, U.S. Pat. No. 6,168,198, U.S. Pat. No. 6,186,537, U.S. Pat. No. 6,234,519, U.S. Pat. No. 6,234,520, U.S. Pat. No. 0,242,701, U.S. Pat. No. 6,253,134, U.S. Pat. No. 6,254,127, U.S. Pat. No. 6,270,116, U.S. Pat. No. 6,279,946, U.S. Pat. No. 6,283,503, U.S. Pat. No. 6,324,453, U.S. Pat. No. 6,325,414, U.S. Pat. No. 6,330,501, U.S. Pat. No. 6,331,014, RE37260 U.S. Pat. No. 6,393,133, U.S. Pat. No. 60,397,136, U.S. Pat. No. 6,412,813, U.S. Pat. No. 6,422,595, U.S. Pat. No. 6,452,870, U.S. Pat. No. 6,442,504, U.S. Pat. No. 6,445,988, U.S. Pat. No. 6,442,465, which disclose inventions that may be incorporated into the invention(s) disclosed herein.

Consider now a standard shipping container that is used for shipping cargo by boat, trailer, or railroad. Such containers are nominally 8′w×8′h×20′ or 40′ long outside dimensions, however, a container 48′ in length is also sometimes used. The inside dimensions are frequently around 4″ less than the outside dimensions. In a simple interior container monitoring system, one or more ultrasonic transducers can be mounted on an interior part of the container adjacent the container's ceiling in a protective housing. Periodically, the ultrasonic transducers can emit a few cycles of ultrasound and receive reflected echoes of this ultrasound from walls and contents of the trailer. In some cases, especially for long containers, one or more transducers, typically at one end of the container, can send to one or more transducers located at, for example, the opposite end. Usually, however, the transmitters and receivers are located near each other. Due to the long distance that the ultrasound waves must travel especially in the 48 foot container, it is frequently desirable to repeat the send and receive sequence several times and to add or average the results. This has the effect of improving the signal to noise ratio. Note that the system disclosed herein and in the parent patents and applications is able to achieve such long sensing distances due to the principles disclosed herein. Competitive systems that are now beginning to enter the market have much shorter sensing distances and thus a key invention herein is the ability to achieve sensing distances in excess of 20 feet.

Note that in many cases several transducers are used for monitoring the vehicle such as a container that typically point in slightly different directions. Naturally, this need not be the case and a movable mounting is also contemplated where the motion is accomplished by any convenient method such as a magnet, motor, etc.

Referring to FIGS. 35A and 35B, a container 480 is shown including an interior sensor system 481 arranged to obtain information about contents in the interior of the container 480. The interior sensor system includes a wave transmitter 482 mounted at one end of the container 480 and which operatively transmits waves into the interior of the container 480 and a wave receiver 483 mounted adjacent the wave transmitter 482 and which operatively receives waves from the interior of the container 480. As shown, the transmitter 482 and receiver 483 are adjacent one another but such a positioning is not intended to limit the invention. The transmitter 482 and receiver 483 can be formed as a single transducer or may be spaced apart from one another. Multiple pairs of transmitter/receivers can also be provided, for example transmitter 482′ and receiver 483′ are located at an opposite end of the container 480 proximate the doors 484.

The interior sensor system 481 includes a processor coupled to the receiver 483, and optionally the transmitter 482, and which is resident on the container 480, for example, in the housing of the receiver 483 or in the housing of a communication system 485. The processor is programmed to compare waves received by each receiver 483, 483′ at different times and analyze either the received waves individually or the received waves in comparison to or in relation to other received waves for the purpose of providing information about the contents in the interior of the container 480. The processor can employ pattern recognition techniques and as discussed more fully below, be designed to compensate for thermal gradients in the interior of the container 480.

Information about the contents of the container 480 may comprise the presence and/or motion of objects in the interior. The processor may be associated with a memory unit which can store data on the location of the container 480 and the analysis of the data from the interior sensor system 481. The processor associated with or integral with the interior sensor system 481 can apply pattern recognition techniques to determine the presence of objects in the interior space of the container 480 and/or motion or other properties of the objects in the interior space of the container 480. One technique uses wave comparison by comparing waves received at different times.

It is also possible to perform object (cargo) detection by directing ultrasonic waves into the interior space so that they are reflected off of any objects in the interior space of the container 480. The amplitudes of the reflected waves are compared to thresholds obtained or derived from reflections in the absence of the objects in the container 480. Thus, the thresholds are set to accommodate the reflections expected or actually obtained from an empty container 480, removing the reflections from the door 484, floor and side walls. Since the amplitude is significantly affected by humidity, humidity compensation (described below) is extremely desirable.

The container 480 also includes a location determining system 486 which monitors the location of the container 480. To this end, the location determining system can be any asset locator in the prior art, which typically include a GPS receiver, transmitter and appropriate electronic hardware and software to enable the position of the container 480 to be determined using GPS technology or other satellite or ground-based technology including those using the cell phone system or similar location based systems.

The communication system 485 is coupled to both the interior sensor system 481 and the location determining system 486 and transmits the information about the contents in the interior of the container 480 (obtained from the interior sensor system 481) and the location of the container 480 (obtained from the location determining system 486). This transmission may be to a remote facility wherein the information about the container 480 is stored, processed, counted, reviewed and/or monitored and/or retransmitted to another location, perhaps by way of the Internet.

The container 480 also includes a door status sensor 487 arranged to detect when one or both doors 484 is/are opened or closed after having been opened. The door status sensor 487 may be an ultrasonic sensor which is positioned a fixed distance from the doors 484 and registers changes in the position of the doors 484. Alternately, other door status systems can be used such as those based on switches, magnetic sensors or other technologies. The door status sensor 487 can be programmed to associate an increase in the distance between the sensor 487 and each of the doors 484 and a subsequent decrease in the distance between the sensor 487 and that door 484 as an opening and subsequent closing of that door 484. In the alternative, a latching device can be provided to detect latching of each door 484 upon its closure. The door status sensor 487 is coupled to the interior sensor system 481, or at least to the transmitters 482,482′ so that the transmitters 482,482′ can be designed to transmit waves into the interior of the container 480 only when the door status sensor 487 detects when at least one door 484 is closed after having been opened. For other purposes, the ultrasonic sensors may be activated on opening of the door(s) in order to monitor the movement of objects into or out of the container, which might in turn be used to activate an RFID or bar code reading system or other object identification system.

When the ultrasonic transducers are first installed into the container 480 and the doors 484 closed, an initial pulse transmission can be initiated and the received signal stored to provide a vector of data that is representative of an empty container. To initiate the pulse transmission, an initiation device or function is provided in the interior sensor system 481, e.g., the door status sensor 487. At a subsequent time when contents have been added to the container (as possibly reflected in the opening and closing of the doors 484 as detected by the door status sensor 487), the ultrasonic transducers can be commanded to again issue a few cycles of ultrasound and record the reflections. If the second pattern is subtracted from the first pattern, or otherwise compared, in the processor the existence of additional contents in the container 480 will cause the signal to change, which thus causes the differential signal to change and the added contents detected. Vector as used herein with ultrasonic systems is a linear array of data values obtained by rectifying, taking the envelope and digitizing the returned signal as received by the transducer or other digital representation comprising at least a part of the returned signal.

When a container 480 is exposed to sunlight on its exterior top, a stable thermal gradient can occur inside the container 480 where the top of the container 480 near the ceiling is at a significantly higher temperature than the bottom of the container 480. This thermal gradient changes the density of the gas inside the container causing it to act as a lens to ultrasound that diffracts or bends the ultrasonic waves and can significantly affect the signals sensed by the receiver portions 483,483′ of the transducers. Thus, the vector of sensed data when the container is at a single uniform temperature will look significantly different from the vector of sensed data acquired within the same container when thermal gradients are present.

It is even possible for currents of heated air to occur within a container 480 if a side of the container is exposed to sunlight. Since these thermal gradients can substantially affect the vector, the system must be examined under a large variety of different thermal environments. This generally requires that the electronics be designed to mask somewhat the effects of the thermal gradients on the magnitude of the sensed waves while maintaining the positions of these waves in time. This can be accomplished as described in detail in the above-referenced patents and patent applications through the use, for example, of a logarithmic compression circuit. There are other methods of minimizing the effect on the reflected wave magnitudes that will accomplish substantially the same result, some of which are disclosed elsewhere herein.

To allow for temperature compensation, one or more temperature sensors 479 are arranged on the container 480 to measure or otherwise determine the temperature of the atmosphere in the interior of the container 480. In view of thermal gradients in the longitudinal and transverse directions of the container 480, preferably multiple temperature sensors 479 are provided. Temperature sensors 479 provide the temperature(s) to a processor which controls or is part of the interior sensor system 481, i.e., ultrasonic wave transmitter 482 and wave receiver 483, to change the transmission frequency of the ultrasonic waves being transmitted by the wave transmitter 482 as a function of the temperature. In this manner, the frequency of the ultrasonic waves can be optimal for the temperature conditions in the container 480. Additional discussion about wave frequency compensation as a function of temperature is set forth in section 1.1.2.9 above.

In addition to instead of altering a transmission parameter of the ultrasonic waves via the ultrasonic transmitter 482 based on temperature, it is also possible to alter an analysis parameter, i.e., the manner in which any reflected waves are processed, based on temperature. Specifically, as described above, when processing received ultrasonic waves, a portion of the waves can be removed, this portion being considered noise or irrelevant to the determination of information about objects in the field of the ultrasonic waves. When transmitted into an interior space of the container 480, the removed portions could be those portions reflecting from the structure of the container 480 itself. Now, it has been found that the amount of waves to be removed, i.e., the size of the removed portion, can be adjusted as a function of the temperature in the container 480 to maintain the same interrogation distance of the ultrasonic transducer. This means that if an area within a set range from the transducer is being monitored and only waves reflecting from objects in that range are desired, reflected waves received by the ultrasonic receiver 483 are processed to eliminate portions which reflect from objects outside of that range and these portions are varied depending on the temperature. Without varying the size of the portions removed from reflected waves, as the temperature varies inside the container 480, different areas of the container 480 would be monitored to obtain information about objects and thus inconsistent and possibly erroneous information would be obtained.

When the complicating aspects of thermal gradients are taken into account, in many cases a great deal of data must be taken with a large number of different occupancy situations to create a database of perhaps 10,000 to one million vectors each representing the different occupancy state of the container in a variety of thermal environments. This data can then be used to train a pattern recognition system such as a neural network, modular or combination neural network, cellular neural network, support vector machine, fuzzy logic system, Kalman filter system, sensor fusion system, data fusion system or other classification system. Since all containers of the type transported by ships, for example, are of standard sizes, only a few of these training exercises need to be conducted, typically one for each different geometry container. The process of adapting an ultrasonic occupancy monitoring system to a container or other space is described in considerable detail for automobile interior monitoring in the above-referenced patents and patent applications, and elsewhere herein, and therefore this process need not be repeated here.

Other kinds of interior monitoring systems can be used to determine and characterize the contents of a space such as a container. One example uses a scanner and photocell 488, as in a laser radar system, and can be mounted near the floor of the container 480 and operated to scan the space above the floor in a plane located, for example, 10 cm above the floor. Since the distance to a reflecting wall of the container 480 can be determined and recorded for each angular position of the scanner, the distance to any occupying item will show up as a reflection from an object closer to the scanner and therefore a shadow graph of the contents of the container 10 cm above the floor can be obtained and used to partially categorize the contents of the container 480. Categorization of the contents of the container 480 may involve the use of pattern recognition technologies. Naturally, other locations of such a scanning system are possible.

In both of these examples, relatively little can be said about the contents of the container other then that something is present or that the container is empty. Frequently, this is all that is required. A more sophisticated system can make use of one or more imagers (for example cameras) 489 mounted near the ceiling of the container, for example. Such imagers can be provided with a strobe flash and then commanded to make an image of the trailer interior at appropriate times. The output from such an imager 489 can also be analyzed by a pattern recognition system such as a neural network or equivalent, to reduce the information to a few bytes that can be sent to a central location via an LEO or geostationary satellite, for example. As with the above ultrasonic example, one image can be subtracted from the empty container image and if anything remains then that is a representation of the contents that have been placed in the container. Also, various images can be subtracted to determine the changes in container contents when the doors are opened and material is added or removed or to determine changes in position of the contents. Various derivatives of this information can be extracted and sent by the telematics system to the appropriate location for monitoring or other purposes.

Each of the systems mentioned above can also be used to determine whether there is motion of objects within the container relative to the container, or another property of the objects in the container. Motion of objects within the container 480 would be reflected as differences between the waves received by the transducers (indicative of differences in distances between the transducer and the objects in the container) or images (indicative of differences between the position of objects in the images). Such motion can also aid in image segmentation which in turn can aid in the object identification process. This is particularly valuable if the container is occupied by life forms such as humans.

As discussed above in section 1.1.2.10, humidity also affects ultrasonic wave propagation. Therefore, one or more humidity sensors 478 can be arranged on the container 480 to measure or otherwise determine the humidity of the atmosphere in the interior of the container 480 (see FIG. 35B). Humidity sensors 478 provide the humidity to a processor which controls or is part of the interior sensor system 481, i.e., ultrasonic wave transmitter 482 and wave receiver 483, to change parameters of the processing of the ultrasonic waves as function of humidity (if such a change is determined to be necessary to obtain a meaningful, acceptable or optimal wave analysis). Such parameters include transmission parameters such as the frequency, gain and power of the ultrasonic waves being transmitted by the wave transmitter 482 and reception parameters, such as amplification of the returned waves and the size and location of only a portion of the returned wave signal which is to be analyzed. In particular, the gain values of the ultrasonic waves are adjusted based on humidity since humidity contributes more than about 2 orders of magnitude to the amplitude of reflected wave signals.

Since one particular combination which affects ultrasonic wave propagation is the combination of low humidity and high temperature, temperature sensors 479 and humidity sensors 478 could be used in combination to enable the interior sensor system 481 to optimize the transmission and reception of ultrasonic waves in consideration of both the temperature and humidity of the atmosphere in the interior space of the container 480.

In the systems of FIGS. 35A and 35B, wires (not shown) are used to connect the various sensors and devices. It is contemplated that all of the units in the monitoring system can be coupled together wirelessly, using for example the Bluetooth, WI-FI or other protocol. Also, as shown in FIG. 35B, the interior sensor system 481 is arranged on the far side of the container 480 farthest away from the door 484. Alternative or additional mounting locations include along or on other sides of the container 480.

If an inertial device 490 is also incorporated, such as the MEMSIC dual axis accelerometer, which provides information as to the accelerations of the container 480, then this relative motion can be determined by the processor and it can be ascertained whether this relative motion is caused by acceleration of the container 480, which may indicate loose cargo, and/or whether the motion is caused by the sensed occupying item. In latter case, a conclusion can perhaps be reached that container is occupied by a life form such as an animal or human. Additionally, it may be desirable to place sensors on an item of cargo itself since damage to the cargo could occur from excessive acceleration, shock, temperature, vibration, etc. regardless of whether the same stimulus was experienced by the entire container. A loose item of cargo, for example, may be impacting the monitored item of cargo and damaging it. Relative motion can also be sensed in some cases from outside of the container through the use of accelerometers, microphones or MIR (Micropower Impulse Radar). Note that all such sensors regardless of where they are placed are contemplated herein and are part of the present inventions.

Chemical sensors 491 based on surface acoustic wave (SAW) or other technology can in many cases be designed to sense the presence of certain vapors in the atmosphere and can do so at very low power. A properly designed SAW or equivalent sensing device, for example, can measure acceleration, angular rate, strain, temperature, pressure, carbon dioxide concentration, humidity, hydrocarbon concentration, and the presence or concentration of many other chemicals. A separate SAW or similar device may be needed for each chemical species (or in some cases each class of chemicals) where detection is desired. The devices, however, can be quite small and can be designed to use very little power. Such a system of SAW or equivalent devices can be used to measure the existence of certain chemical vapors in the atmosphere of the container much like a low power electronic nose. In some cases, it can be used to determine whether a carbon dioxide source such as a human is in the container. Such chemical sensing devices can also be designed, for example, to monitor for many other chemicals including some narcotics, hydrocarbons, mercury vapor, and other hazardous chemicals including some representative vapors of explosives or some weapons of mass destruction. With additional research, SAW or similar devices can also be designed or augmented to sense the presence of radioactive materials, and perhaps some biological materials such as smallpox or anthrax. In many cases, such SAW devices do not now exist, however, researchers believe that given the proper motivation that such devices can be created. Thus, although heretofore not appreciated, SAW or equivalent based systems can monitor a great many dangerous and hazardous materials that may be either legally or illegally occupying space within a container, for example. In particular, the existence of spills or leakages from the cargo can be detected in time to perhaps save damage to other cargo either within the container or in an adjacent container. Although SAW devices have in particular been described, other low power devices using battery or RF power can also be used where necessary. Note, the use of any of the afore mentioned SAW devices in connection within or on a vehicle for any purpose other than tire pressure and temperature monitoring or torque monitoring is new and contemplated by the inventions disclosed herein. Naturally only a small number of examples are presented of the general application of the SAW, or RFID, technology to vehicles.

Other sensors that can be designed to operate under very low power levels include microphones 492 and light sensors 493 or sensors sensitive to other frequencies in the electromagnetic spectrum as the need arises. The light sensors 493 could be designed to cause activation of the interior sensor system 481 when the container is being switched from a dark condition (normally closed) to a light situation (when the door or other aperture is opened). A flashlight could also activate the light sensor 493.

Instead of one or more batteries providing power to the interior sensor system 481, the communication system 485 and the location determining system 486, solar power can be used. In this case, one or more solar panels 494 are attached to the upper wall of the container 480 (see FIG. 35A) and electrically coupled to the various power-requiring components of the monitoring system. A battery can thus be eliminated. In the alternative, since the solar panel(s) 494 will not always be exposed to sunlight, a rechargeable battery can be provided which is charged by the solar panel 494 when the solar panels are exposed to sunlight. A battery could also be provided in the event that the solar panel 494 does not receive sufficient light to power the components of the monitoring system. In a similar manner, power can temporarily be supplied by a vehicle such as a tractor either by a direct connection to the tractor power or though capacitive, inductive or RF coupling power transmission systems. As above an ultracapacitor can be used instead of a battery and energy harvesting can be used if there is a source of energy such as light or vibration in the environment.

In some cases, a container is thought to be empty when in fact it is being surreptitiously used for purposes beyond the desires of the container owner or law enforcement authorities. The various transducers that can be used to monitor interior of a container as described above, plus others, can also be used to allow the trailer or container owner to periodically monitor the use of his property.

7.4.2 Monitoring the Entire Asset

Immediately above, monitoring of the interior of the container is described. If the container is idle, there may not the need to frequently monitor the status of the container interior or exterior until some event happens. Thus, all monitoring systems on the container can be placed in the sleep mode until some event such as a motion or vibration of the container takes place. Other wakeup events could include the opening of the doors, the sensing of light or a change in the interior temperature of the container above a reference level, for example. When any of these chosen events occurs, the system can be instructed to change the monitoring rate and to immediately transmit a signal to a satellite or another communication system, or respond to a satellite-initiated signal for some LEO-based, or geocentric systems, for example. Such an event may signal to the container owner that a robbery was in progress either of the interior contents of the container or of the entire container. It also might signal that the contents of the container are in danger of being destroyed through temperature or excessive motion or that the container is being misappropriated for some unauthorized use.

FIG. 36A shows a flowchart of the manner in which container 480 may be monitored by personnel or a computer program at a remote facility for the purpose of detecting unauthorized entry into the container and possible theft of the contents of the container 480. Initially, the wakeup sensor 495 detects motion, sound, light or vibration including motion of the doors 484, or any other change of the condition of the container 480 from a stationary or expected position. The wakeup sensor 495 can be designed to provide a signal indicative of motion only after a fixed time delay, i.e., a period of “sleep”. In this manner, the wakeup sensor would not be activated repeatedly in traffic stop and go situations.

The wakeup sensor 495 initiates the interior sensor system 481 to perform the analysis of the contents in the interior of the container, e.g., send waves into the interior, receive waves and then process the received waves. If motion in the interior of the container is not detected at 496, then the interior sensor system 481 may be designed to continue to monitor the interior of the container, for example, by periodically re-sending waves into the interior of the container. If motion is detected at 496, then a signal is sent at 497 to a monitoring facility via the communication system 485 and which includes the location of the container 480 obtained from the location determining system 486 or by the ID for a permanently fixed container or other asset, structure or storage facility. In this manner, if the motion is determined to deviate from the expected handling of the container 480, appropriate law enforcement personnel can be summoned to investigate.

When it is known and expected that the container should be in motion, monitoring of this motion can still be important. An unexpected vibration could signal the start of a failure of the chassis tire, for example, or failure of the attachment to the chassis or the attachment of the chassis to the tractor. Similarly, an unexpected tilt angle of the container may signify a dangerous situation that could lead to a rollover accident and an unexpected shock could indicate an accident has occurred. Various sensors that can be used to monitor the motion of the container include gyroscopes, accelerometers and tilt sensors. An IMU (Inertial Measurement Unit) containing for example three accelerometers and three gyroscopes can be used.

In some cases, the container or the chassis can be provided with weight sensors that measure the total weight of the cargo as well as the distribution of weight. By monitoring changes in the weight distribution as the vehicle is traveling, an indication can result that the contents within the trailer are shifting which could cause damage to the cargo. An alternate method is to put weight sensors in the floor or as a mat on the floor of the vehicle. The mat design can use the bladder principles described above for weighing b vehicle occupants using, in most cases, multiple chambers. Strain gages can also be configured to measure the weight of container contents. An alternate approach is to use inertial sensors such as accelerometers and gyroscopes to measure the motion of the vehicle as it travels. If the characteristics of the input accelerations (linear and angular) are known from a map, for example, or by measuring them on the chassis then the inertial properties of the container can be determined and thus the load that the container contains. This is an alternate method of determining the contents of a container. If several (usually 3) accelerometers and several (usually 3) gyroscopes are used together in a single package then this is known as an inertial measurement unit. If a source of position is also known such as from a GPS system then the errors inherent in the IMU can be corrected using a Kalman filter.

Other container and chassis monitoring can include the attachment of a trailer to a tractor, the attachment of electrical and/or communication connections, and the status of the doors to the container. If the doors are opened when this is not expected, this could be an indication of a criminal activity underway. Several types of security seals are available including reusable seals that indicate when the door is open or closed or if it was ever opened during transit, or single use seals that are destroyed during the process of opening the container.

Another application of monitoring the entire asset would be to incorporate a diagnostic module into the asset. Frequently, the asset may have operating parts, e.g., if it is a refrigerated and contains a refrigeration unit. To this end, sensors can be installed on the asset and monitored using pattern recognition techniques as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,809,437 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,175,787. As such, various sensors would be placed on the container 480 and used to determine problems with the container 480 which might cause it to operate abnormally, e.g., if the refrigeration unit were about to fail because of a refrigerant leak. In this case, the information about the expected failure of the refrigeration unit could be transmitted to a facility and maintenance of the refrigeration unit could be scheduled.

It can also be desirable to detect unauthorized entry into container, which could be by cutting with a torch, or motorized saw, grinding, or blasting through the wall, ceiling, or floor of the container. This event can be detected by one or more of the following methods:

-   -   1. A light sensor which measures any part of the visible or         infrared part of the spectrum and is calibrated to the ambient         light inside the container when the door is closed and which         then triggers when light is detected above ambient levels and         door is closed.     -   2. A vibration sensor attached to wall of container which         triggers on vibrations of an amplitude and/or frequency         signature indicative of forced entry into the container. The         duration of signal would also be a factor to consider. The         algorithm could be derived from observations and tests or it         could use a pattern recognition approach such as Neural         Networks.     -   3. An infrared or carbon dioxide sensor could be used to detect         human presence, although a carbon dioxide sensor would probably         require a prolonged exposure.     -   4. Various motion sensors as discussed above can also be used,         but would need to be resistant to triggering on motion typical         of cargo transport. Thus a trained pattern recognition algorithm         might be necessary.     -   5. The Interior of the container can be flooded with waves         (ultrasonic or electromagnetic) and the return signature         evaluated by a pattern recognition system such as a neural         network trained to recognize changes consistent with the removal         of cargo or the presence of a person or people. Alternately the         mere fact that the pattern was changing could be indicative of         human presence.

As discussed above and below, information from entry/person detector could be sent to communication network to notify interested parties of current status. Additionally, an audible alarm may be sounded and a photo could also be taken to identify the intruder. Additionally, motion sensors such as an accelerometer on a wall or floor of a vehicle such as a container or an ultrasonic or optical based motion detector such as used to turn on residential lights and the like, can also be used to detect intrusion into a vehicle and thus are contemplated herein. Such sensors can be mounted at any of the preferred locations disclosed herein or elsewhere in or on the vehicle. If a container, for example, is closed, a photocell connected to a pattern recognition system such as a neural network, for example can be trained to be sensitive to very minute changes in light such as would occur when an intruder opens a door or cuts a hole in a wall, ceiling or the floor of a vehicle even on a dark night. Even if there are holes in the vehicle that allow light to enter, the rate of change of this illumination can be detected and used as an indication of an intrusion.

It is noteworthy that systems based on the disclosure above can be configured to monitor construction machinery to prevent theft or at least to notify others that a theft is in progress.

7.4.3 Recording

In many cases it is desirable to obtain and record additional information about the cargo container and its contents. As mentioned above, the weight of the container with its contents and the distribution and changes in this weight distribution could be valuable for a safety authority investigating an accident, for highway authorities monitoring gross vehicle weight, for container owners who charge by the used capacity, and others. The environment that the container and its contents have been subjected to could also be significant information. Such things as whether the container was flooded, exposed to a spill or leakage of a hazardous material, exposed to excessive heat or cold, shocks, vibration etc. can be important historical factors for the container affecting its useful life, establishing liability for damages etc. For example, a continuous monitoring of container interior temperature could be significant for perishable cargo and for establishing liability.

With reference to FIG. 36B, in some cases, the individual cargo items 498 can be tagged with RFID or SAW tags 499 and the presence of this cargo in the container 480 could be valuable information to the owner of the cargo. One or more sensors on the container that periodically read RFID tags could be required, such as one or more RFID interrogators 500 which periodically sends a signal which will causes the RFID tags 499 to generate a responsive signal. The responsive signal generated by the RFID tags 499 will contain information about the cargo item on which the RFID tag 499 is placed. Multiple interrogators or at least multiple antennas may be required depending on the size of the container. The RFID can be based on a SAW thus providing greater range for a passive system or it can also be provided with an internal battery or ultracapacitor for even greater range. Naturally energy harvesting can also be used if appropriate.

Similarly, for certain types of cargo, a barcode system might acceptable, or another optically readable identification code. The cargo items would have to be placed so that the identification codes are readable, i.e., when a beam of light is directed over the identification codes, a pattern of light is generated which contains information about the cargo item. As shown in FIG. 36C, the cargo items in this case are boxes having an equal height so that a space remains between the top of the boxes 501 and the ceiling of the container 480. One or more optical scanners 502, including a light transmitter and receiver, are arranged on the ceiling of the container and can be arranged to scan the upper surfaces of the boxes 503, possibly by moving the length of the container 480, or through a plurality of such sensors. During such a scan, patterns of light are reflected from the barcodes 501 on the upper surfaces of the boxes 503 and received by the optical scanner 502. The patterns of light contain information about the cargo items in the boxes 503. Receivers can be arranged at multiple locations along the ceiling. Other arrangements to ensure that a light beam traverses a barcode 501 and is received by a receiver can also be applied in accordance with the invention. As discussed above, other tag technologies can be used if appropriate such as those based of magnetic wires.

The ability to read barcodes and RFID tags provides the capability of the more closely tracking of packages for such organizations as UPS, Federal Express, the U.S. Postal Service and their customers. Now, in some cases, the company can ascertain that a given package is in fact on a particular truck or cargo transporter and also know the exact location of the transporter.

Frequently, a trailer or container has certain hardware such as racks for automotive parts, for example, that are required to stay with the container. During unloading of the cargo these racks, or other sub-containers, could be removed from the container and not returned. If the container system knows to check for the existence of these racks, then this error can be eliminated. Frequently, the racks are of greater value then the cargo they transport. Using RFID tags and a simple interrogator mounted on the ceiling of the container perhaps near the entrance, enables monitoring of parts that are taken in or are removed from the container and associated with the location of container. By this method, pilferage of valuable or dangerous cargo can at least be tracked.

Containers constructed in accordance with the invention will frequently have a direct method of transmitting information to a satellite. Typically, the contents of the container are more valuable than the truck or chassis for the case of when the container is not a trailer. If the tractor, train, plane or ship that is transporting the container is experiencing difficulties, then this information can be transmitted to the satellite system and thus to the container, carrier, or cargo owner or agent for attention. Information indicating a problem with carrier (railroad, tractor, plane, boat) may be sensed and reported onto a bus such as CAN bus which can be attached either wirelessly or by wires to the container. Alternately, sensors on the container can determine through vibrations etc. that the carrier may be experiencing problems. The reporting of problems with the vehicle can come from dedicated sensors or from a general diagnostic system such as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,809,437 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,175,787, and herein. Whatever the source of the diagnostic information, especially when valuable or dangerous cargo is involved, this information in coded form can be transmitted to a ground station, LEO or geostationary satellite as discussed above. Other information that can be recorded by container includes the identification of the boat, railroad car, or tractor and operator or driver.

The experiences of the container can be recorded over time as a container history record to help in life cycle analysis to determine when a container needs refurbishing, for example. This history in coded form could reside on a memory that is resident on the container or preferably the information can be stored on a computer file associated with that container in a database. The mere knowledge of where a container has been, for example, may aid law enforcement authorities to determine which containers are most likely to contain illegal contraband.

The pertinent information relative to a container can be stored on a tag that is associated and physically connected to the container. This tag may be of the type that can be interrogated remotely to retrieve its contents. Such a tag, for example, could contain information as to when and where the container was most recently opened and the contents of the container. Thus, as containers enter a port, their tags can each be interrogated to determine their expected contents and also to give a warning for those containers that should be inspected more thoroughly. In most cases, the tag information will not reside on the container but in fact will be on a computer file accessible by those who have an authorization to interrogate the file. Thus, the container need only have a unique identification number that cannot easily be destroyed, changed or otherwise tampered with. These can be visual and painted on the outside of the container or an RFID, barcode or other object identification system can be used. Again, the tags can be based on passive SAW technology to give greater range or could contain a battery or ultracapacitor for even greater range. The tag can be in a sleep mode until receiving a wakeup call to further conserve battery power.

FIG. 37 shows a flow chart of the manner in which multiple assets may be monitored using a data processing and storage facility 510, each asset having a unique identification code. The location of each asset is determined at 511, along with one or more properties or characteristics of the contents of each asset at 512, one or more properties of the environment of each asset at 513, and/or the opening and/or closing of the doors of each asset at 514. This information is transmitted to the data processing and storage facility 510 as represented by 515 with the identification code. Information about the implement being used to transport the asset and the individual(s) or company or companies involved in the transport of the asset can also be transmitted to the facility as represented by 516. This latter information could be entered by an input device attached to the asset.

The data processing and storage facility 510 is connected to the Internet at 517 to enable shippers 518 to check the location and progress of the asset, the contents of the asset, the environment of the asset, whether the doors are being opened and closed impermissibly and the individual and companies handling the asset. The same information, or a subset of this information, can also be accessed by law enforcement personnel at 519 and maritime/port authorities at 520. Different entities can be authorized to access different items of information or subsets of the total information available relating to each asset.

For anti-theft purposes, the shipper enters the manifest of the asset using an input device 521 so that the manifest can be compared to the contents of the asset (at 522). A determination is made at 523 as to whether there are any differences between the current contents of the asset and the manifest. For example, the manifest might indicate the presence of contents whereas the information transmitted by the asset reveals that it does not contain any objects. When such a discrepancy is revealed, the shipment can be intercepted at 524 to ascertain the whereabouts of the cargo. The history of the travels of the asset would also be present in the data facility 510 so that it can be readily ascertained where the cargo disappeared. If no discrepancy is revealed, the asset is allowed to proceed at 525.

7.4.4 Exterior Monitoring Near a Vehicle

Having the ability to transmit coded information to a satellite, or other telematics system, using a low cost device having a battery that lasts for many years opens up many other, previously impractical opportunities. Many of these opportunities are discussed above and below and all are teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein. In this section, opportunities related to monitoring the environment in the vicinity of the container will be discussed. Many types of sensors can be used for the purpose of exterior monitoring including ultrasound, imagers such as cameras both with and without illumination including visual, infrared or ultraviolet imagers, radar, scanners including laser radar and phased array radar, other types of sensors which sense other parts of the electromagnetic spectrum, capacitive sensors, electric or magnetic field sensors, and chemical sensors among others.

Cameras either with or without a source of illumination can be used to record people approaching the container and perhaps stealing the contents of the container. At the appropriate frequencies, (tetra Hertz, for example) the presence of concealed weapons can be ascertained as described in Alien Vision: Exploring the Electromagnetic Spectrum With Imaging Technology (SPIE Monograph Vol. PM104) by Austin Richards. Infrared sensors can be used to detect the presence of animal life including humans in the vicinity of container. Radio frequency sensors can sense the presence of authorized personnel having a keyless entry type transmitter or a SAW, RFID or similar device of the proper design. In this way, the container can be locked as a safe, for example, and only permit an authorized person carrying the proper identification to open the container or other storage facility.

A pattern recognition system can be trained to identify facial or iris patterns, for example, of authorized personnel or ascertain the identity of authorized personnel to prevent theft of the container. Such a pattern recognition system can operate on the images obtained by the cameras. That is, if the pattern recognition system is a neural network, it would be trained to identify or ascertain the identity of authorized personnel based on images of such personnel during a training phase and thus operationally only allow such personnel to open the container, enter the container and/or handle the container.

Naturally a wide variety of smart cards, biometric identification systems (such as fingerprints, voice prints and Iris scans) can be used for the same purpose. When an unauthorized person approaches the container, his or her picture can be taken and in particular, if sensors determine that someone is attempting to force entry into the container, that person's picture can be relayed via the communication system to the proper authorities. Cameras with a proper pattern recognition system can also be used to identify if an approaching person is wearing a disguise such as a ski mask or is otherwise acting in a suspicious manner. This determination can provide a critical timely warning and in some cases permit an alarm to be sounded or otherwise notify the proper authorities.

Capacitance sensors or magnetic sensors can be used to ascertain that the container is properly attached to a trailer. An RFID or barcode scanner on the container can be used to record the identification of the tractor, trailer, or other element of the transportation system. These are just a small sampling of the additional sensors that can be used with the container or even mounted on a tractor or chassis to monitor the container. With the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, the output of any of these sensors can now be transmitted to a remote facility using a variety of telematics methods including communication via a low power link to a satellite, such as provided by the Skybitz Corporation as described above and others.

Thus, as mentioned above, many new opportunities now exist for applying a wide variety of sensors to a cargo container or other object as discussed above and below. Through a communication system such as a LEO or geostationary or other satellite system, critical information about the environment of container or changes in that environment can be transmitted to the container owner, law enforcement authorities, container contents owner etc. Furthermore, the system is generally low cost and does not require connection to an external source of power. The system generally uses low power from a battery that can last for years without maintenance,

7.4.5 Analysis

Many of the sensor systems described above output data that can best be analyzed using pattern recognition systems such as neural networks, cellular neural networks, fuzzy logic, sensor fusion, modular neural networks, combination neural networks, support vector machines, neural fuzzy systems or other classifiers that convert the pattern data into an output indicative of the class of the object or event being sensed. One interesting method, for example, is the ZISC® chip system of Silicon Recognition Inc., Petaluna, Calif. A general requirement for the low power satellite monitoring system is that the amount of data routinely sent to the satellite be kept to a minimum. For most transmissions, this information will involve the location of the container, for example, plus a few additional bytes of status information determined by the mission of the particular container and its contents. Thus, the pattern recognition algorithms must convert typically a complex image or other data to a few bytes representative of the class of the monitored item or event.

In some instances, the container must send considerably more data and at a more frequent interval than normal. This will generally happen only during an exceptional situation or event and when the added battery drain of this activity is justified. In this case, the system will signal the satellite that an exception situation exists and to prepare to receive additional information.

Many of the sensors on the container and inside the container may also require significant energy and thus should be used sparingly. For example, if the container is known to be empty and the doors closed, there is no need to monitor the interior of the container unless the doors have been reopened. Similarly, if the container is stationary and doors are closed, then continuously monitoring the interior of the container to determine the presence of cargo is unnecessary. Thus, each of the sensors can have a program duty cycle that depends on exterior or other events. Naturally, in some applications either solar power or other source of power may be available either intermittently to charge the battery or continuously.

If the vehicle such as a container is stationary then usually the monitoring can take place infrequently and the battery is conserved. When the vehicle is in motion then energy is frequently available to charge the battery and thus more frequent monitoring can take place as the battery is charged. The technique in known as “energy harvesting” and involves, for example, the use of a piezoelectric material that is compressed, bent or otherwise flexed thereby creating an electric current that can be used to charge the battery. Other methods include the use of a magnet and coil where the magnet moves relative to the coil under forces caused by the motion of the vehicle.

Since the duty cycle of the sensor system may vary considerably, and since any of the sensors can fail, be sabotaged or otherwise be rendered incapable of performing its intended function either from time, exposure, or intentionally, it is expected that some or all of the sensors will be equipped with a diagnostic capability. The communication system will generally interrogate each sensor or merely expect a transmission from each sensor and if that interrogation or transmission fails or a diagnostic error occurs, this fact will be communicated to the appropriate facility. If, for example, someone attempts to cover the lens of a camera so that a theft would not be detected, the mere fact that the lens was covered could be reported, alerting authorities that something unusual was occurring.

7.4.6 Safety

As mentioned previously, there are times when the value of the contents of a container can exceed the value of the tractor, chassis and container itself. Additionally, there are times when the contents of the container can be easily damaged if subjected to unreasonable vibrations, angles, accelerations and shocks. For these situations, an inertial measurement unit (IMU) can be used in conjunction with the container to monitor the accelerations experienced by the container (or the cargo) and to issue a warning if those accelerations are deemed excessive either in magnitude, duration, or frequency or where the integrations of these accelerations indicate an excessive velocity, angular velocity or angular displacement. Note that for some applications in order to minimize the power expended at the sensor installation, the IMU correction calculations based on the GPS can be done at an off sensor location such as the receiving station of the satellite information.

If the vehicle operates on a road that has previously been accurately mapped, to an accuracy of perhaps a few centimeters, then the analysis system can know the input from the road to the vehicle tires and thus to the chassis of the trailer. The IMU can also calculate the velocity of the trailer. By monitoring the motion of the container when subjected to a known stimulus, the road, the inertial properties of the container and chassis system can be estimated. If these inertial properties are known than a safe operating speed limit can be determined such that the probability of rollover, for example, is kept within reasonable bounds. If the driver exceeds that velocity, then a warning can be issued. Similarly, in some cases, the traction of the trailer wheels on the roadway can be estimated based on the tendency of a trailer to skid sideways. This also can be the basis of issuing a warning to the driver and to notify the contents owner especially if the vehicle is being operated in an unsafe manner for the road or weather conditions. Since the information system can also know the weather conditions in the area where the vehicle is operating, this added information can aid in the safe driving and safe speed limit determination. In some cases, the vibrations caused by a failing tire can also be determined. For those cases where radio frequency tire monitors are present, the container can also monitor the tire pressure and determine when a dangerous situation exists. Finally, the vehicle system can input to the overall system when the road is covered with ice or when it encounters a pothole.

Thus, there are many safety related aspects to having sensors mounted on a container and where those sensors can communicate periodically with a LEO or other satellite, or other communication system, and thereafter to the Internet or directly to the appropriate facility. Some of these rely on an accurate IMU. Although low cost IMUs are generally not very accurate, when they are combined using a Kalman filter with the GPS system, which is on the container as part of the tracking system, the accuracy of the IMU can be greatly improved, approaching that of military grade systems.

7.4.7 Other Remote Monitoring

The discussion above has concentrated on containers that contain cargo where presumably this cargo is shipped from one company or organization to another. This cargo could be automotive parts, animals, furniture, weapons, bulk commodities, machinery, fruits, vegetables, TV sets, or any other commonly shipped product. What has been described above is a monitoring system for tracking this cargo and making measurements to inform the interested parties (owners, law enforcement personnel etc.) of the status of the container, its contents, and the environment. This becomes practical when a satellite system exists such as the Skybitz, for example, LEO or geostationary satellite system coupled with a low cost low power small GPS receiver and communication device capable of sending information periodically to the satellite. Once the satellite has received the position information from the container, for example, this information can be relayed to a computer system wherein the exact location of the container can be ascertained. Additionally, if the container has an RFID reader, the location of all packages having an RFID tag that are located within the container can also be ascertained.

The accuracy of this determination is currently now approximately 20 meters. However, as now disclosed for the first time, the ionosphere caused errors in GPS signals received by container receiver can be determined from a variety of differential GPS systems and that information can be coupled with the information from the container to determine a precise location of the container to perhaps as accurate as a few centimeters. This calculation can be done at any facility that has access to the relevant DGPS corrections and the container location. It need not be done onboard the container. Using accurate digital maps the location of the container on the earth can be extremely precisely determined. This principle can now be used for other location determining purposes. The data processing facility that receives the information from the asset via satellites can also know the DGPS corrections at the asset location and thus can relay to the vehicle its precise location.

Although the discussion above has centered on cargo transportation as an illustrative example, at least one of the inventions disclosed herein is not limited thereto and in fact can be used with any asset whether movable or fixed where monitoring for any of a variety of reasons is desired. These reasons include environmental monitoring, for example, where asset damage can occur if the temperature, humidity, or other atmospheric phenomena exceeds a certain level. Such a device then could transmit to the telecommunications system when this exception situation occurred. It still could transmit to the system periodically, perhaps once a day, just to indicate that all is OK and that an exceptional situation did not occur.

Another example could be the monitoring of a vacation home during the months when the home is not occupied. Of course, any home could be so monitored even when the occupants leave the home unattended for a party, for example. The monitoring system could determine whether the house is on fire, being burglarized, or whether temperature is dropping to the point that pipes could freeze due to a furnace or power failure. Such a system could be less expensive to install and maintain by a homeowner, for example, than systems supplied by ADT, for example. Naturally, the monitoring of a real estate location could also be applied to industrial, governmental and any other similar sites. Any of the sensors including electromagnetic, cameras, ultrasound, capacitive, chemical, moisture, radiation, biological, temperature, pressure, radiation, etc. could be attached to such a system which would not require any other electrical connection either to a power source or to a communication source such as a telephone line which is currently require by ADT, for example. In fact, most currently installed security and fire systems require both a phone and a power connection. Naturally, if a power source is available it can be used to recharge the batteries or as primary power.

Of particular importance, this system and techniques can be applied to general aviation and the marine community for the monitoring of flight and boat routings. For general aviation, this or a similar system can be used for monitoring the unauthorized approach of planes or boats to public utilities, government buildings, bridges or any other structure and thereby warn of possible terrorist activities.

Portable versions of this system can also be used to monitor living objects such as pets, children, animals, cars, and trucks, or any other asset. What is disclosed herein therefore is a truly general asset monitoring system where the type of monitoring is only limited by requirement that the sensors operate under low power and the device does not require connections to a power source, other than the internal battery, or a wired source of communication. The communication link is generally expected to be via a transmitter and a LEO, geostationary or other satellite, however, it need not be the case and communication can be by cell phone, an ad hoc peer-to-peer network, IEEE 801.11, Bluetooth, or any other wireless system. Thus, using the teachings of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, any asset can be monitored by any of a large variety of sensors and the information communicated wireless to another location which can be a central station, a peer-to-peer network, a link to the owners location, or, preferably, to the Internet.

Additional areas where the principles of the invention can be used for monitoring other objects include the monitoring of electric fields around wires to know when the wires have failed or been cut, the monitoring of vibrations in train rails to know that a train is coming and to enable tracking of the path of trains, the monitoring of vibrations in a road to know that a vehicle is passing, the monitoring of temperature and/or humidity of a road to signal freezing conditions so that a warning could be posted to passing motorists about the conditions of the road, the monitoring of vibrations or flow in a oil pipe to know if the flow of oil has stopped or being diverted so that a determination may be made if the oil is being stolen, the monitoring of infrared or low power (MIR) radar signal monitoring for perimeter security, the monitoring of animals and/or traffic to warn animals that a vehicle is approaching to eliminate car to animal accidents and the monitoring of fluid levels in tanks or reservoirs. It is also possible to monitor grain levels in storage bins, pressure in tanks, chemicals in water or air that could signal a terrorist attack, a pollution spill or the like, carbon monoxide in a garage or tunnel, temperature or vibration of remote equipment as a diagnostic of pending system failure, smoke and fire detectors and radiation. In each case, one or more sensors is provided designed to perform the appropriate, desired sensing, measuring or detecting function and a communications unit is coupled to the sensor(s) to enable transmission of the information obtained by the sensor(s). A processor can be provided to control the sensing function, i.e., to enable only periodic sensing or sensing conditioned on external or internal events. For each of these and many other applications, a signal can be sent to a satellite or other telematics system to send important information to a need-to-know person, monitoring computer program, the Internet etc.

Three other applications of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein need particular mention. Periodically, a boat or barge impacts with the structure of a bridge resulting in the collapse of a road, railroad or highway and usually multiple fatalities. Usually such an event can be sensed prior to the collapse of the structure by monitoring the accelerations, vibrations, displacement, or stresses in the structural members. When such an event is sensed, a message can be sent to a satellite and/or forwarded to the Internet, and thus to the authorities and to a warning sign or signal that has been placed at a location preceding entry onto the bridge. Alternately, the sensing device can send a signal directly to the relevant sign either in addition or instead of to a satellite.

Sometimes the movement of a potentially hazardous cargo in itself is not significantly unless multiple such movements follow a pattern. For example, the shipment of moderate amounts of explosives forwarded to a single location could signify an attack by terrorists. By comparing the motion of containers of hazardous materials and searching for patterns, perhaps using neural networks, fuzzy logic and the like, such concentrations of hazardous material can be forecasted prior to the occurrence of a disastrous event. This information can be gleaned from the total picture of movements of containers throughout a local, state or national area. Similarly, the movement of fuel oil and fertilizer by itself is usually not noteworthy but in combination using different vehicles can signal a potential terrorist attack.

Many automobile owners subscribe to a telematics service such as OnStar®. The majority of these owners when queried say that they subscribe so that if they have an accident and the airbag deploys, the EMS personnel will be promptly alerted. This is the most commonly desired feature by such owners. A second highly desired feature relates to car theft. If a vehicle is stolen, the telematics services can track that vehicle and inform the authorities as to its whereabouts. A third highly desired feature is a method for calling for assistance in any emergency such as the vehicle becomes stalled, is hijacked, runs off the road into a snow bank or other similar event. The biggest negative feature of the telematics services such as OnStar® is the high monthly cost of the service. See also section 9.2.

The invention described here can provide the three above-mentioned highly desired services without requiring a high monthly fee. A simple device that communicates to a satellite or other telematics system can be provided, as described above, that operates either on its own battery and/or by connecting to the cigarette lighter or similar power source. The device can be provided with a microphone and neural network algorithm that has been trained to recognize the noise signature of an airbag deployment or the information that a crash transpired can be obtained from an accelerometer. Thus, if the vehicle is in an accident, the EMS authorities can be immediately notified of the crash along with the precise location of the vehicle. Similarly, if the vehicle is stolen, its exact whereabouts can be determined through an Internet connection, for example. Finally, a discrete button placed in the vehicle can send a panic signal to the authorities via a telematics system. Thus, instead of a high monthly charge, the vehicle owner would only be charged for each individual transmission, which can be as low as $0.20 or a small surcharge can be added to the price of the device to cover such costs through averaging over many users. Such a system can be readily retrofitted to existing vehicles providing most of advantages of the OnStar® system, for example, at a very small fraction of its cost. The system can reside in a “sleep” mode for many years until some event wakes it up. In the sleep mode, only a few microamperes of current are drawn and the battery can last the life of the vehicle. A wake-up can be achieved when the airbag fires and the microphone emits a current. Similarly, a piezo-generator can be used to wake up the system based on the movement of a mass or diaphragm displacing a piezoelectric device which then outputs some electrical energy that can be sensed by the system electronics. Similarly, the system can be caused to wake up by a clock or the reception of a proper code from an antenna. Such a generator can also be used to charge the system battery extending its useful life. Such an OnStar®-like system can be manufactured for approximately $100, depending on production volume and features.

The invention described above can be used in any of its forms to monitor fluids. For example, sensors can be provided to monitor fuel or oil reservoirs, tanks or pipelines and spills. Sensors can be arranged in, on, within, in connection with or proximate a reservoir, tank or pipeline and powered in the manner discussed above, and coupled to a communication system as discussed above. When a property of characteristic of the environment is detected by the sensor, for example, detection of a fluid where none is supposed to be (which could be indicative of a spill), the sensor can trigger a communication system to transmit information about the detection of the fluid to a remote site which could send response personnel, i.e., clean-up personnel. The sensors can be designed to detect any variables which could provide meaningful information, such as a flow sensor which could detect variations in flow, or a chemical sensor which could detect the presence of a harmful chemical, biological agent or a radiation sensor which could detect the presence of radioactivity. Appropriate action could be taken in response to the detection of chemicals or radioactivity.

Remote water monitoring is also contemplated in the invention since water supplies are potentially subject to sabotage, e.g., by the placement of harmful chemicals or biological agents in the water supply. In this case, sensors would be arranged in, on, within, in connection with or proximate water reservoirs, tanks or pipelines and powered in the manner discussed above, and coupled to a communication system as discussed above. Information provided by the sensors is periodically communicated to a remote site at which it is monitored. If a sensor detects the presence of a harmful chemical or agent, appropriate action can be taken to stop the flow of water from the reservoir to municipal systems.

Even the pollution of the ocean and other large bodies of water especially in the vicinity of a shore can now be monitored for oil spills and other occurrences.

Similarly, remote air monitoring is contemplated within the scope of the invention. Sensors are arranged at sites to monitor the air and detect, for example, the presence of radioactivity and bacteria. The sensors can send the information to a communication system which transmits the information to a remote site for monitoring. Detection of aberrations in the information from the sensors can lead to initiation of an appropriate response, e.g., evacuation in the event of radioactivity detection.

The monitoring of forests for fires is also a possibility with the present invention, although satellite imaging systems are the preferred approach.

An additional application is the monitoring of borders such as the on between the United States and Mexico. Sensors can be placed periodically along such a border at least partially in the ground that are sensitive to vibrations, infrared radiation, sound or other disturbances. Such sensor systems can also contain a pattern recognition system that is trained to recognize characteristic signals indicating the passing of a person or vehicle. When such a disturbance occurs, the system can “wake-up” and receive and analyze the signal and if it is recognized, a transmission to a communication system can occur. Since the transmission would also contain either a location or an identification number of the device, the authorities would know where the border infraction was occurring.

Above, the discussion of the invention has included the use of a location determining signal such as from a GPS or other location determining system such as the use of time of arrival calculations from receptions from a plurality of cell phone antennas. If the device is located in a fixed place where it is unlikely to move, then the location of that place need only be determined once when the sensor system is put in place. The identification number of the device can then be associated with the device location in a database, for example. Thereafter, just the transmission of the device ID can be used to positively identify the device as well as its location. Even for movable cargo containers, for example, if the container has not moved since the last transmission, there is no need to expend energy receiving and processing the GPS or other location determining signals. If the device merely responds with its identification number, the receiving facility knows its location. The GPS processing circuitry can be reactivated if sensors on the asset determine that the asset has moved.

Once the satellite or other communication system has received a message from the sensor system of at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, it can either store the information into a database or, more commonly, it can retransmit or make available the data usually on the Internet where subscribers can retrieve the data and use it for their own purposes. Since such sensor systems are novel to at least one of the inventions disclosed herein, the transmission of the data via the Internet and the business model of providing such data to subscribing customers either on an as-needed bases or on a push basis where the customer receives an alert is also novel. Thus, for example, a customer may receive an urgent automatically-generated e-mail message or even a pop-up message on a particular screen that there is a problem with a particular asset that needs immediate attention. The customer can be a subscriber, a law enforcement facility, or an emergency services facility, among others.

An additional dimension exists with the use of the Skybitz system, for example, where the asset mounted device has further wireless communications with other devices in or on the asset. The fact that certain tagged items within or on the assets can be verified if a local area network exists between the Skybitz device and other objects. Perhaps it is desired to check that a particular piece of test equipment is located within an asset. Further perhaps it is desired to determine that the piece of equipment is operating or operating within certain parameter ranges, or has a particular temperature etc. Perhaps it is desired to determine whether a particular set of keys are in a key box wherein the keys are fitted with an RFID tag and the box with a reader and method of communicating with the Skybitz device. The possibilities are endless for determining the presence or operating parameters of a component of occupying item of a remote asset and to periodically communicate this information to an internet site, for example, using a low power asset monitoring system such as the Skybitz system.

The Skybitz or similar system can be used with cell phones to provide a location determination in satisfaction to US Federal regulations. The advantage of this use of Skybitz is that it is available world wide and does not require special equipment at the cell phone station. This also permits an owner of a cell phone to determine its whereabouts for cases where it was lost or stolen. Naturally a similar system can be added to PDAs or other CD players, radios, or any other electronic device that a human may carry. Even non electronic devices such as car keys could be outfitted with a Skybitz type device. It is unlikely that such a device would have a 10 year life but many of them have batteries that are periodically charged and the others could have a very low duty cycle such that they last up to one year without replacement of the battery and then inform the owner that the battery is low. This information process could even involve the sending of an email message to the owner's email stating the location of the device and the fact that the battery needs replacement.

Although several preferred embodiments are illustrated and described above, there are possible combinations using other signals and sensors for the components and different forms of the neural network implementation or different pattern recognition technologies that perform the same functions which can be utilized in accordance with the invention. Also, although the neural network and modular neural networks have been described as an example of one means of pattern recognition, other pattern recognition means exist and still others are being developed which can be used to identify potential component failures by comparing the operation of a component over time with patterns characteristic of normal and abnormal component operation. In addition, with the pattern recognition system described above, the input data to the system may be data which has been pre-processed rather than the raw signal data either through a process called “feature extraction” or by various mathematical transformations. Also, any of the apparatus and methods disclosed herein may be used for diagnosing the state of operation or a plurality of discrete components.

Although several preferred embodiments are illustrated and described above, there are possible combinations using other geometries, sensors, materials and different dimensions for the components that perform the same functions. At least one of the inventions disclosed herein is not limited to the above embodiments and should be determined by the following claims. There are also numerous additional applications in addition to those described above. Many changes, modifications, variations and other uses and applications of the subject invention will, however, become apparent to those skilled in the art after considering this specification and the accompanying drawings which disclose the preferred embodiments thereof. All such changes, modifications, variations and other uses and applications which do not depart from the spirit and scope of the invention are deemed to be covered by the invention which is limited only by the following claims. 

1. A vehicle, comprising: a plurality of parts or components defining an interior space in which one or more objects can be situated, said parts or components including a first substructure and a second substructure arranged opposite at least a part of said first substructure such that the interior space is defined in part by said first and second substructures; and an arrangement for determining whether an object is present in said interior space, said arrangement comprising: at least one ultrasonic transducer arranged on said second substructure and to transmit ultrasonic waves toward said first substructure and receive any waves reflected by objects in the interior space; and a processor coupled to said at least one ultrasonic transducer and arranged to determine whether an object is present in the interior space based on any reception of waves by said at least one ultrasonic transducer.
 2. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said at least one ultrasonic transducer is controlled to associate reception of waves in discrete periods of time with specific timed transmissions of waves, said arrangement further comprising a processing circuit coupled to said at least one ultrasonic transducer and arranged to remove at least one portion of the waves received by said at least one ultrasonic transducer in each time period to thereby form shortened returned waves, said processor being coupled to said processing circuit and arranged to determine whether an object is present in the interior space based on the shortened returned waves formed by said processing circuit.
 3. The vehicle of claim 2, wherein said at least one portion of the waves removed is an end wave portion at the end of the time period.
 4. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said at least one ultrasonic transducer comprises a plurality of ultrasonic transducers arranged on said second substructure in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields.
 5. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said processor comprises a pattern recognition algorithm.
 6. The vehicle of claim 5, wherein said pattern recognition algorithm comprises a neural network arranged to determine whether an object is present in a training stage in which ultrasonic waves received by said at least one ultrasonic transducer in the absence of objects in the interior space and ultrasonic waves received by said at least one ultrasonic transducer with objects present in the interior space are collected and used to derive the neural network.
 7. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein the vehicle is an automobile, said interior space is a passenger compartment in the automobile, said first substructure is a front passenger seat and said second substructure is an A-pillar, said processor being arranged to determined the presence or absence of a passenger in said passenger seat.
 8. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said at least one ultrasonic transducer is mounted at or proximate a top of said second substructure such that waves are transmitted in a downward direction toward the first substructure.
 9. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said arrangement further comprises temperature determining means for determining the temperature of the atmosphere in the interior space and modification means coupled to said at least one transducer for modifying transmission of the ultrasonic waves or processing of the received ultrasonic waves based on the determined temperature.
 10. The vehicle of claim 9, wherein said modification means are arranged to modify a frequency at which the ultrasonic waves are transmitted based on the determined temperature to provide for a substantially constant wavelength of the transmitted ultrasonic waves over a range of temperatures.
 11. The vehicle of claim 9, wherein said modification means are arranged to determine the size of a portion of waves to be removed from a larger set of waves received during each discrete period of time based on the determined temperature such that the analyzed waves emanate from the same distance or distance range from the at least one transducer.
 12. The vehicle of claim 1, wherein said arrangement further comprises: humidity determining means for determining the humidity of the atmosphere in the interior space; and parameter determining means for determining at least one acceptable or optimum parameter for the transmission of ultrasonic waves via said at least one ultrasonic transducer or for the reception of ultrasonic waves via said at least one ultrasonic transducer based on the determined humidity whereby each of the at least one parameter is designed to compensate for any increased attenuation of ultrasonic waves resulting from humidity above a threshold, the ultrasonic waves being transmitted via said at least one ultrasonic transducer into the interior space using the at least one determined parameter or any reflected waves being received via said at least one ultrasonic transducer using the at least one determined parameter, said parameter determining means being arranged to optionally determine transmission power of the ultrasonic waves or amplification for the reception of the ultrasonic waves.
 13. A vehicle, comprising: a plurality of parts or components defining an interior space in which one or more objects can be situated, said parts or components including a first substructure and a second substructure arranged opposite at least a part of said first substructure such that the interior space is defined in part by said first and second substructures; and an arrangement for determining whether an object is present in said interior space, said arrangement comprising: transmitting means arranged on said second substructure for transmitting ultrasonic waves at different times toward said first substructure; receiving means arranged on said second substructure for receiving any waves reflected from objects in the interior space during a period of time after each transmission; and processor means coupled to said transmitting means and said receiving means for determining whether an object is present in the interior space based on any waves received by said receiving means.
 14. The vehicle of claim 13, wherein said receiving means is arranged to associate reception of waves in discrete periods of time with specific timed transmissions of waves, said arrangement further comprising a processing circuit coupled to said receiving means and arranged to remove at least one portion of the waves received by said receiving means in each time period to thereby form shortened returned waves, said processor means being coupled to said processing circuit and arranged to determine whether an object is present in the interior space based on the shortened returned waves formed by said processing circuit.
 15. The vehicle of claim 14, wherein said at least one portion of the waves removed is an end wave portion at the end of the time period.
 16. The vehicle of claim 13, wherein said transmitting means and said receiving means comprise a plurality of ultrasonic transducers arranged on said second substructure in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields.
 17. The vehicle of claim 13, wherein said processor means comprise a pattern recognition algorithm.
 18. The vehicle of claim 17, wherein said pattern recognition algorithm comprises a neural network arranged to determine whether an object is present in a training stage in which ultrasonic waves received by said receiving means in the absence of objects in the interior space and ultrasonic waves received by said receiving means with objects present in the interior space are collected and used to derive the neural network.
 19. The vehicle of claim 13, wherein the vehicle is an automobile, said interior space is a passenger compartment in the automobile, said first substructure is a front passenger seat and said second substructure is an A-pillar, said processor means being arranged to determined the presence or absence of a passenger in said passenger seat.
 20. A method for determining whether an object is present in an interior space of a movable asset, comprising: arranging at least one ultrasonic transducer on one side of the interior space; transmitting ultrasonic waves via the at least one ultrasonic transducer into the interior space; receiving any waves reflected from objects in the interior space via the at least one ultrasonic transducer; when waves are received, removing at least one portion of the received waves in a discrete period of time to thereby form shortened waves; and determining whether an object is present in the interior space based on any reception of waves by the at least one ultrasonic transducer and when waves are received in a discrete period of time, upon analysis of the shortened wave formed therefrom.
 21. The method of claim 20, wherein the step of removing at least one portion of the received waves comprises removing an end wave portion ending at the end of a data sampling interval.
 22. The method of claim 20, wherein the step of arranging at least one ultrasonic transducer comprises arranging a plurality of ultrasonic transducers in positions in which they have different transmission and reception fields.
 23. The method of claim 20, wherein the receiving step comprises receiving any waves reflected from objects in the interior space during a succession of time windows following transmissions of ultrasonic waves, and upon reception of any waves, removing at least one portion of the received waves in each time window to thereby form shortened waves. 